CopyrightThis document is Copyright © 2023 by the LibreOffice Documentation Team. Contributors arelisted below. This document maybe distributed and/or modified under the terms of either the GNU
General Public License (https://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html), version 3 or later, or the Creative
Commons Attribution License (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/), version 4.0 or later.
All trademarks within this guide belong to their legitimate owners.

Contributors
Contributors for this edition:Peter Schofield
Contributors for previous editions:
Claire Wood
Hazel Russman
Dave Barton
Jean Hollis Weber
Dimona Delvere
Kees Kriek
Felipe Viggiano
Linda Worthington
Gary Schnabl
Low Song Chuan

Michele Zarri
Olivier Hallot
Peter Hillier-Brook
Peter Schofield
Rachel Kartch

Regina HenschelSamantha Hamilton
T. Elliot Turner
Vasudev Narayanan

Feedback
Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to the Documentation Team
mailing list: loguides@community.documentfoundation.org.

Note
Everything sent to a forum, including email addresses and any other personal
information that is written in the message, is publicly archived and cannot bedeleted. Emails sent to the forum are moderated.

Publication date and software version
Published June 2023. Based on LibreOffice 7.5 Community.
Other versions of LibreOffice may differ in appearance and functionality.

Documentation for LibreOffice is available at https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/Contents
Copyright....................................................................................................................................2

Preface.............................................................................................................................. 7
Who is this user guide for?.........................................................................................................8
What is in this user guide?..........................................................................................................8
What is LibreOffice?...................................................................................................................8
Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice..............................................................................8
How to get LibreOffice................................................................................................................8
Installing LibreOffice...................................................................................................................9
Setting up and customizing LibreOffice......................................................................................9
Extensions and add-ons.............................................................................................................9
Where to get more help..............................................................................................................9
What you see may be different.................................................................................................11
Using LibreOffice on macOS....................................................................................................13
Who wrote this user guide?......................................................................................................14
Frequently asked questions......................................................................................................14
What is new in LibreOffice 7.5?................................................................................................15

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress....................................................................................17
Introduction...............................................................................................................................18
Starting Impress........................................................................................................................18
Main Impress window...............................................................................................................20
Workspace views......................................................................................................................27
Creating presentations..............................................................................................................31
Running a presentation.............................................................................................................38

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates........................................................41
Designing a presentation..........................................................................................................42
What are master slides?...........................................................................................................42
Working with master slides.......................................................................................................43
Working with styles...................................................................................................................61
Working with templates.............................................................................................................66

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.......................................................................73
Introduction...............................................................................................................................74
Working with text boxes............................................................................................................74
Inserting text.............................................................................................................................88
Formatting text..........................................................................................................................91
Creating lists.............................................................................................................................97
Text callouts............................................................................................................................101
Tables.....................................................................................................................................104
Using fields.............................................................................................................................112
Using hyperlinks......................................................................................................................114

Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images................................................................119
Introduction.............................................................................................................................120

Impress Guide 7.5 | 3

Images....................................................................................................................................120
Gallery themes........................................................................................................................123
Formatting images..................................................................................................................125
Creating image maps..............................................................................................................137

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects.......................................................................141
Introduction.............................................................................................................................142
Drawing toolbar.......................................................................................................................142
Creating lines and shapes......................................................................................................148
Grouping objects.....................................................................................................................153
Positioning and resizing graphic objects................................................................................155
Applying special effects..........................................................................................................159
Aligning objects.......................................................................................................................164
Using grid or snap functions...................................................................................................164
Using Helplines.......................................................................................................................170
Arranging objects....................................................................................................................171
Connectors and gluepoints.....................................................................................................171
Working with 3D objects.........................................................................................................178
Converting objects..................................................................................................................179
Interaction with objects...........................................................................................................180
Fontwork.................................................................................................................................181
Animations..............................................................................................................................184

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.....................................................................193
Introduction.............................................................................................................................194
Working with lines...................................................................................................................194
Using area fills........................................................................................................................202
Working with area fill types.....................................................................................................204
Working with shadows............................................................................................................220
Working with transparencies...................................................................................................222
Text in objects.........................................................................................................................224
Formatting connectors............................................................................................................227
Working with drawing styles...................................................................................................228

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects.....................................233
OLE objects............................................................................................................................234
Spreadsheets..........................................................................................................................236
Charts.....................................................................................................................................247
Audio and video......................................................................................................................253
Formulas.................................................................................................................................255
Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects..................................................................256

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts.......257
Working with slides.................................................................................................................258
Creating slides from an outline...............................................................................................262
Formatting slides....................................................................................................................265
Presentation notes..................................................................................................................271

4| Impress Guide 7.5

Inserting comments................................................................................................................278
Printing handouts....................................................................................................................279

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums...............................................................283
Introduction.............................................................................................................................284
Creating slide shows...............................................................................................................284
Slide transitions......................................................................................................................289
Animations..............................................................................................................................292
Using interactions...................................................................................................................299
Slide shows.............................................................................................................................300
Photo albums..........................................................................................................................304

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting......................309
Saving slide shows.................................................................................................................310
Printing....................................................................................................................................311
Printing examples...................................................................................................................322
Emailing..................................................................................................................................324
Exporting.................................................................................................................................325
Redaction................................................................................................................................330

Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress....................................................333
Introduction.............................................................................................................................334
LibreOffice options..................................................................................................................334
Impress options......................................................................................................................339
Customizing user interface.....................................................................................................345
Adding extensions..................................................................................................................345

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants............................................................................347
Introduction.............................................................................................................................348
Selecting a user interface.......................................................................................................348
Standard Toolbar....................................................................................................................349
Tabbed....................................................................................................................................349
Single Toolbar.........................................................................................................................355
Sidebar...................................................................................................................................355
Tabbed Compact.....................................................................................................................355
Groupedbar Compact.............................................................................................................356
Contextual Single....................................................................................................................356

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts...............................................................................357
Introduction.............................................................................................................................358
macOS keyboard shortcuts....................................................................................................358
Impress keyboard shortcuts...................................................................................................359
Menu keyboard shortcuts.......................................................................................................363
Toolbar keyboard shortcuts....................................................................................................368

Appendix B, Toolbars..................................................................................................372
Introduction.............................................................................................................................373
Using toolbars.........................................................................................................................373
Toolbars..................................................................................................................................376
Impress Guide 7.5 | 5

Sub-toolbars...........................................................................................................................392

6| Impress Guide 7.5

Impress Guide 7.5

PrefaceWho is this user guide for?
Anyone who wants to quickly acquire knowledge on LibreOffice Impress and is new topresentation software, or may be familiar with another office suite, will find this user guide very
useful.
LibreOffice is an open-source office productivity software suite containing capabilities for word
processing, spreadsheets, presentations, graphics, databases, and formula editing. LibreOffice
Impress is used as a visual aid and is the presentations application for LibreOffice. It is
compatible with a wide range of formats like Microsoft PowerPoint (.ppt, .pptx). Presentations canbe exported in several file formats, for example, PDF, HTML, and numerous graphic formats.

What is in this user guide?
This user guide introduces the main features of Impress, the presentations (slide show) moduleof LibreOffice. Impress slides can contain text, bulleted and numbered lists, tables, charts, clip
art, and other objects. Also, Impress comes with prepackaged styles, slide backgrounds, andtemplates to help in creating presentations.

What is LibreOffice?
LibreOffice is a freely available, fully-featured, open source office productivity suite that iscompatible with other major office suites and is available on a variety of platforms. The native fileformat used is Open Document Format (ODF). However, LibreOffice can also open and save
documents in many other formats, including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office.
For more information, see the Getting Started Guide.

Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice
LibreOffice 7.5 requires one of the following operating systems:
Linux x64 (deb) and Linux x64 (rpm)
Mac OS X (Aarch64/Apple Silicon)
macOS x86_64 (10.14 Mojave or higher)
Windows x86_64 (Windows 7 or newer required)
For a detailed list of requirements and operating systems supported, see the LibreOffice website,
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/system-requirements/.

How to get LibreOffice
Versions of LibreOffice for Windows, Linux, and macOS are freely available and can be
downloaded from https://www.libreoffice.org/download. Linux users will also find LibreOfficeincluded free in many of the latest distributions.
Linux, Vanilla, and other versions may differ in a few features from the descriptions in this user
guide. LibreOffice is included in many of the latest Linux distributions, for example Ubuntu.
Portable and other versions of LibreOffice are listed on the download page. LibreOffice is alsoavailable in the Microsoft Store and Apple Mac App Store at a low and attractive price. The profits
from the sale of LibreOffice are invested to support the development of the LibreOffice project.

8 | Impress Guide 7.5

Installing LibreOfficeInformation on installing LibreOffice on the various supported operating systems can be found at
this web page: https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/install-howto/. When LibreOffice is acquired
through official app stores, follow the installation instructions provided by the store.

Setting up and customizing LibreOffice
After installation, to change the default settings (options) in LibreOffice to suit working
requirements and preferences, go to Tools > Options on the Menu bar (mac OS LibreOffice >Preferences).

Tip
Many settings are intended for power users and programmers. If it is difficult tounderstand what an option does, LibreOffice recommended leaving the option on
its default setting unless instructions in this user guide recommend changing thesetting.
Settings are described in LibreOffice Help and the Getting Started Guide. These two sources
provide information on how to customize menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts in LibreOffice
Impress, add new menus and toolbars, and assign macros to events. Some settings specific to
Impress are covered in Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress.

Extensions and add-ons
Functionality can be added to LibreOffice with extensions and add-ons. Several extensions are
installed with the program and other extensions from the official extensions repository,
https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ or from other sources. See the Getting Started Guide for more
information on installing extensions and add-ons.

Where to get more help
This user guide, the Help system, and user support systems assume that users are familiar withcomputers and basic functions such as starting a program, opening and saving files.

Help system
LibreOffice comes with an extensive Help system and this can be used as the first line of support.
Windows and Linux users can choose to download and install the offline Help for use when notconnected to the Internet. Offline Help is installed with the MacOS version of LibreOffice.
To display the LibreOffice Help, press F1 or go to Help > LibreOffice Help on the Menu bar. If
the offline help is not installed on a computer, but connected to the Internet, a dialog opens giving
the option to Read Help Online. Select this option and the default web browser opens at the
LibreOffice online help pages in the LibreOffice website.
The Help menu includes links to other LibreOffice information and support facilities. The Help
menu also includes links to other LibreOffice information and support resources.

Preface | 9

What's This?
For quick tips when a toolbar is visible, place the cursor over a tool icon to see a small
tooltip box with a brief explanation of the tool function. For a more detailed explanation,
select Help > What's This? Also Extended Tips can be activated by going to Tools >Options > LibreOffice > General > Help (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > General > Help) on the Menu bar and selecting the option Extended Tips.
Extended tips provide a brief description about tools and commands. To display anextended tip, use the keyboard Shift+F1, then point to a tool or command.
User Guides
Opens the default browser at the Documentation page of the LibreOffice website
https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/english-documentation/. This page gives accessto the LibreOffice User Guides and other useful information that can be opened in thedefault browser. Also, the User Guides are available in PDF format as a free download or
to buy as printed copies.
Show Tip of the Day
Opens a small window with a random tip on how to use LibreOffice.
Search Commands
Opens a window where typing a few letters, or the name of a Menu bar command, forexample, quickly finds where the command is located. Clicking on a command in the
resulting list may open a relevant dialog or have other effects.
Get Help Online
Opens the default browser at the Ask LibreOffice forum of questions and answers fromthe LibreOffice community, https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions/.
Send Feedback
Opens the default browser at the Feedback page of the LibreOffice website
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/feedback/. From this page, bugs can be reported, newfeatures suggested and communicated with other users in the LibreOffice community.
Restart in Safe Mode
Opens a dialog window giving options to restart LibreOffice and reset the software to its
default settings. Restarting in safe mode also provides an opportunity to restore
LibreOffice from a backup.
Get Involved
Opens the default browser at the Get Involved page of the LibreOffice website,
https://www.libreoffice.org/community/get-involved/. Choose a topic of interest to help
improve the program.
Donate to LibreOfficeOpens the default browser at the Donation page of the LibreOffice website,
https://donate.libreoffice.org/ providing an opportunity to make a donation to support
LibreOffice.
License Information
Outlines the licenses under which LibreOffice is made available.
Check for Updates
Opens a dialog and checks the LibreOffice website for updates to version of the software.
The dialog provides an opportunity to download and install any updates to LibreOffice.
About LibreOfficeOpens a dialog and displays information about the version of LibreOffice and theoperating system being used. This information is often requested if the community is
asked for help or assistance with the software (on macOS, this option is found under
LibreOffice on the Menu bar}.

10 | Impress Guide 7.5

Other free online support
The LibreOffice community not only develops software, but provides free, volunteer-based
support. See Table 1 and the web page https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/. For comprehensive
online support from the community, look at mailing lists and the Ask LibreOffice website,
https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions/. Other user websites also offer free tips and tutorials.
Table 1: Free support for LibreOffice users
Free LibreOffice support
FAQs

Answers to frequently asked questions
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Faq

Mailing lists

Free community support is provided by a network of experiencedusers
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/mailing-lists/

Questions & Answers
andKnowledge BaseFree community assistance is provided in a Question & Answer
formatted web service. Search similar topics or open a new one in
https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions
The service is available in several other languages; just replace/en/ with de, es, fr, ja, ko, nl, pt, tr, and many others in the web
address above.

Native language
supportThe LibreOffice website in various languages
https://www.libreoffice.org/community/nlc/
Mailing lists for native languages
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Local_Mailing_Lists
Information about social networking
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Website/Web_Sites_services

Accessibility options

Information about available accessibility options.
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/accessibility/

OpenOffice Forum

Another forum that provides support for LibreOffice, among otheropen source office suites. https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/

Paid support and training
Support and training is available through service contracts from a vendor or consulting firm
specializing in LibreOffice. For information about certified professional support, see The
Document Foundation website: https://www.documentfoundation.org/gethelp/support/.
For schools, educational and research institutions, and large organizations, see
https://www.libreoffice.org/download/libreoffice-in-business/.

What you see may be different
Illustrations
LibreOffice runs on Windows, Linux, and macOS operating systems, each of which has several
versions and can be customized by users (fonts, colors, themes, window managers). The
illustrations in this guide were taken from a variety of computers and operating systems.
Therefore, some illustrations will not look exactly like what is seen on a computer display.
Also, some of the dialogs may differ because of the settings selected in LibreOffice. Either use
dialogs from the computer system (default) or dialogs provided by LibreOffice.

Preface | 11

To change to using LibreOffice dialogs:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > General) on the Menu bar to open the dialog page for general options(Figure 1).
2) Select the option Use LibreOffice dialogs in Open/Save dialogs to display the LibreOfficedialogs on a computer display.
3) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

Figure 1: Options LibreOffice — General page

Figure 2: Options LibreOffice dialog — View page

12 | Impress Guide 7.5

IconsThe LibreOffice community has created icons for several icon sets, for example Breeze, Colibre,
Elementary, and Sifr. Each user can select a preferred set of fonts to use. The icons used toillustrate some of the many tools available in LibreOffice may differ from the ones used in thisguide. The icons in this user guide have been taken from a LibreOffice installation that has been
set to display the Colibre set of icons.
Change the icon set used in a LibreOffice installation as follows:
1) On Linux and Windows operating systems, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > View
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > View) on the Menu bar to open the
dialog page for view options (Figure 2).
2) In Icon Theme, select a font from the options available in the drop-down list.
3) In Icon Size, select the required size from the drop-down lists for Toolbar, Notebookbar
and Sidebar.
4) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

Notes
Some Linux operating systems, for example Ubuntu, include LibreOffice as part ofthe installation and may not include the required icon set. This icon set can be
downloaded from the software repository for the Linux operating system being
used.
Some of the previously included icon sets are now available only as extensions;see https://extensions.libreoffice.org/?Tags%5B%5D=49 or search for specificones. For example, the People Gallery is available fromhttps://extensions.libreoffice.org/en/extensions/show/people-gallery.

Using LibreOffice on macOS
Some keystrokes and menu items are different on macOS from those used in Windows andLinux. Table 2 below gives some common substitutions used in this user guide. For more
information on keyboard shortcuts, see LibreOffice help and Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts inthis user guide.
Table 2: Example of macOS keyboard shortcuts
Windows or LinuxmacOS equivalent

EffectTools > Options on
Menu barLibreOffice > Preferenceson Menu bar

Access to setup options

Right-click

Ctrl+click and/or right-click
Opens a context menu
depending on computer
setup

Ctrl or Control⌘ and/or Cmd or Command,
Used with other keys
depending on keyboard

Alt⌥ and/or Alt or Option
depending on keyboard

Used with other keys

F11

⌘+T

Open the Styles deck in the
SidebarPreface | 13

Who wrote this user guide?
This user guide was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community. Profits from sales ofthe printed edition are used to benefit the community.

Frequently asked questions
How is LibreOffice licensed?
LibreOffice is distributed under the Open Source Initiative (OSI) approved Mozilla Public
License (MPL). See https://www.libreoffice.org/about-us/licenses/.
It is based on code from Apache OpenOffice made available under the Apache License
2.0 but also includes software that differs from version to version under a variety of other
Open Source licenses. New code is available under LGPL 3.0 and MPL 2.0.
Can LibreOffice be distributed to anyone?
Yes.
Can LibreOffice be sold?
Yes.
Can LibreOffice be used in a business?
Yes.
How many computers can LibreOffice be installed on?
As many as required.
Is LibreOffice available in different languages?
LibreOffice has been translated (localized for more than 80%, both UI and Help) into over46 languages, so a required language is probably supported. Localization is well under
way for another 30+ languages (50-80%) and for another 50+ languages help is morethan welcome. In addition, over 70 spelling, hyphenation, and thesaurus dictionaries areavailable for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface. The
dictionaries are available from the LibreOffice website at: www.libreoffice.org.
How can LibreOffice be freely available?
LibreOffice is developed and maintained by volunteers and has the backing of several
organizations. LibreOffice also relies upon donations from its users. To make a donation,
go to the following web page: https://www.libreoffice.org/donate/.
Can the programming code from LibreOffice be used when developing a software
application?
Yes, but follow the parameters set in the MPL and/or LGPL. Read the licenses:
https://www.mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
Why is Java required to run LibreOffice? Is it written in Java?
LibreOffice is not written in Java; it is written in the C++ language. Java is one of several
languages that can be used to extend the software. The Java JDK/JRE is only required
for some features. The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine.
Java is available at no cost. More information and download links to the appropriate
edition for an operating system can be found at: https://java.com/en/download/manual.jsp

Note
If the LibreOffice features that require Java are to be used, it is important that thecorrect 32-bit or 64-bit edition matches the installed version of LibreOffice. If Javais not to be used, nearly all of the LibreOffice features can still be used.

14 | Impress Guide 7.5

How can users contribute to LibreOffice?
Users can help with the development and user support of LibreOffice in many ways, andthere is no need to be a programmer. To start, check out this webpage:https://www.libreoffice.org/community/get-involved/. An interactive web page that guides
users in contributing with their best skills available at https://whatcanidoforlibreoffice.org.
Can the PDF copy of this user guide be distributed, or printed and copies sold?
Yes, as long as requirements are met for one of the licenses in the copyright statement at
the beginning of this user guide. There is no need to request special permission.
LibreOffice requests that users share with the LibreOffice project some of the profits madefrom sales of user guides, in consideration of all the work that LibreOffice volunteers have
put into producing user guides.
Donate to LibreOffice: https://www.libreoffice.org/donate/.

What is new in LibreOffice 7.5?
The LibreOffice 7.5 Release Notes are available at this link
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/ReleaseNotes/7.5.
Also at this link, the release notes for earlier versions of LibreOffice are located giving more
information on the features that are included in LibreOffice.
Noticeable improvements or enhancements to this version include the following:• A new set of application and mime types icons as shown in Figure 3. The icon groups
are, from left to right, standard (apps), standard (mime types), macOS specific.
• Support for dark and high contrast operating system themes on Windows, macOS andLinux is improved.
• The Start Center can now filter recent documents by type.

Figure 3: New application icons

Preface | 15

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 1,
Introducing Impress
Presentations in LibreOfficeIntroduction
Impress is the presentation (slide show) module included in LibreOffice. Impress createspresentations using the Open Document Presentation (ODP) format, which can be opened byother presentation software, or exported in different presentation formats.
Slides created can contain many different elements, including text, bulleted and numbered lists,tables, charts, and a wide range of graphic objects such as clipart, drawings and photographs.
Impress also includes a spelling checker, a thesaurus, text styles, and background styles.
This chapter introduces the Impress user interface. The remaining chapters in this user guide
explain features available in Impress that are used to create more sophisticated slide shows.
To use Impress for more than very simple presentations requires some knowledge of theelements which are used in slides. Slides containing text use styles to determine the appearanceof text. Creating drawings in Impress is similar to the Draw module included in LibreOffice. It is
recommended to consult the Draw Guide for more details on how to use drawing tools.

Starting Impress
Impress can be started in several ways:• From the LibreOffice Start Center that opens when LibreOffice is opened and no other
LibreOffice module is open.
– Click on Impress Presentation to create a new presentation.
– Click on Open File and navigate to the folder that contains an existing presentation.
– Click on Remote Files and navigate to the remote server and folder that contains anexisting presentation.
• From the system menu using a standard menu from which most applications are started.
Details vary with the operating system. See the Getting Started Guide for more
information, some examples are listed below:– Start menu in Windows.
– Applications menu in Linux with a Gnome desktop.
– Applications menu in macOS.
• From any open module of LibreOffice.
– Go to File > New > Presentation on the Menu bar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to New on the Standard toolbar and select Presentationfrom the drop-down menu.

Notes
When LibreOffice is installed on a computer, a menu entry for each component isnormally added to the system menu. The exact name and location of these menu
entries depend on the operating system and graphical user interface.
The New icon displayed on the Standard toolbar depends on which LibreOfficemodule is open when creating a new presentation.

18 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 4: Main Impress window
1)
2)
3)

Slides paneWorkspace
SidebarFigure 5: Select a Template dialog

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 19

When starting Impress, the main Impress window (Figure 4) opens and, as default, with theSelect a Template dialog displayed (Figure 5). Templates included with Impress are designed to
fit the two standard sizes of presentation slides: 4:3 and 16:9 ratios. However, templates will
adapt to other sizes that are available and can be selected by going to Slide > Slide Properties> Paper Format on the Menu bar, or Format in the Slide panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar.

Tips
To start Impress without the Select a Template dialog opening, deselect the option
Show this dialog at startup in the lower left of the dialog. Alternatively, go toTools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General)on the Menu bar and deselectStart with Template Selection in New Document.

Main Impress window
The main Impress window (Figure 4) has three main sections: Slides pane, Workspace, andSidebar. At the top of the main window is the Menu bar and toolbars. Toolbars can be displayedor hidden during the creation of a presentation.

Tips
The Slides pane and/or Sidebar can be closed by clicking the X in the upper rightcorner of each pane, or go to View > Slide Pane or View > Sidebar on the Menu
bar to deselect. To reopen a pane, select View > Slides pane or View > Sidebar
on the Menu bar.
To maximize the Workspace area click on the Hide/Show marker in the middle ofthe vertical separator line (highlighted in Figure 4). Using the Hide/Show marker
hides the Slides pane or Sidebar, but does not close them. To restore the Slides
pane or Sidebar, click again on its Hide/Show marker.

Menu bar
The Impress Menu bar, at the top of the main window, provides several menus common to all
LibreOffice modules. The commands may differ between each LibreOffice module for File, Edit,
View, Insert, Format, Tools, Window, and Help. Impress has two extra menus for Slide andSlide Show. When a menu is selected, a submenu drops down to show commands. The Menu
bar can be customized and for more information, see the Getting Started Guide.

Workspace
The Workspace (normally the center of the main window) opens in the Normal view. It has fourstandard views of Normal, Outline, Notes, and Slide Sorter (Figure 6). For more information on
workspace views, see “Workspace views” page 27.

Figure 6: Workspace view tabs

20 | Impress Guide 7.5

If master slides are being used, then master views become available: Master Slide, Master
Notes and Master Handout. There are no tabs for master views and these are selected by goingto View on the Menu bar. For more information on master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide
Masters, Styles, and Templates.

Slides pane
The Slides pane displays thumbnail images of slides in a presentation in the order in which theslides are shown. The slide show order can be changed and is described in Chapter 9, Slide
Shows & Photo Albums. Clicking on a slide image in the Slides pane selects it and places theslide in the Workspace where changes are made to the displayed slide.
• To display or close the Slides pane, go to View > Slide Pane on the Menu bar.
• To close the Slides pane, click on the X in the right top corner of the Slides pane.
• To display or hide the Slides pane, use the Hide/Show marker on the left of theWorkspace.
Several additional operations can be carried out on one or more slides in the Slides pane. Also,these additional operations are available from a context menu when right-clicking on a slide in
the Slides pane.
• Add new slides to a presentation.
• Duplicate a slide.
• Rename a slide.
• Hide a slide so that it will not show in a presentation.
• Delete a slide from a presentation.
• Move a slide to another position in the slide order by dragging and dropping it to thedesired position.
• Change the layout for a slide, or a group of slides.
• Navigate to select slides in the presentation.
• Move a slide to another position in the slide sequence.
• Change slide properties by opening the Slide Properties dialog.

SidebarThe Impress Sidebar, normally located on the right side of the Workspace, is similar to the
Sidebar in the other LibreOffice module and consists of eight decks. To display or hide theSidebar, use one of the following methods:• Go to View > Sidebar on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F5 (macOS ⌘+F5).
• Use the Hide/Show marker on the right of the Workspace (Figure 4 on page 19).
• To hide the Sidebar, click on the X in the right top corner of the Sidebar.
• To display the Sidebar, click on one of the Sidebar icons to open a deck.
To open a Sidebar deck, use one of the following methods:• Click on its icon on the right side of the Sidebar.
• Click on Sidebar Settings at the top of the Sidebar and select a deck from thedrop-down list.
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 21

• Use one of the available keyboard shortcuts for Sidebar decks.

Properties
The Properties deck has ten panels, allowing the slide layout to be changed and objects
formatted on a slide (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+1, macOS ⌘+⌥+1).
• When a slide is selected and appears in the Workspace, the Properties deck opens with
the Slides and Layouts panels available.
• When an object on a slide is selected, the Properties deck has the following panels
available: Character, Lists, Paragraph, Area, Shadow, Line, Position and Size,
Columns, Effect, and Image. Actual panels displayed depends on the type of object
selected.

StylesOn the Styles deck, drawing and presentation styles are applied to a selected object, new styles
created for drawing and presentation, and both types of styles can be modified. When saving
changes to a style, the changes are applied to all of the elements formatted with that style in thepresentation. For more information on styles, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles, andTemplates (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+2, macOS ⌘+⌥+2).

Gallery
On the Gallery deck, an object is inserted into a presentation either as a copy or as a link. A copyof an object is independent of the original object. Changes to the original object have no effect on
the copy. A link remains dependent on the original object. Changes to the original object are also
reflected in the link (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+3, macOS ⌘+⌥+3).

Navigator
The Navigator deck displays all objects contained in a presentation. It provides a convenient way
to move between slides in a presentation or select an object on a slide. It is recommended togive slides and objects in a presentation meaningful names for easy identification when using theNavigator (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+4, macOS ⌘+⌥+4). For more information, see“Navigator” on page 25.

ShapesThe Shapes deck provides panels for quick selection of basic shapes that are available on the
Drawing toolbar: Lines and Arrows, Curves and Polygons, Connectors, Basic Shapes,
Symbol Shapes, Block Arrows, Flowchart, Callout Shapes, Stars and Banners, and 3-D
Objects (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+5, macOS ⌘+⌥+5).

Slide transition
The Slide Transition deck provides a selection of slide transitions used in a slide show. There arecontrols to adjust transition speed, automatic or manual transition, and how long a selected slide
is shown (automatic transition only) (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+6, macOS ⌘+⌥+6). For
more information on transitions, see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.

Animation
The Animation deck is used to add, change, or remove animations for different elements orobjects on a slide and adjust how they appear during a slide show (keyboard shortcut
Ctrl+Alt+7, macOS ⌘+⌥+7). For more information on animation, see Chapter 9, Slide
Shows & Photo Albums.

22 | Impress Guide 7.5

Master slides
The Master Slides deck provides access to slide designs for slide shows and several designs ofmaster slides are available. The default master slide is blank, but the remaining master slides
have backgrounds and styled text (keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+8, macOS ⌘+⌥+8). For more
information on master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates.

RulersRulers are positioned on the upper and left-hand sides of the Workspace. If the rulers are notvisible, go to View > Rulers in the Menu bar. Rulers show the size of a selected object on theslide using double lines (highlighted in Figure 7). Also, rulers are used to manage object handles
and guide lines when positioning objects.
To change the measurement units of the rulers, right-click on a ruler and select the measurement
unit from the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 8 for the horizontal ruler. The horizontal andvertical rulers can be set to different measurement units.
The page margins in the drawing area are also represented on the rulers. The margins can bechanged directly on the rulers by dragging them with the cursor. The margin area is indicated byeither a grayed out area on the rulers or borders around the unused area of the ruler. This marginindication depends on computer setup and operating system.

Figure 7: Rulers showing object size

Figure 8: Changing ruler units

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 23

Note
The sizes are given in the current measurement unit and might not be the sameas the ruler units. The measurement unit on the Status bar is defined in Tools >Options > LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences> LibreOffice Impress > General.

Figure 9: Status Bar
Legend for Figure 9
1)
2)
3)
4)

Slide number
Information area
Master slide
Cursor position

5)
6)
7)
8)

Object size
Unsaved changes
Digital signature
Text language

9)
10)
11)

Fit slide
Zoom slider
Zoom percentage

Status bar
The Status Bar (Figure 9), located at the bottom of the Impress main window, contains
information that may be useful when working on a presentation. To hide the Status Bar, go to
View on the Menu bar and deselect Status Bar.
Slide number
The slide number currently displayed in the Workspace and the total number of slides in
the presentation.
Information area
This changes depending on the object selected on the slide. Examples of the information
displayed are shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Examples of information on Status Bar
Example selection

Examples of information shown

Text area

Text Edit: Paragraph x, Row y, Column z

Charts, spreadsheets

Embedded object (OLE) “ObjectName” selected

Graphics

Bitmap with transparency selected

Master slide
The master slide associated with the slide or notes page currently displayed in theWorkspace. Right-click to open a list of available master slides and select one to apply it
to the selected slide. Double-click to open the Available Master Slides dialog. For more
information on master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles and Templates.
Cursor position/Object sizeShows different information depending on whether objects are selected or not.
When no object is selected, the position numbers show the current position (X and Y
coordinates) of the cursor.

24 | Impress Guide 7.5

When an object is selected and being resized with the cursor, the object size numbers
show the size of the object (width and height).
If an object is selected, the position numbers shows X and Y coordinates of the upper-leftcorner and the object size number pair displays the size of the object. These numbers do
not relate to the object itself, but to the selection outline, which is the smallest possible
rectangle that can contain the visible part or parts of the object.
When an object is selected, clicking in either of these areas opens the Position and Sizedialog.
Unsaved changes
Indicates if there are any unsaved changes in the presentation. Clicking this icon saves
the document. If the presentation has not been saved before, the Save As dialog opens
giving the opportunity to save the presentation.
Digital signatures
Indicates if the presentation has a digital signature.
Text language
Indicates the language used for any text on a presentation.
Fit slide
When this icon is clicked on, the slide in the Workspace zooms to fit in the Workspace.
Zoom slider
When moved, the slide changes its viewing zoom in the Workspace.
Zoom percentage
Indicates the zoom level of the slide displayed in the Workspace. Clicking on zoom
percentage opens the Zoom & View Layout dialog where the settings for zoom factor andview layout are adjusted.

Navigator
The Navigator displays all objects contained in a presentation providing a convenient way ofmoving within a presentation and locating objects in the presentation.

Figure 10: Navigator dialog
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 25

To open the Navigator dialog (Figure 10) go to View > Navigator on the Menu bar, or use the
keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+F5 (macOS ⌘+Shift+F5). Alternatively, click on Navigator in
the Sidebar to open the Navigator deck that is similar in appearance and function as the
Navigator dialog.
The Navigator is more useful if slides and objects (pictures, spreadsheets, and so on) are given
meaningful names, instead of leaving them with default names, such as “Slide 1” and “Shape 1”
and so on (as shown in Figure 10). Using meaningful names allows for slides or objects to beeasily identified and located in a presentation.

Toolbars
Impress toolbars provide several tools that are used for creating slides for a presentation. To
display or hide the various toolbars in Impress, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar andselect the required toolbar from the submenu that appears. For example, Standard and Drawing
toolbars are displayed by default, but the Line and Filling, and Text Formatting toolbars are notdisplayed and have to be selected.
To change the tools available on any toolbar, right-click in an empty area on the toolbar andselect Visible Buttons from the context menu. Installed tools are indicated by a check mark next
to the tool name, or the tool icon is highlighted, depending on the computer operating system.
Click on a tool name to hide or show it in the toolbar. For more information, see Chapter 11,
Setting Up and Customizing Impress, Appendix B, Toolbars, and the Getting Started Guide.

Note
The appearance of the toolbar icons varies depending on the computer operating
system, and the selection of icon size and style in Tools > Options > LibreOffice> View (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Options > LibreOffice > View).
For more information about working with toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars andthe Getting Started Guide.
The following toolbars are widely used when creating a presentation:
Standard toolbar
The Standard toolbar (Figure 11) is similar for all LibreOffice modules and is not describedin detail in this user guide. By default, it is docked and located just under the Menu bar at
the top of the Workspace.

Figure 11: Standard toolbar
Drawing toolbar
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 12) contains all the necessary functions for drawing various
geometric and freehand shapes, and for organizing them in a slide. By default, theDrawing toolbar is docked and located on the left of the Workspace. For more information
on using drawing tools, see Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects.

Figure 12: Drawing toolbar

26 | Impress Guide 7.5

Line and Filling toolbar
The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 13) provides the tools for modifying the properties ofan object, for example line color, line style, line width, fill color and style, and otherproperties of a selected object. If the selected object is a text frame, the Line and Filling
toolbar is automatically replaced by the Text Formatting toolbar.

Figure 13: Line and Filling toolbar
Text Formatting toolbar
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 14) is similar to the Formatting toolbar in LibreOffice
Writer and only appears when a text object has been selected in a presentation,
automatically replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.

Figure 14: Text Formatting toolbar

Workspace views
The Impress workspace has four standard views Normal, Outline, Notes, and Slide Sorter.
Each workspace views is designed to make it easier to complete certain tasks. The different
views can be selected using one of the following methods:• Click on a tab at the top of the Workspace (Figure 6 on page 20). If the tabs are notdisplayed, then go to View > Views Tab Bar on the Menu bar.
• Go to View on the Menu bar and select a workspace view from the options in thesubmenu.
The Impress workspace also has three master views available for creating master slides in apresentation. There are no tabs for master views and are selected by going to View on the Menu
bar. The options available are Master Slide, Master Notes, and Master Handout. For more
information on master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates.

Note
Each workspace view displays a different set of toolbars when selected. To
customize these toolbar sets, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar, then selector deselect a toolbar to open or close toolbars.

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 27

Normal view
Normal view is the main standard view for creating individual slides in a presentation. In Normalview slides are designed, text or graphics added and formatted, and any animation effects added
to text or graphics.
To place a slide in Normal view of the Workspace, either click on the slide thumbnail in the Slides
pane or click on the slide name in the Navigator dialog or Navigator deck in the Sidebar.

Outline view
Outline view in the Workspace (Figure 15) contains all of the slides of a presentation in a
numbered sequence. It shows topic titles, bulleted lists, and numbered lists for each slide inoutline format. Only the text contained in the default text boxes in each slide is shown. If text
boxes or graphic objects have been added to the slides, then these objects are not displayed.
Slide names are not included.
Outline view can be used for the following:• Making changes in the text of a slide.
• Adding or deleting text in a slide as in Normal view.
• Moving a paragraph in a slide up or down by using the movement arrows on the Outline
toolbar (Figure 16).
• Changing the outline level of a paragraph in a slide using the left and right arrow buttons
on the Outline toolbar.
• Comparing slides with an outline, if an outline has been prepared in advance. If anotherslide is required, it can be created directly in Outline view, or Normal view.

Figure 15: Example of Workspace Outline view

Figure 16: Outline toolbar

28 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 17: Example of Workspace Notes viewNotes view
Use Notes view in the Workspace (Figure 17) to add notes to a slide. These notes are not seen
when the presentation is shown to an audience on an external display connected to a computer.
1) Click on Notes in the Workspace to open Notes view.
2) Select a slide in the Slides pane so that the slide appears in the Workspace.
3) In the text box below the slide, click on the words Click to add notes and begin typing therequired notes for the selected slide.
The Click to add notes text box can be resized using the resizing handles which appear when theborder of the notes box is selected. Move or change the size of the box by clicking and dragging
on the box border.
When text is inserted in the Click to add notes text box, it is automatically formatted using thepredefined Notes style in Presentation Styles in the Styles deck on the Sidebar. The Notes style
can be formatted to the presentation requirements. For more information, see Chapter 8, Adding
and Formatting Slides, and Notes.

Slide Sorter view
The Slide Sorter view in the Workspace (Figure 18) contains thumbnails of the slides used in apresentation. Use this view to work with one slide or a group of slides.

Customizing Slide Sorter view
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Slide View on the Menu bar to show the Slide View toolbar(Figure 19).
2) Adjust the number of slides in the Slides per Row box, up to a maximum of 15.

Changing slide order
To change the slide order in a presentation of a single slide or a group of slides using Slide
Sorter view is as follows:
1) Select a slide or a group of slides.
2) Drag and drop the slide or group of slides at the new position in the presentation.

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 29

Figure 18: Example of Slide Sorter view

Figure 19: Slide View toolbar

Selecting a group of slides
To select a group of slides in Slide Sorter view, use one of the following methods:
Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) — click on the first slide and, while holding the Ctrl key, selectthe required slides. The selected slides do not have to be next to each other.

•• Shift key — click on the first slide, and while pressing the Shift key, select the final
slide for the group. This selects all of the slides between the first and the last slide
selected.
• Click and drag — position the cursor slightly to one side and outside the first slide, thenclick and hold dragging the cursor until all of the slides required for the group are
selected.

Working in Slide Sorter view
Working with slides in Slide Sorter view is similar to working with slides in the Slides pane. To
make changes, right-click on a slide in Slide Sorter view and choose one of the following fromthe context menu:
Cut
Removes the selected slide and saves it to the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected slide to the clipboard without removing it.
Paste
Inserts a slide from the clipboard after the selected slide.
New Slide
Adds a new slide after the selected slide.
Duplicate Slide
Creates a duplicate of the selected slide and places the new slide immediately after theselected slide.
Rename Slide
Renames the selected slide.
Hide Slide
Any slides that are hidden are not shown in the presentation.
30 | Impress Guide 7.5

Delete Slide
Deletes the selected slide.
LayoutAllows changes to the layout of the selected slide.
Move
Allows moving or repositioning of the slide in the presentation order.

Creating presentations
By default, Impress opens with the Select a Template dialog displayed to select a template for a
new presentation. To create a new presentation without a template, click on Cancel in the Selecta Template dialog and a blank slide opens in the Workspace and Slides pane.
To prevent the Select a Template dialog from opening, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice
Impress > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General) on
the Menu bar to open Options LibreOffice Impress General dialog (Figure 20) and deselect theoption Start with Template Selection.
For more information on creating presentations, slide show options, and presentation settings,
see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums and Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing
Impress.

Tip
Decide on the purpose of a presentation and plan accordingly. Having an idea of
the audience type, the structure, the content, and how the presentation will bedelivered saves a lot of time from the start.

New presentation
When creating a new presentation, Impress shows only one slide in the Slides pane andWorkspace.

Figure 20: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — General page

Figure 21: Presentation toolbar
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 31

Inserting new slide
A new slide is inserted into a presentation using one of the following methods.
• Go to Slide > New Slide on the Menu bar.
• Right-click in the Slides pane and select New Slide from the context menu.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+M (macOS ⌘+M).
• Go to Slide Sorter view in the Workspace, right-click on a slide and select New Slidefrom the context menu.
• Click on New Slide in the Presentation toolbar (Figure 21). If the Presentation toolbar is
not visible, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Presentation from thesubmenu.

Note
A new slide is inserted after the selected slide in the presentation. If a slide is notselected, then the new slide is inserted as the last slide in the presentation.

Duplicating slides
To duplicate a slide, select a slide for duplication in the Slides pane and use one of the following
methods. A duplicate slide is inserted after the selected slide in the presentation.
• Right-click on a slide in the Slides pane and select Duplicate Slide from the context
menu.
• Go to Slide Sorter view in the Workspace, right-click on a slide and select Duplicate
Slide from the context menu.
• Go to Slide > Duplicate Slide on the Menu bar.
• Click on Duplicate Slide on the Presentation toolbar.

Figure 22: Slide panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

32 | Impress Guide 7.5

Slide format
Click on Properties on the Sidebar and open the Slide panel (Figure 22) to display the format
options available for a presentation. The Slide panel allows for quick formatting of all slides
included in a presentation and selecting master slides for a presentation. For more information on
formatting slides and using master slides, see Chapter 2, Using Slide Masters, Styles, andTemplates and Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides and Notes.

Slide layout
By default in Impress, the Title Slide layout is used for the first slide when a new presentation iscreated. The layouts included in Impress range from a blank slide to a slide with six contents
boxes and a title. For more information on slide layouts, see Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting
Slides, and Notes.
The first slide in a presentation is normally a title slide. The layouts Title Slide, which also
contains a section for a subtitle, or Title Only are the most suitable layouts for the first slide in apresentation. For the remaining slides, select the most suitable layout to use for the slide
contents.
Impress does not have the functionality to create custom layouts. However, the different
elements in a slide layout can be resized and moved. For more information, see “Modifying slide
elements” on page 35.

Selecting slide layout
The available layouts are shown in the Layouts panel on the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
After selecting a slide, select the slide layout using one of the following methods:

Figure 23: Layouts panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 33

• Go to the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Layouts panel (Figure 23).
• Click on Slide Layout on the Presentation toolbar to open the Layouts panel on theProperties deck on the Sidebar.
• Click on Slide > Layout on the Menu bar to open a submenu showing the layouts by
name.
• Right-click on the selected slide and select Layouts in the context menu.

Changing slide layout
After selecting a slide in a presentation, change the slide layout using one of the following
methods:
1) Select a slide in the presentation.
2) Select a new layout for the slide using one of the methods described in “Selecting slide
layout” above.

Slide contents
Several layouts can contain one or more content boxes. Each of these content boxes can be
configured to contain the following elements:
Slide title
Click on Click to add Title and type a title in the text box. Impress enters text editing modeand the Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens. For more information on formatting
text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
Text
Click on Click to add Text and type the contents into the text box. Impress enters text
editing mode and the Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens. For more information
on formatting text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
Table
Go to Insert > Table on the Menu bar and the Insert Table dialog opens. Enter thenumber of columns and rows, then click OK. The dialog closes and a table is inserted into
the slide. Impress enters text editing mode and the Text Formatting toolbar automatically
opens. For more information on using tables, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
Chart
Go to Insert > Chart on the Menu bar and the Impress default chart is placed in the slide.
The Chart Type panel opens in the Properties deck on the Sidebar allowing editing of thechart to the presentation requirements. For more information on using charts, see
Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects.
Image
Go to Insert > Image on the Menu bar and a file browser opens. Navigate to where therequired image is located. Select the file and click on Open. The image is placed into theslide and the file browser closes. The Image panel opens in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar allowing editing of the image file. For more information on using images, see
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images, and Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts,
and Other Objects.
Audio or VideoGo to Insert > Audio or Video on the Menu bar and a file browser opens. Navigate towhere the required audio or video file is located. Select the file and click on Open. The
audio or video file is placed into the slide and the file browser closes. The Media Playback
toolbar opens allowing operation of the audio or video file. For more information, see
Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects.

34 | Impress Guide 7.5

Note
Text and graphic elements can be readjusted at any time when creating apresentation. However, changing slide layout that already has contents can havea dramatic effect. If the layout is changed after contents have been added, thecontents are not lost, but they may need to be reformatted.

Modifying slide elements
When a slide is inserted into a presentation, it contains elements that were included in theselected slide layout. However, it is unlikely that the predefined layouts suit all requirements for apresentation. Elements required maybe removed or objects inserted such as text and/orgraphics.
Although Impress does not have the functionality to create new layouts, it allows for the resizing
and moving of the slide elements. It is also possible to add slide elements without being limited tothe size and position of content boxes.

Note
It is recommended that changes to slide elements in the layouts included in
Impress are only made using Normal view. Attempting any changes to a slide
element when in Master Slide view is possible, but may result in unpredictable
results and requires extra care as well as a certain amount of trial and error.

Moving contents box1) Click on the outer frame of the contents box so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Place the cursor on the frame so that the cursor changes shape. This is normally aclenched hand, but depends on the computer setup and operating system.
3) Click and drag the contents box to its new position on the slide, then release.

Resizing contents box1) Click on the outer frame so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Place the cursor on a selection handle the frame so that the cursor changes shape.
3) Click and drag the selection handle on the frame to resize the contents box, then release.
– Top and bottom selection handles change the height of a contents box.
– Left and right selection handles change the width of a contents box.
– Corner selection handles change width and height of a contents box.

Removing elements
1) Click a contents box or an element to highlight it and the selection handles are displayed.
2) Press the Delete (macOS Ctrl+D) or Backspace key to remove the contents box orelement.

Adding text
There are two ways of adding text to a slide – contents box or text box. For more information ontext, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 35

Contents box
Click Click to add Text in the contents box and type the text. Outline styles areautomatically applied to the text as it is inserted. If required, change the outline level ofeach paragraph as well as its position within the contents box by switching to Outline
view and using the arrow buttons on the Outline toolbar.
Text box
Click on Insert Text Box on the Standard toolbar or Drawing toolbar to select text mode,
then click on the slide. A text box is created and the Text Formatting toolbar automatically
opens. Type the text and click outside the text box to end text mode.

Adding images or objects
To add images or objects to a slide, for example a picture, clipart, drawing, photograph, or
spreadsheet, click on Insert on the Menu bar and select in the drop-down menu the image orobject type required. For more information on adding objects, see the following chapters:
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects
Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects

Modifying slide appearance
To change the background and other characteristics of all slides in a presentation, the masterslide has to be modified, or a different master slide selected.

Figure 24: Slide Properties dialog — Background page36 | Impress Guide 7.5

A master slide has a specified set of characteristics that acts as a template and is used as thestarting point for creating other slides. These characteristics include slide background, objects inthe background, formatting of any text used, and any background graphics.
Impress has a range of master slides, found in the Master Slides deck on the Sidebar. Additional
master slides can be created or and saved, or added from other sources. See Chapter 2, Using
Slide Masters, Styles, and Templates for information on creating and modifying master slides.
For example, to change the background of an individual slide or a master slide:1) Right click on a slide or master slide and select Slide Properties from the context menu
to open the Slide Properties dialog (Figure 24).
2) Select Background and then select the type of background to use from None, Color,
Gradient, Bitmap, Pattern, and Hatch.
3) Make a selection from the various properties available for each type of background.
4) Click OK to apply save the changes and close the dialog.

Note
Inserting and correctly formatting background is beyond the scope of this chapter.
For more information, see Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.

Modifying presentations
By default, a presentation displays all the slides in the same order as they appear in Slide Sorterview on the Workspace. It is recommended to review the entire presentation and answer somequestions. Run the presentation at least once (see “Running a presentation” on page 38), thenanswer the following questions. Also there maybe more questions after running a presentation for
the first time.
• Are the slides in the correct order? If not, position of some of slides has to be changed.
• Is the information well spaced and visible to all members of an audience in a large room?
The audience may not be able to see information at the bottom of a slide, so redesign thepresentation to fit the top three-quarters of a screen.
• Would an additional slide make a particular point clearer? If so, create another slide.
• Are some of the slides unnecessary? Hide or delete the slides not required.
• Would animations help some of the slides? This is considered an advanced technique.
• Should some of the slides have a different slide transition than others? The transition of
those slides should be changed.
Once the questions have been answered, make the necessary changes. Making changes can be
carried out in Slide Sorter view on the Workspace.

Tip
If one or more slides seem to be unnecessary, hide the slide or slides, then view
the slide show a few more times to make sure they are not required. To hide aslide, right-click the slide in the Slides pane and select Hide Slide from thecontext menu. Do not delete a slide until this is done or the slide may have to becreated again.

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 37

Slide order
Change the slide order in a presentation using one of the following methods:• In Slide Sorter view, click on the slide that has to be moved and drag it to its new
position in the presentation.
• In the Slides pane, click on the slide that has to be moved and drag it to its new positionin the presentation.

Animations
If animations are going to be added to slides in a presentation, click on Animation on the Sidebar
to open the Animation deck giving access to the various animation options as follows:
Animation category.
Animation effect.
How the animation starts.
Animation direction, duration and delay.
Automatic preview.
Animation is an advanced technique and is beyond the scope of this chapter. For more
information on animation, see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.

Slide transitions
To give a presentation a professional look, it is recommended to add transitions between eachslide in a presentation. Click on Slide Transition on the Sidebar to open the Slide Transition
deck giving access to the various transition options as follows:
Transition type.
Modify the transition.
How the slide advances in the presentation.
Automatic preview.
Adding slide transitions is an advanced technique and is beyond the scope of this chapter. For
more information on slide transitions, see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.

Running a presentation
When a presentation is completed, it is recommended to test run the presentation and make surethat everything is correct before showing the presentation in front of an audience. To display apresentation in front of an audience, a Presenter Console is available in LibreOffice Impress.
However, the Presenter Console does require multiple displays to be connected to the computerfor it to function.
For more information and details about running a presentation and showing it to an audience,see Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.

Single displays
1) Start the slide using one of the following methods:– Go to Slide Show on the Menu bar and select Start from First Slide from thesubmenu or use the keyboard shortcut F5.
– Go to Slide Show on the Menu bar and select Start from Current Slide from thesubmenu or use the keyboard shortcut Shift+F5.

38 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 25: Presenter Console
2) To display each slide in the presentation during the slide show, use one of the following
methods:– Press the spacebar to advance to the next slide in the presentation.
– Press the arrow keys to show the next or previous slide in the presentation.
– If the option Change slide by clicking on background has been selected in Slide Show
Settings, position the cursor on the slide and click to move to the next slide.
3) When the slide show has ended or to exit the slide show before it has finished, press theEsc key to close the slide show and return to Impress.

Multiple displays
When multiple displays are connected to a computer, the Presenter Console (Figure 25) inLibreOffice Impress becomes available providing extra control over a presentation as follows:• On multiple displays, the audience sees the current slide in the presentation.
•

The current slide, next slide in the presentation, any slide notes, and a presentation timer
are displayed on the computer display providing control of how the slide show ispresented to the audience.

•Starting a slide show using Presenter Console and multiple displays is similar to runninga slide show on a single display. For more information and details about using the
Presenter Console, see Chapter 9 Slide Shows & Photo Albums.

Chapter 1, Introducing Impress | 39

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 2,
Master Slides, Styles, andTemplates

Designing a presentation
In addition to careful planning of the content, as discussed in Chapter 1, Introducing Impress,
designing and planning of a presentation is important. Slide appearance can be changed as thepresentation is developed, but planning ahead saves time in the long run. Before a presentationis created, it is recommended to create an outline to determine some of the requirements for theappearance of the slides. For example:• What color combinations (background and text) will look good and also be easy for an
audience to read?
• Would an image help an audience understand the contents better?
• Is there any particular text and image that has to appear on all the slides? For example acompany name and logo.
• Would an audience benefit from having the slides numbered so that they can quickly
refer to one of them?
• Is a background graphic or gradient required? If so, select something that does notinterfere or clash with content such as the colors used in charts.
• How many master slides are required?
• Will one slide design suit all presentation content?

What are master slides?
A master slide is a slide that is used as the starting point for creating slides. It is similar to a pagestyle in LibreOffice Writer as it controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it. A
presentation can have more than one master slide.
A master slide has a defined set of characteristics that are automatically placed onto a slide
being created for a presentation. This may include, for example, background color, graphics, or
gradients. Also objects (for example, logos, decorative lines), headers and footers, placement
and size of text frames, and text formatting can all be included on a master slide.
All characteristics of master slides are controlled by styles. The styles of any new slide created
are inherited from the master slide from which it was created. In other words, the styles of themaster slide are available and applied to all slides created from that master slide. Changing astyle in a master slide results in changes to all the slides based on that master slide. It is,however, possible to modify each individual slide without affecting the master slide.
Master slides have two types of styles associated with them: presentation styles and drawing
styles. The presentation styles can be modified, but new presentation styles cannot be created.
For drawing styles, the styles can be modified and new drawing styles can be created. For more
information, see “Working with styles” on page 61.

Notes
It is recommended to use the master slides whenever possible. However, there
are occasions where manual changes are required for a particular slide. For
example, editing a slide to enlarge the chart area when the text and chart layout
is used.

42 | Impress Guide 7.5

Working with master slides
Impress comes with a collection of master slides and these are shown in the Master Slides deckof the Sidebar (Figure 26). This deck has three panels Used in This Presentation, Recently
Used, and Available for Use. Click the expand marker next to the name of a panel to show
master slide thumbnails, or click the collapse marker to collapse the panel and hide thethumbnails.
Used in This Presentation
Displays the master slides from a presentation template that are being used in thepresentation that is being created.
Recently Used
Displays the master slides from presentation templates that have been recently used in apresentation.
Available for Use
Displays the master slides that from the default presentation templates that were installedwith LibreOffice, or installed from other sources. For example, the presentation templates
available on the LibreOffice website at https://www.libreoffice.org/discover/templates-andextensions/. For more information on presentation templates, see “Working with
templates” on page 66.
If a new presentation is being created without using one of the templates available then a default
master slide is available (see Chapter 1, Introducing Impress for more information). This default
master slide is a good starting point for creating master slides. An example of the default masterslide is shown in Figure 27.

Figure 26: Master Slides deck on Sidebar

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 43

Figure 27: Example of default master slide

Figure 28: Master View toolbar

Figure 29: Rename Slide dialog

Creating master slides
1) Go to View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open Master View in the Workspace. The
Master View toolbar also opens (Figure 28). If the Master View toolbar does not open, go
to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Master View.
2) Create a new master slide using one of the following methods and a new master slide
appears in the Slides pane:– Click on New Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Right-click on a master slide in the Slides pane and select New Master from thecontext menu.
– Go to Slide > New Master on the Menu bar.
3) Rename the new master slide using one of the following methods and open the Rename
Slide dialog (Figure 29):
– Click on Rename Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Right-click on the new master slide in the Slides pane and select Rename Masterfrom the context menu.
4) Enter a memorable name for the new master slide in the Name text box, then click on OK
to save the changes and close the dialog.

44 | Impress Guide 7.5

5) Make sure the new master slide is selected in the Slides pane and add all the text,
graphics and master elements that are required for the new master slide. The chapters inthis user guide give more information on adding, editing, formatting and managing thedifferent types of objects on a master slide.
6) When finished creating a new master slide, use one of the following methods to return toNormal View:– Click on Close Master View on the Master View toolbar.
– Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
7) Save the presentation file before continuing.

Applying master slides
To apply a master slide to all slides or selected slides in a presentation:
1) Click on Master Slides to open the Master Slides deck on the Sidebar.
2) Right-click on the required master slide in the Used in This Presentation panel in the
Master Slides deck on the Sidebar.
3) Select Apply to All Slides or Apply to Selected Slides from the context menu.

Loading additional master slides
In a presentation, it maybe necessary to mix multiple master slides that belong to different
templates (for more information, see “Working with templates” on page 66). For example, use acompletely different layout for the first slide of the presentation, or add a slide from a different
presentation.

Figure 30: Available Master Slides dialog

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 45

Figure 31: Load Master Slide dialog
1) Select the slide or slides in the Slides pane where the master slide is to be changed.
2) Go to Slide > Change Slide Master on the Menu bar to open the Available Master Slides
dialog (Figure 30).
3) To add master slides, click on Load to open the Load Master Slide dialog (Figure 31).
4) In Categories, select the template category to use, then in Templates, select the
template to use for master slides.
5) Click OK to close the Load Master Slide dialog and the master slides from the selected
template appear in the Available Master Slides dialog.
6) Select the master slide required in Select a Slide Design box.
7) To apply the selected master slide to all slides in a presentation, select Exchange
background page.
8) To apply the slide design to selected slides only, deselect Exchange background page.
9) Click OK to apply the selected master slide and close the Available Master Slides dialog.

Editing master slides
The following items can be changed on a master slide:• Background (color, gradient, hatching, or bitmap) — for more information, see “Selecting
and applying backgrounds” on page 48.
• Background objects (for example, a logo or decorative graphics) — for more information,
see “Adding images” on page 50; Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Pictures; Chapter 5,
Managing Graphic Objects; and Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
• Size and placement of default frames for slide titles and content — for more information,
see “Adding text and fields” on page 56.

46 | Impress Guide 7.5

• Text attributes for the main text area and notes — for more information, see “Adding text
and fields” on page 56 and Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
• Size, placement, and contents of header and footer elements to appear on every slide —for more information, see “Adding text and fields” on page 56 and Chapter 3, Adding andFormatting Text.

Editing
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar. This also opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select a master slide for editing in the Slides pane so that it appears in the Workspace(Figure 32).
3) Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar or right-click in the Workspace andselect Slide Properties from the context menu to open the Slide Properties dialog(Figure 33).
4) Use the various options in the Slide, Background, Transparency, and Theme pages in
the Slide Properties dialog to make changes to the master slide format.

Figure 32: Example of Master Slide View

Figure 33: Slide Properties dialog — Slide page

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 47

5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Slide Properties dialog.
6) Select an object on the master slide, then right-click on the object to open a context
menu.
7) Select one of the options from the context menu to edit the object. Selecting an option
may open another context menu, a dialog, an application or file browser window to makethe necessary changes to a selected object.
8) Click on Close Master View on the Master View toolbar or go to View > Normal on the
Menu bar to exit from editing master slides.
9) Save the presentation file before continuing.

Note
Any changes made to a master slide in Master Slide view appear on all slides
using the same master slide. Always make sure to close Master Slide view andreturn to Normal view before working on any of the presentation slides.

Direct formatting
Any changes made to any object on a slide in Normal view (for example, changes to bullet pointstyle, color of the title area, and so on) will not be overridden by subsequent changes made to
the master slide used for that slide. However, where it is desirable to revert the formatting of amanually formatted object on a slide to the style defined in the master slide, select the object on
the slide and use one of the following methods to change the formatting:• Go to Format > Clear Direct Formatting on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on an object and select Clear Direct Formatting from the context menu.

Note
The title and text boxes inherit the properties of a master slide, but if the positionof these text boxes in the master slide has changed, the layout may appear
corrupted. Some of the layout elements may have to have the horizontal and/or
vertical manually repositioned on a slide.

Selecting and applying backgrounds
Backgrounds can be applied to a number of elements in Impress (for example: slide, default text
area, image and so on). The procedure is similar when applying a background to a master slide,a slide, or an object on a slide.

Using slide properties
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar. This also opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select a master slide in the Slides pane so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar or right-click in the Workspace andselect Slide Properties from the context menu to open the Slide Properties dialog.
4) Select the Background tab to open the Background page on the Slide Properties dialog(Figure 34).
5) Select the type of background required from Color, Gradient, Image, Pattern and Hatch.
See Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on how to use theoptions available for each type of background selected.
6) When satisfied with the slide background, click OK to save the changes and close the
Slide Properties dialog.
48 | Impress Guide 7.5

Tip
Custom fills can be created for each type of background. See Chapter 6,
Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on creating custom fills for eachtype of background.

Using background style
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar. This also opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select a master slide in the Slides pane so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.
4) Click on Presentation Styles on the Styles deck to open the Presentation Styles list
(Figure 35).

Figure 34: Slide Properties dialog — Background Color page

Figure 35: Styles deck on Sidebar

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 49

5) Right-click on Background style and select Modify from the context menu to open the
Background dialog. This dialog only has an Area tab and offers the same options as the
Background page in the Slide Properties dialog.
6) Select the type of background required from Color, Gradient, Image, Pattern and Hatch.
See Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on how to use theoptions available for each type of background selected.
7) When satisfied with the background, click OK to save the changes and close the
Background dialog.

Adding images
When the same image appears on every slide of a presentation, for example a company logo,
the easiest and quickest solution is to use a master slide. This saves time creating a presentation
and allows modification or repositioning of the image on all slides. If the same image is added toeach slide manually, modification and repositioning has to be performed on each individual slidein a presentation producing errors. In addition to images, a number of other objects can be added
to the background, for example decorative lines, text, shapes, and company logos.
LibreOffice supports a large number of image and graphic formats. For more information on
working with images, see Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Pictures; Chapter 5, Managing
Graphic Objects; and Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
For example, one of the most common actions in preparing a presentation is to add an image tothe master slide. To insert an image already available on the computer, follow these steps:
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar. This also opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select the master slide where the image is to be added.
3) Select Insert > Image on the Menu bar to open the file browser.
4) Navigate to the directory where the image is located and select it.
5) Click Open to close the file browser and the image is placed centrally into the masterslide.
6) Modify and/or reposition the image on the master slide as required.
7) Right-click on the image and select Arrange > Send to Back from the context menu. This
moves the image to the background so that any information added to the slide whencreating a presentation appears over the background image.

Note
LibreOffice offers the option to insert an image as a link to a file rather thanembedding it in a presentation. This is only useful when a presentation is notintended for distribution onto other computers and remains in the same directory
structure and computer. For example, a presentation could be created on anotebook computer, which is used to give the presentation to a group of clients. If
the presentation file is to be distributed to other computers, the image must be
embedded to avoid the “missing image” syndrome when the presentation is used
on a different computer.

Default text areas
When a master slide is opened for editing, it contains five default text areas, as shown in
Figure 27 on page 44.
Title area for AutoLayouts.
Object area for AutoLayouts.
50 | Impress Guide 7.5

Date area.
Footer area.
Slide number area.

Quick positioning and resizing
Click in any of these areas to display the selection handles around the default text area. Usethese selection handles to modify the size and position of a default text area.
1) Select the default text area for repositioning so that the selection handles are visible.
2) Move the cursor toward the border of the default text area, not on a selection handle, andthe cursor changes shape. Normally this is a clenched hand, but the shape is dependent
on the computer setup and operating system.
3) Click and hold, then drag the default text area to the desired position. Release when the
text area is at the desired position.
4) Position the cursor over a left or right selection handle and the cursor changes shape.
5) Click and hold, then drag the left or right selection handle to change the width of thedefault text area. Release when the text area is at the desired width.
6) Position the cursor over a top or bottom selection handle and the cursor changes shape.
7) Click and hold, then drag the top or bottom selection handle to change the height of thedefault text area. Release when the text area is at the desired height.
8) Position the cursor over a corner selection handle and the cursor changes shape.
9) Click and hold, then drag the corner selection handle to change both the height and widthof the default text area at the same time. Release when width and height are reached.

Note
The shape of the cursor usually changes when positioned over a selection handle
giving a clear visual indication of how it will affect the shape of the default text
area when the selection handle is moved.

Tip
Keep the Shift key pressed while dragging a selection handle to maintain theratio between the width and height dimensions of the default text area.

Controlled positioning and resizing
To accurately control the shape, size and position of a default text area, it is recommended to use
the Position and Size dialog or the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
1) Select the default text area by clicking on its border.
2) Use one of the following methods to access position and size options for a default text
area:
– Go to Format > Object and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar to open the
Position and Size dialog (Figure 36).
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4 to open the Position and Size dialog.
– Right-click on the border of the default text area and select Position and Size fromthe context menu to open the Position and Size dialog.
– Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then open the
Position and Size panel (Figure 37).
Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 51

Figure 36: Position and Size dialog

Figure 37: Position and Size panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

52 | Impress Guide 7.5

Only short descriptions of the most important functions are provided below. For more information
on Position and Size options see the Draw Guide.
Position
Specifies the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) position of the default text area. The values
represent the distance of the selected base point and the default position is the top left
corner of the slide.
Base point
Available in the Position and Size dialog only. Allows selection of a point on therectangular area that is used when repositioning. The default setting of top left cornermeans that the top left corner of the area is used to reposition the rectangular area.
Size
Specifies the width and height of the default text area.
Base point
Available in the Position and Size dialog only. Allows selection of a point on therectangular area that does not move while resizing. The default setting of top left cornermeans that the position of the top left corner of the area will not change after resizing.
Rotation
Rotates the default text area. For example, place the footer area on the side of the slideby rotating each text area by 90 degrees obtain a more modern layout. In general, it ispreferable to use only horizontal or vertical orientation for ease of editing, although theprogram does not impose restrictions on the values that can be used.
Slant & Corner Radius
Adds a corner radius to a text box border only, but if a visible line style has been selected.
Slant options are only available for images or shapes, not text boxes.

Background
Change the type of area fill used for backgrounds in a default text area using one of the following
methods. The options available depend on the type of area fill selected. See Chapter 6,
Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on changing backgrounds.
• Go to Format > Object and Shape > Area on the Menu bar to open the Area dialog(Figure 38).

Figure 38: Area dialog — Color page

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 53

• Right-click on the default text area and select Area from the context menu to open the
Area dialog.
• Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then open the Area
panel (Figure 39).

BorderChange the type of line used for borders in a default text area using one of the following
methods. The options available depend on the type of line selected. See Chapter 6, Formatting
Graphic Objects for more information on changing borders.

Figure 39: Area panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 40: Line dialog — Line page54 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 41: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar• Go to Format > Object and Shape > Line on the Menu bar to open the Line dialog(Figure 40).
• Right-click on the object and select Line from the context menu to open the Line dialog.
• Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then open the Linepanel (Figure 41).

Alignment
Change the alignment of default text area in relation to its position on a master slide or thealignment between a default text area and other objects on a master slide using one of thefollowing methods. See Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects for more information on changingalignment of default text areas.
• Go to Format > Align Objects on the Menu bar and select the type of alignment fromthe options available in the context menu.
• Right-click on the object and select Align Objects from the context menu, then select thetype of alignment from the options available in the context menu.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Align Objects on the Line and Filling toolbar andselect the type of alignment from the options available.
• Select the required alignment tool in the Position and Size panel in the Properties deckon the Sidebar.

Arrangement
Arrange the position of an object on a slide in relation to other objects on a slide using one of thefollowing methods. See Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects for more information on changing
position of default text areas in relation to other objects.
• Go to Format > Arrange on the Menu bar and select the type of arrangement from theoptions available in the context menu.

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 55

• Right-click on the object and select Arrange from the context menu, then select the typeof arrangement from the options available in the context menu.
• Click on the required arrangement tool on the left end of the Line and Filling toolbar.
• Select the required arrangement tool in the Position and Size panel on the Properties
deck on the Sidebar.

Adding text and fields
Adding text and fields to a master slide allows placing of information that will appear on all theslides in a presentation. For example, presentation title, company name and logo, date, and slide
number. For more information on adding and formatting text and fields, see Chapter 3, Adding
and Formatting Text.

Text
Text objects can be placed anywhere on the master page to appear on every slide in apresentation. Text objects can also be placed in the footer if the default fields in the footer of apresentation are not going to be used.
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view. This also
opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select the master slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Switch text editing mode on using one of the following methods. The Text Formatting
toolbar (Figure 42) automatically opens replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Select Insert Text Box on the Standard or Drawing toolbar.
– Go to Insert > Text Box on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F2.
4) Click once on the master slide so that a text box is created and there is a flashing cursor
inside the text box.
5) Type or paste the text into the text object, then format the text. See Chapter 3, Adding andFormatting Text for more information.
6) Click outside the text object to close the Text Formatting toolbar and reopen the Line andFilling toolbar.
7) Click Close Master View on the Master View toolbar or go to View > Normal on the
Menu bar when adding and formatting text to a master slide is completed.

Default footer sections
By default, the footer used in a slide consists of three sections with each section containing adefault field as follows:

Figure 42: Text Formatting toolbar

56 | Impress Guide 7.5

Left section
Date and time, labelled Date Area. Field name is <date/time>.
Centre section
Footer text, labelled Footer Area. Field name is <footer>. This section can be used forthe presentation title, file name and so on.
Right section
Slide number, labelled Slide Number Area. Field name is <number>.

Header and Footer dialog
The default footer fields are set up as follows using the Header and Footer dialog (Figure 43):
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view. This also
opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select the master slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Go to Insert > Header and Footer on the Menu bar to open the Header and Footer
dialog.
4) Select Date and Time for the date and time to appear in the left section of the footer.
– For a fixed date and time in the left footer section, select Fixed and enter the date touse in the text box.
– For a variable date and time in the left footer section, select Variable, then select theformat and language to use from the Format and Language drop down lists. Using avariable date and time means that each time the presentation is opened, the date andtime are updated.
5) To place text in the footer centre section, select Footer and then type or paste therequired text into the Footer text box.

Figure 43: Header and Footer dialog

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 57

6) To place the slide number in the right section of the footer, select Slide number.
7) If the footer is not going to appear on the first slide of a presentation, select Do not showon the first slide. The first slide is normally the title slide of a presentation.
8) Click Apply to save the changes and close the Header and Footer dialog.
9) To format the text used for the default footer fields, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting
Text for more information.
10) Click Close Master View on the Master View toolbar or go to View > Normal on the
Menu bar when setting up the default footer fields is completed.

Note
It is possible to format, resize, and reposition the default sections of a footer. See“Default text areas” on page 50 and Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for
more information.

Custom footer sections
The default fields in a footer section can be replaced with text or manual fields as follows:
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view. This also
opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select the master slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Highlight the default field in the footer section and press the Delete or Backspace key.
A flashing text cursor appears in the footer section and the Text Formatting toolbar
automatically opens replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
4) Type in the text or insert a manual field into the footer section. For more information on
manual fields, see “Manual fields” on page 58.
5) Format the text or manual field placed in the footer section. See Chapter 3, Adding andFormatting Text for more information.
6) Click outside the footer section to close the Text Formatting toolbar and reopen the Lineand Filling toolbar.
7) Click Close Master View on the Master View toolbar or go to View > Normal on the
Menu bar when setting up a custom footer section is completed.

Manual fields
Manual fields, for example date or slide number, can be added as text objects on a master slideor replace one of the default footer fields. The fields used in Impress are as follows:• Date (fixed).
• Date (variable) – updates automatically each time the presentation is opened.
• Time (fixed).
• Time (variable) – updates automatically each time the presentation is opened and eachtime a slide is opened more than once during a presentation.
• Author – first and last names listed in the LibreOffice user data.
• Slide number.
• Slide Title.
• Slide Count.
• File Name.
58 | Impress Guide 7.5

Inserting field
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view. This also
opens the Master View toolbar.
2) Select the master slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Click anywhere on the master slide without selecting an object.
4) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the required field from the context menu.
By default, the field is placed in the centre of the master slide.
5) Reposition the field text box to the desired position on the master slide. See “Default text
areas” on page 50 for more information.
6) Format the text placed in a field, see Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Text for more
information.
7) Click Close Master View on the Master View toolbar or go to View > Normal on the
Menu bar when inserting a field is completed.

Replacing default fields
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view.
2) Select the master slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Highlight all of the characters used in the default field being replaced in the footer.
4) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the required field from the context menu.
5) Format the text placed in the field, see Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Text for more
information.
6) Click Close Master View on the Master View toolbar or go to View > Normal on the
Menu bar when replacing the default footer fields is completed

Tip
To change the number format (1, 2, 3 or a, b, c or i, ii, iii, and so on) for the slide
number, go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar to open the Slide
Properties dialog. In Layout Settings, select the type of number format to use
from the Slide numbers drop down list.

Master slide color themes
Color themes can be created and used for Impress master slides. A color theme is applied to text
and changes the background color, text color, and accents to make text readable against a dark
background. A color theme is created as follows:
1) Select View > Master Slide on the Menu bar to open the master slide view.
2) Select a master slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar to open the Slide Properties dialog(Figure 44).
4) Click on the Theme tab to open the Theme page.
5) In General, enter a name for the color theme being created in the Name text box.
6) In Color Set, enter a name for the color set being created in the Name text box.

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 59

Figure 44: Slide Properties dialog — Theme page7) Click on the triangle ▼ and select a color from the available color palettes or create acustom color for the required options for Background, Text, Accent, Hyperlink andFollowed Hyperlink.
8) Click on OK to save the color theme and close the Slide Properties dialog.

Note
When specifying custom colors for the Accent options, make sure the colors aredark enough so that light text is still readable when the custom colors are applied.
The options available on the Theme page of the Slide Properties dialog are as follows:
GeneralSpecifies a name for this master page theme.
Color Set
Specifies a name for the color set being created.
Background — Dark 1 and Dark 2
Specifies the first and second dark colors to be used as dark background.
Text — Light 1 and Light 2Specifies the first and second light colors to be used as light text.
Accent 1 thru Accent 6
Specifies of up to six custom colors. These are typically dark enough so that light text isreadable when the custom colors are used as background colors.
60 | Impress Guide 7.5

Hyperlink
Specifies the color used for non-followed hyperlinks.
Followed Hyperlink
Specifies the color used for when a hyperlink has been selected and followed.

Working with styles
A style is a set of formats that can be applied to selected elements such as slides, text, lists,
frames, borders, lines and area fills in a presentation. Applying a style means applying a group offormats at the same time providing a consistent look to a presentation. For example, to manuallychange an attribute on the same object type on every slide in a presentation is time consuming
and prone to errors. Using styles reduces time and provides greater accuracy.
Impress has two types of styles available for formatting text and graphic objects – presentationstyles and drawing styles.
• For information on formatting text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
• For information on formatting graphic objects, see Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects
and the Draw Guide.
• More information on styles used in LibreOffice can be found in the Getting Started Guide.

Note
The presence of text and title styles both in the presentation and drawing styles
may seem confusing. This apparent duplication is because Impress uses special
text boxes (auto layout boxes) when adding structured text to slides usingpresentation styles. The title and other text styles in drawing styles are used on
any other text boxes, or text associated with shapes or lines.

Presentation styles
Presentation styles in Impress are used when creating a presentation using one of the Impress
slide layouts. These presentation styles are divided into four categories.
Background and Background objects
Used to format objects on the default master slide such as icons, decorative lines, andshapes.
Notes
Formats the text used in presentation notes.
Outline 1 thru Outline 9
Used for the different levels of the outline to which they belong. For example, Outline 2 isused for the sub-points of Outline 1, Outline 3 is used for the sub-points of Outline 2 andso on.
Subtitle and Title
Formats the text used for any titles or subtitles used on slides.

Note
As with the Heading styles in Writer, the Outline styles in Impress arehierarchically linked. For example, changing an attribute in the Outline 1 stylecascades through all the other styles for Outline levels.

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 61

The default master slide and slide layouts in Impress use auto layout boxes. Presentation styles
can only be used within these auto layout boxes. An example of text using these presentationstyles is shown in Figure 27 on page 44.
Presentation styles cannot be created or deleted, but can be formatted, modified or updated tothe presentation requirements. Also, the presentation style used for an object cannot be changed
to another presentation style. For example, text using Outline 2 style cannot be changed to
Outline 3 style.

Notes
Changing outline levels is done in normal view using the Tab key or Shift+Tab
key combination or the Promote and Demote tools on the Outline toolbar. See
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more information.
Any text added to a slide using the text tools available is automatically placed in astandard text box and allocated the Default Drawing Style from Drawing Styles.
For more information on formatting text, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting
Text.

Drawing styles
Drawing styles in Impress define the characteristics of graphic and text objects placed on a slide.
These styles include attributes for line, area, shadowing, transparency, text, connectors anddimensioning.
For example, when creating organization charts in a presentation, it will probably be required tohave all of the objects with a consistent appearance, such as line style, font type, shadow, and soon. The easiest way to achieve this result with the minimum effort is to use a drawing style for theobjects and apply it to each object. The major benefit is that if there is a change to thebackground color of objects for example, all that is required is to modify the style rather thaneach individual object.
Drawing styles included with Impress cannot be deleted, but can be formatted, modified, andupdated. New or custom drawing styles can be created, see “Custom styles” on page 64. Any
custom style created is only available in the presentation where it was created.

Accessing styles
Use one of the following methods to access styles available in Impress.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F11 (macOS ⌘+T) and open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
• Go to Format > Styles on the Menu bar and select an option from the submenu that
opens.
•

Click on Show the Styles Sidebar (F11) (macOS Show the Styles Sidebar (⌘+T)) on
the Line and Filling toolbar and open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
• Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.

Editing styles
Formatting presentation and drawing styles can be carried out in either Normal or Master Slideview. Formatting options are available in dialogs for each style or using Format on the Menu bar.
For more information on formatting text and objects, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text
and Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.

62 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 45: Example dialog for formatting Title style

Dialog formatting1) Select an object on a slide or master slide and its style is highlighted in the Styles deck on
the Sidebar.
2) Go to Format > Styles > Edit Style on the Menu bar or right-click on the highlighted stylein the Styles deck on the Sidebar to open the formatting dialog for the selected style. An
example dialog for the Title style is shown in Figure 45.
3) Use the various options available in the tabbed pages of the dialog to format the style.
4) Click OK to save the formatting changes and close the dialog.

Note
Clicking on Reset before clicking OK removes all formatting changes made in thestyle formatting dialog.

Format menu
1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar. See “Accessing styles” on page 62 for more
information.
2) Click on Presentation Styles or Drawing Styles at the top left of the Styles deck andselect a style from the displayed list.
3) Go to Format on the Menu bar to open a submenu with various formatting options
available. Depending on the object selected, some formatting options will not be available
and are greyed out.

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 634) Select a formatting option from the submenu. Depending on the option selected, anothersubmenu may open giving further formatting options or a formatting dialog opens.

Modifying
1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar. See “Accessing styles” on page 62 for more
information.
2) Click on Presentation Styles or Drawing Styles at the top left of the Styles deck andselect a style from the displayed list.
3) Right-click on the style selected and select Modify from the context menu to open theformatting dialog for the style selected. An example dialog for the Title style is shown in
Figure 45.
4) Make the necessary changes to the selected style using the various options available inthe dialog that has opened.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Updating
Updating a presentation or drawing style is similar to modifying, but changes to the text or object
are made first. Updating styles can only be carried out in Normal view.
1) Select the text or object on a slide in Normal view.
2) Use the various tools on the Text Formatting toolbar, Line and Filling toolbar, or the
options in Format on the Menu bar to format the selected object.
3) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar. See “Accessing styles” on page 62 for more
information.
4) Click on Presentation Styles or Drawing Styles at the top left of the Styles deck andselect a style from the displayed list. The style used for the selected object will behighlighted.
5) Click on Update Style at the top right of the Styles deck and the style is updated toinclude the formatting changes made to the selected object.

Custom styles
Custom drawing styles can be created in Impress, but custom presentation styles cannot becreated. However, when a custom drawing style is created, it is only available for thepresentation being created.
1) Create or select an object on a slide to create a custom drawing style.
2) Format the object to the presentation requirements using the various formatting options
available in the Text Formatting toolbar, Line and Filling toolbar, or the options in Format
on the Menu bar.
3) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar. See “Accessing styles” on page 62 for more
information.
4) Click on Drawing Styles at the top left of the Styles deck to open the drawing styles list.
5) Click on New Style from Selection at the top right of the Styles deck and the New Style
from Selection dialog opens (Figure 46).
6) Enter a name for the custom drawing style in the Enter new style name text box.
7) Click OK to close the New Style from Selection dialog. The custom drawing style iscreated and appears in the drawing styles list in the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

64 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 46: New Style from Selection dialog

Direct formatting
Direct formatting overrides any formatting applied to an object when a style is used. Direct
formatting cannot be removed from an object by applying a style to it. To remove any direct
formatting, select the object so that the selection handles are visible, then use one of thefollowing methods to clear any direct formatting:• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+M (macOS Shift+M).
• Go to Format > Clear Direct Formatting in the Menu bar.
• If the object is a text object, highlight all of the text and then click on Clear Direct
Formatting on the Text Formatting toolbar.
• If the object is a text object, highlight all of the text, right-click on the selected text andselect Clear Direct Formatting from the context menu.

Linked styles
Impress styles support linking or inheritance. This allows a style to be linked to another (parent)
style so that it inherits all the formatting settings of the parent, creating families of styles.
For example, for multiple boxes that are identically formatted, but only differ in color, the best way
to proceed is to define a style for the box including borders, area fill, font, and so on. Then create
a number of styles that are hierarchically dependent, but differ only in the fill color attribute. For
example, if the font size or the thickness of the border needs to be changed, only change theparent style and all the other linked (child) styles change accordingly.

Assigning styles keyboard shortcuts
LibreOffice provides a set of predefined keyboard shortcuts allowing quick application of styles
while working with a presentation. These shortcuts can be redefined or custom shortcuts created.
For more information, see Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts and the Getting Started Guide.

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 65

Figure 47: Select a Template dialog

Working with templates
A template is a special type of presentation that is used as a starting point when creatingpresentations. For example, create a template for business presentations so that any newpresentations have the company logo, name and information on the first slide and the remaining
slides in the presentation only show the company logo and name. For more information on
templates and how to use them, see the Getting Started Guide.
Templates can contain anything that presentations can contain, such as text, graphics, a set ofstyles, and user-specific setup information such as measurement units, language, the default
printer, and toolbar and menu customization.
All document types created using LibreOffice are based on templates. Specific templates can becreated for any document type (text, spreadsheet, drawing, presentation). If a template is not
specified when creating a new document, then the default template for that type of document isused. The default templates are installed with LibreOffice and can be changed, see “Setting
default template” on page 68 for more information.
Impress is a little different from other LibreOffice modules because it starts with the Select a
Template dialog (Figure 47), unless this option has been turned off for this dialog in LibreOffice
options. When creating a presentation and the template dialog is active, it offers several
templates as a starting point for a presentation. If Select a Template dialog is turned off for newpresentations, LibreOffice uses the LibreOffice default template for presentations. For more
information on the presentation default template, see “Setting default template” on page 68.

LibreOffice presentation templates
Impress comes with a set of predefined templates. These templates only contain backgrounds
and background objects, providing a starting point to create presentations, or more templates.

66 | Impress Guide 7.5

Any templates created are located in the My Templates folder after the template has been saved
as a presentation template. These templates appear in the LibreOffice startup window and the
Select a Template dialog the next time LibreOffice is started.
Use one of the following methods to create a new presentation using a template:• Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Templates in LibreOffice start up window and thenselect Impress Templates from the context menu to display the available presentation
templates. Select a template and a new presentation opens.
• Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar to open the Templates dialog (this dialog
is similar to the Select a Template dialog). Select Presentations from the Filter
drop-down list to display presentation templates. Select a presentation template and click
OK. The dialog closes and a new presentation opens.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N) to open the
Templates dialog (this dialog is similar to the Select a Template dialog). SelectPresentations from the Filter drop-down list to display presentation templates. Select apresentation template and click OK. The dialog closes and a new presentation opens.

Creating templates1) Open a presentation or presentation template as a starting point for a new template.
2) Add and format the content and styles as required for the new presentation template.
3) Go to File > Templates > Save As Template on the Menu bar to open the Save as
Template dialog (Figure 48).
4) Enter a name for the new template in the Enter Template Name text box.
5) Select a template category for the new template.
6) If required, select the option Set as default template to use as the default template thenext time LibreOffice is opened and no template is selected. See “Setting default
template” on page 68 for more information on setting default templates.
7) Click on Save to save the new template and close the Save as Template dialog. The
template appears in the LibreOffice startup window and the Select a Template dialog thenext time LibreOffice is started.

Figure 48: Save As Template dialog
Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 67

Note
When saving a new template, it is important to save the template in one of thecategories given in the Save as Template dialog. This allows LibreOffice to findthe new template and use it for creating new presentations.

Setting default template
If a new presentation is being created and no template is selected, LibreOffice creates thepresentation from the default Impress template. This is normally a blank template. However, any
presentation template can be set as the default template. The template has to be located in a
category displayed in the Save as Template dialog so that LibreOffice can find it. The default
template can always be reset to the original LibreOffice default template.

Changing default template
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog. The Templates dialog is similar to the Select a Template
dialog (Figure 47).
2) Select the template to use as the default LibreOffice presentation template.
3) Right-click on the selected template and select Set as Default from the context menu.
4) Click on Open and a new presentation opens using the new default template and sets thedefault presentation template in LibreOffice. The next time a new presentation is created
and a template is not selected, the presentation is created using the new default
presentation template.

Note
The new default template is indicated in the Templates dialog. The icon indicating
the default template depends on computer setup and computer operating system.

Resetting default template
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Select the presentation template that is indicated as the default presentation template in
the Select a Template dialog.
3) Right-click on the template and select Reset Default from the context menu.
4) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog. The next time that a new presentation iscreated and a template is not selected, the presentation is created using the original
default LibreOffice presentation template.

Editing templates
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Right-click on the template to be edited and select Edit from the context menu and thetemplate opens in Impress in read only mode.
3) Click on Edit Document at the top of the Workspace to start editing the template.
4) Make the necessary formatting changes to the styles, text and/or objects on the selected
template.

68 | Impress Guide 7.5

5) Go to File > Save on the Menu bar or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S (macOS ⌘+S)
to save the changes.
6) Close the template or create a presentation using the edited template.

Notes
Any presentation created from the template before editing can be updated toshow the changed template settings the next time the presentation is opened. A
confirmation dialog opens asking if the updated styles are to be used or keep theold styles. If keep the old styles is selected, then the presentation continues to
use the old styles without any confirmation.
When editing templates, it is recommended NOT to edit and save templates
supplied and installed with LibreOffice. Editing and saving these LibreOffice
templates may cause problems with presentations that already use one of thesetemplates.

Organizing templates
LibreOffice can only use templates that are in LibreOffice template categories (template folders).
New LibreOffice template categories can be created and used to organize LibreOffice templates.
For example, separate template categories for different projects or clients. Templates can also be
imported and exported.

Tip
The location of folders used LibreOffice template categories varies with computer
operating systems. To learn where the template folders are stored on a computer,go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Paths (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice > Paths).

Creating custom categories
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Click on Manage at the top right of the Template dialog and select New Category fromthe context menu.
3) Enter a category name in Enter new category name box in the New Category dialog that
opens.
4) Click OK to save the new category and the category appears in the Filter drop-down list
for categories at the top of the Select a Template dialog.

Deleting custom categories
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Select the custom category for deletion from the drop-down list of categories at the top of
the Templates dialog.
3) Click on Manage at the top right of the Template dialog and select Delete Category fromthe context menu.
4) Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the custom category.

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 69

Figure 49: Select Category dialog

Note
Template categories supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension
Manager cannot be deleted. Only custom template categories can be deleted.

Moving templates
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Right-click on the template that is going to be moved and select Move from the context
menu.
3) In the Select Category dialog (Figure 49), select a category from the displayed list of
categories, or select Create a New Category to create a new category for the template.
4) Click OK to move the template to its new category and close the Select Category dialog.

Note
Only custom templates can be moved between template categories. Templates
supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager cannot be
moved.

Deleting templates
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Right-click on the template being deleted and select Delete from the context menu.
3) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.

Note
Templates supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager
cannot be deleted. Only templates that have been created in Impress or imported
from other sources can be deleted.

70 | Impress Guide 7.5

Renaming templates
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Right-click on the template being renamed and select Rename from the context menu.
3) Enter a new template name in the text box that has opened, then click on OK to save the
new template name.

Note
Templates supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager
cannot be renamed. Only templates that have been created in Impress orimported from other sources can be renamed.

Importing templates
If a template is in a different location on the computer, then the template must be imported into a
LibreOffice category for LibreOffice to recognize the template.
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Click on Manage at the top right of the Template dialog and select Import from thecontext menu to open the Select Category dialog.
3) Select a category from the displayed list or select Create a New Category in the SelectCategory dialog.
4) In the file browser window that opens, navigate to the folder where the template is locatedon the computer.
5) Select the template and click Open. The file browser window closes and the templateappears in the selected category.

Exporting templates
1) Go to File > New > Templates or File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu
bar to open the Templates dialog.
2) Right-click on the template being exported and select Export from the context menu.
3) Navigate to the folder where the template is to be exported to and click on OK. The
template is exported to the selected location and the file browser window closes.

Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates | 71

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 3,
Adding and Formatting Text

Introduction
Any text used in slides is contained in text boxes and this chapter describes the following:• How to create, modify, use, and delete text boxes.
• How to create, modify and format the various types of text that can be inserted.
• How to insert special forms of text such as ordered (numbered) or unordered (bulleted)lists, tables, fields, hyperlinks, and text columns.

Working with text boxes
Adding text boxes to slides is carried out using one of the following methods:• Use a predefined Impress layout which includes AutoLayout text boxes.
• Create a text box using Insert Text Box for a horizontally aligned text box on theStandard toolbar (Figure 50) or the Drawing toolbar (Figure 51).
• Create a text box using Insert Vertical Text for a vertically aligned text box on theStandard toolbar or the Drawing toolbar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F2 to create text boxes for horizontal text.

Note
The Insert Vertical Text tool for creating a vertical text box and inserting verticaltext is only available when Asian and Complex text layout (CTL) options areenabled. Go to Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages on the
Menu bar (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language Settings >Languages) and select these options for vertical text to be available in Impress.

AutoLayout text boxes
AutoLayout text boxes are automatically created when one of the slide layouts available in
Impress is selected.
1) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide layout using one of the following methods:– Open the Layouts panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 52)– Go to Slide > Layout on the Menu bar to open a submenu listing the available slide
layouts.

Figure 50: Standard toolbar

Figure 51: Drawing toolbar

74 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 52: Layouts panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 53: Text Formatting toolbar
3) Click on Click to add Title or Click to add Text. This text automatically disappears and is
replaced by a flashing text cursor. The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 53) automatically
opens replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
4) Type or paste text into the AutoLayout text box and, if necessary, format the text to thepresentation requirements.
5) If necessary, copy, resize, and/or reposition the AutoLayout text box.
6) Click outside the AutoLayout text box to deselect it.

Note
AutoLayout text boxes can be moved, resized and deleted in the same way astext boxes. See “Moving text boxes with cursor” on page 79, “Text positioning” onpage 85, and “Deleting text boxes” on page 88 for more information.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 75

Creating text boxes1) For horizontal text, click on Insert Text Box, or for vertical text, click on Insert Vertical
Text on the Standard toolbar or the Drawing toolbar. The Text Formatting toolbar
automatically opens, replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
2) Create a horizontal text box using one of the following methods:– Click in the slide and a text box is automatically created with the text cursor flashing ina single line text box. The text box increases in width as text is entered in a single line
and the text box height does not change. To create multiple lines and increase theheight, use the Enter key to create new single line paragraphs within the text box.
– For multiple line text boxes, click and drag the cursor on the slide to set the width of
the text box. As text is entered, the height of a text box automatically increases astext wraps creating multiple lines in the text box.
3) Create a vertical text box using one of the following methods:– Click in the slide and a text box is automatically created with the text cursor flashing ina single line text box. The text box increases in height as text is entered in a single
line and the text box width does not change. To create multiple lines and increase thewidth, use the Enter key to create new single line paragraphs within the text box.
– For multiple line text boxes, click and drag the cursor on the slide to set the height of
the text box. As text is entered, the width of a text box automatically increases as text
wraps creating multiple lines in the text box.
4) Type or paste the text into the text box.
5) Click outside the text box to deselect it.

Text box borders
By default, when an AutoLayout text box or a text box is created, the borders of the text box are
only displayed when the text box is selected. Use one of the following methods to create a visible
border around the text box.

Note
When creating a text box border, if the properties of the line style selected arechanged using the Line dialog, then the properties are also changed in the Lineand Filling toolbar, and the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

Line and Filling toolbar
1) Click on a text box to select it so that the border is displayed indicating that the text box isin edit mode.
2) In Line Style on the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 54), select a line style from thedrop-down list to use as a text box border. If the Line and Filling toolbar is not visible, go
to View > Toolbars > Line and Filling on the Menu bar.
3) In Line Width on the Line and Filling toolbar, enter a width for the line style selected forthe text box border.
4) In Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar, select a color from one of the available color
palettes, or create a custom color.
5) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

76 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 54: Line and Filling toolbar

Figure 55: Line dialog — Line pageLine dialog
1) Click on a text box to select it so that the border is displayed indicating that the text box isin edit mode.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 55) using one of the following methods:
3) Right-click on the text box border and select Line from the context menu.
4) Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Line on the Menu bar.
5) Click on Line to open the Line page.
6) In Style, select a line style from the drop-down list to use as a text box border.
7) In Color, select a color for the line style from one of the available color palettes, or createa custom color.
8) In Width, enter a width for the line style selected.
9) If necessary, in Transparency, enter a percentage value for the line style.
10) If necessary, in Corner Style, select the type of corner style from the options in thedrop-down list.
11) Click OK to save the changes and close the Line dialog.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 7712) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Note
For a corner style to be clearly visible in a text box border, it is recommended to
set the line width at a thickness above 0.35cm, as shown by the example in
Figure 56.

Line panel in Sidebar
1) Click on a text box to select it so that the border is displayed indicating that the text box isin edit mode.
2) Click on Properties to open the Properties deck in the Sidebar, then click on Line to open
the Line panel (Figure 57).
3) In Line, select a line style from the drop-down list to use as a text box border.
4) In Width, enter a width for the line style selected.
5) In Color, select a color for the line style from one of the available color palettes, or createa custom color.

Figure 56: Example of text box rounded corners

Figure 57: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

78 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 58: Example of moving text boxes6) If necessary, in Transparency, enter a percentage value for the line style.
7) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Positioning and resizing text boxes
Moving text boxes with cursor
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the border is displayed indicating that the text box
is in edit mode.
2) Move the cursor over the border and the cursor changes shape to the move cursor for thecomputer operating system (for example, a hand).
3) Click on the border and drag it to move the text box. A dashed outline of the text box
shows where the text box will be placed as shown in Figure 58.
4) Release the cursor when the text box is in the required position.
5) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Resizing text boxes with cursor
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe text box is in edit mode.
2) Move the cursor over a selection handle and the cursor changes shape indicating thedirection the text box will be resized.
3) Click on a selection handle and drag it to resize the text box. A dashed outline appears
indicating the new size of the text box as it is being resized, as shown in Figure 59. The
selection handles are used to resize the text box as follows:– Corner handles change the width and height of the text box simultaneously.
– Top and bottom selection handles change the height of the text box.
– Right and left selection handles change the width of the text box.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 79

Figure 59: Example of resizing text boxes4) Release the cursor when the text box is at the required size.
5) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Note
To maintain the proportions of a text box while resizing, press and hold the Shift
key, then click on a selection handle and drag it. Make sure to release the cursor
before releasing the Shift key.

Position and Size dialog
For more accurate control over the size and position of an AutoLayout text box or text box, it isrecommended to use the Position and Size dialog (Figure 60).
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe text box is in edit mode.
2) Open the Position and Size dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the text box border and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
3) Click on Position and Size to open the Position and Size page.
4) Use the various options available on the Position and Size page to position the text box.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Position and Size dialog.
6) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

80 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 60: Position and Size dialog
The options available on the Position and Size page are as follows:
Position
Position X
Specify the horizontal position of the text box. The position values of the text box
represent the distance of the Base point to the top left corner of the slide.
Position Y
Specify the vertical position of the text box. The position values of the text box
represent the distance of the Base point to the top left corner of the slide.
Base point
Position the text box by selecting one of the nine available positions. By default, theBase point is the top left corner of the text box.
Size
Width
Specify the width of the text box. To maintain the width/height ratio of the text box,
select Keep ratio. The size values represent the distance of the Base point relative tothe top left corner of the slide.
HeightSpecify the height of the text box. To maintain the width/height ratio of the text box,
select Keep ratio. The size values represent the distance of the Base point relative tothe top left corner of the slide.
Base point
Position the text box by selecting one of the nine available positions. By default, theBase point is the top left corner of the text box.
Protect
Prevent accidental modification of the position or size of the text box by selecting Position
and/or Size options.
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 81

AdaptAllow the text box to adjust its height and/or width as text is entered by selecting Fit width
to text and/or Fit height to text.

Position and Size on Sidebar
For more accurate control over the size and position of a text box, the Position and Size panelin the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 61) can also be used. However, there are fewer
options available in the Position and Size panel on the Sidebar than in the Position and Sizedialog.
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe text box is in edit mode.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then click on Position
and Size to open the Position and Size panel.
3) Specify measurement values in the Position X (horizontal) and Position Y (vertical) boxes
to position of the text box on the slide. The position values of the text box represent the
distance between the top left of the text box to the top left corner of the slide.
4) Specify measurement values in the Width and Height boxes to adjust the size of the text
box. To maintain the width/height ratio of the text box, select Keep ratio.
5) When satisfied with the changes, click outside the text box to save the changes and exit
edit mode.

Figure 61: Position and Size panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

82 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 62: Example of rotating a text box

Rotating text boxes
Using the cursor
1) Click in the text box border to select it so that the selection handles are displayed
indicating that the text box is in edit mode.
2) Click again on the text box border and the selection handles change shape and color, as
shown by the example in Figure 62. A rotation centre appears in the centre of the textbox.
3) Move the cursor over a corner selection handle and the cursor changes shape to indicate
rotation.
4) Click on a corner selection handle and drag it to rotate the text box. A ghosted image ofthe text box appears as the text box is being rotated.
5) Release the cursor when the text box has reached the desired rotation angle.
6) If necessary, click and drag the rotation centre to a different position to change therotation angle. The rotation centre can be positioned outside of the text box.
7) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Position and Size dialog
For more accurate control over the size and position of an AutoLayout text box or text box, it isrecommended to use the options available on the Rotation page of the Position and Size dialog(Figure 63).
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe text box is in edit mode.
2) Open the Position and Size dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the text box border and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
3) Click on Rotation to open the Rotation page.
4) If necessary, in Pivot Point, enter a measurement for Position X and/or Position Y tomove the position of the pivot point.
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 83

Figure 63: Position and Size dialog — Rotation page5) Alternatively, select a pivot point from one of the 9 positions in Default settings.
6) In Rotation Angle, enter the number of degrees for rotation in the Angle text box.
7) Alternatively, in Default settings, click on the rotation angle indicator and drag it to a new
angle. The angle of rotation is displayed in the Angle text box.
8) Click OK to save the changes and to close the Position and Size dialog.
9) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Position and Size panel on Sidebar
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe text box is in edit mode.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then click on Position
and Size to open the Position and Size panel (Figure 61 on page 82).
3) In Rotation, enter the number of degrees for rotation in the text box.
4) Alternatively, in Rotation, click on the rotation angle indicator and drag it to a new angle.
The angle of rotation is displayed in the text box.
5) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Corner radius
The Corner Radius option in the Slant & Corner Radius page of the Position and Size dialog(Figure 64) is only available when a text box has a border. See “Text box borders” on page 76 formore information on creating text box borders.

84 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 64: Position and Size dialog — Slant & Corner Radius pageNote
The options Slant, Corner Point 1, and Corner Point 2 on the Slant & Corner
Radius page of the Position and Size dialog are not available for text box
borders.
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe text box is in edit mode.
2) Make sure that the text box has a visible border.
3) Open the Position and Size dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the text box border and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
4) Click on Slant & Corner Radius to open the Slant & Corner Radius page.
5) In Corner Radius, enter a measurement in the Radius text box to change the radius of
the corners on the text box.
6) Click OK to save the changes and to close the Position and Size dialog.
7) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Text positioning
1) Click in an AutoLayout text box or text box to select it so that the selection handles are
displayed indicating that the text box is in edit mode.
2) Right-click in the AutoLayout text box or text box and select Text Attributes from thecontext menu to open the Text dialog (Figure 65).
3) Use the various options on the Text page to position the text within the text box.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
5) Click outside the text box to deselect it.
The options available in the Text dialog are as follows:
Drawing Object Text
Fit width to text
Width of the text box is automatically adjusted to the width of the text.
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 85

Figure 65: Text dialog — Text pageFit height to text
Height of the text box is automatically adjusted to the height of the text.
Fit to frame
Text width and height are adjusted to match the width and height of the text box.
Spacing to Borders
Creates margins around the text within the text box.
Text Anchor
Sets the anchor point for the text within the text box. When the Full width option is
selected, the text is automatically positioned in the centre of the text box.

Text animation
Text within an AutoLayout text box or a text box can be animated using the options available in
the Text Animation page in the Text dialog. For more information on the text animation effects,
see Chapter 9, Slide Shows.

Text columns
Text within an AutoLayout text box or a text box can be placed into columns using the options
available in the Text Columns page in the Text dialog (Figure 66), or the Columns panel in
Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 67).
1) Click in the text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe text box is in edit mode.
2) Right-click in the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu to open the
Text dialog.
3) Click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page in the Text dialog, or click on
Columns in Properties on the Sidebar to open the Columns panel.

86 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 66: Text dialog — Text Columns page

Figure 67: Columns panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 68: Example of columns in text box4) Set the number of columns required in the Number of columns box and the required
spacing between the columns in the Spacing box. An example of columns in a text box isshown in Figure 68.
5) Save the changes and deselect the text box using one of the following methods:– On the Text dialog, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog, then clickoutside the text box to deselect it.
– On the Columns panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click outside the text
box to deselect it and save the changes.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 87

Note
When text columns are inserted into an AutoLayout text box, or text box, thewhole of the text box has to be used for columns. A mixture of text columns andplain text cannot be used together in a text box.

Deleting text boxes1) Click in the text box to select it so that the border and selection handles are displayed
indicating that the text box is in edit mode.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key to delete the text box.

Tip
If there is more than one text box to delete, it is quicker to drag a selection
marquee around the text boxes and then press Delete or Backspace key. Takecare to avoid selecting and accidentally deleting any text boxes or shapes stillrequired.

Inserting text
Pasting text
Text can be inserted into an AutoLayout or normal text box by copying from another document
and pasting into Impress. However, the text will probably not match the formatting of thesurrounding text or that of the other slides in the presentation. This may be what is required onsome occasions. However, it is recommended to make sure that the presentation style isconsistent and does not become a patchwork of different styles, font types, bullet points, and soon.

Tip
It is good practice to paste text into a text box without formatting and apply theformatting later. This reduces the risk of errors in a presentation.

Unformatted text
1) Highlight and copy the text in another document or slide.
2) Create a text box on a slide and make sure the text cursor is flashing in the text box. See“Starting Impress” on page 18 for more information.
3) Paste unformatted text at the cursor position in a selected text box using one of thefollowing methods.
– Go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Unformatted Text on the Menu bar.
– Click on the triangle ▼to the right of Paste on the Standard toolbar and selectUnformatted text from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+V (macOS ⌘+Shift+V) and select Paste
unformatted text from the Paste Special dialog that opens.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+V (macOS ⌥+⌘+Shift+V) andunformatted text is pasted directly into the text box.

88 | Impress Guide 7.5

4) Format the text to the presentation requirements using the tools on the Text Formatting
toolbar or the options in Format on the Menu bar. Alternatively, but for text boxes only,
apply a Drawing Style to the text.

Note
A Presentation Style used in AutoLayout text boxes cannot be changed by
selecting another Presentation Style. Make sure the AutoLayout text box uses the
Presentation Style required. See Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates
for more information. Outline levels and outline styles are changed using the Tab
key or Shift+Tab key combination.

Formatted text
Pasting formatted text into a text box, or AutoLayout text box overwrites any formatting andreplaces the text box style.
1) Highlight and copy the text in another document or slide.
2) Create a text box on a slide and make sure the text cursor is flashing in the text box. See“Starting Impress” on page 18 for more information.
3) Paste formatted text into the text box. Text is pasted at the cursor position in the text box
and the text formatting of the pasted text overwrites any style formatting of the text box.
– Go to Edit > Paste on the Menu bar.
– Click on Paste on the Standard toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+V (macOS ⌘+V).
4) If necessary, format the text to to the presentation requirements using the various tools on
the Text Formatting toolbar, or the options available in Format on the Menu bar.
5) To clear any formatting of the pasted text and use the text box style, go to Format >Clear Direct Formatting on the Menu bar. See Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles andTemplates for more information.

Note
Custom Drawing Styles can be created in Impress. These custom Drawing Styles
are only available for the Impress presentation being created. However, custom
Drawing Styles can be used in a template. This allows custom Drawing Styles tobe used in a presentation that uses the same presentation template.

Inserting special characters
Special characters can be inserted into text, for example copyright, mathematical, geometric, ormonetary symbols.
1) Click at the position in the text where the special character is to be inserted.
2) Go to Insert > Special Character on the Menu bar to open the Special Characters dialog(Figure 69).
3) Select the font and character subset from the Font and Character block drop-down lists.
4) Locate and select the special character from the special characters available. The
selected special character appears in the preview box and its name is displayed below
the preview box.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 89

Figure 69: Special Characters dialog
5) Alternatively, select the special character from the display of Recent Characters or
Favorite Characters. The selected special character appears in the preview box and its
name is displayed below the preview box.
6) Click on Insert to close the dialog and insert the special character at the cursor position in
the text.
7) Alternatively, double-click on the selected special character to insert the special characterat the cursor position in the text. This also closes the dialog.
8) If the special character is frequently used, click on Add to Favorites and the special
character is added to the display of Favorite Characters.

Inserting formatting marks
Formatting marks are special characters that can be inserted into text. For example, it may not
be desirable for words that are separated by a space or a hyphen to span over two lines. The
solution is to insert a non-breaking space or non-breaking hyphen.
1) Click at the position where the formatting mark is to be inserted into the text.
2) Go to Insert > Formatting Mark on the Menu bar to open a submenu.
3) Select the formatting mark required and it is inserted into the text at the cursor position.
The formatting marks that are available in Impress are as follows:
Non-breaking space
Inserts a space that keeps two adjacent words or characters together on line breaks.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+Space (macOS ⌘+Shift+Space).
Non-breaking hyphen
Inserts a hyphen that keeps two adjacent characters together on line breaks.

90 | Impress Guide 7.5

Soft hyphen
Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it
becomes the last character in a line.
Narrow no break space
Inserts a narrow space that keeps two adjacent words or characters together on line
breaks. A narrow space has a width that is about 70% of a normal space. It is used torepresent the narrow space occurring around punctuation characters and can also be
used as a numeric group separator. Keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Space(macOS ⌥+Shift+Space).
No-width optional breakInserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes thelast character in a line. Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+/ (macOS ⌘+/).
Word Joiner
Inserts a special character preventing hyphenation of a word keeping the word together atthe end of a line.
Left-to-right markInserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark.
Only available when Complex text layout (CTL) is enabled in Tools > Options >Language Settings > Languages (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language
Settings > Languages).
Right-to-left markInserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark.
Only available when Complex text layout (CTL) is enabled in Tools > Options >Language Settings > Languages (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language
Settings > Languages).

Formatting text
Text formatting can give a presentation a consistent and professional look without any distracting
elements. Understanding of an audience is enhanced by preventing any distracting elements in apresentation. Text formatting can be applied (for example color, alignment, bullet types) tocharacters, words, sentences, paragraphs, and lists.
Text formatting tools are available on the Text Formatting toolbar and drop-down menus in
Format on the Menu bar. For more information on text formatting, see the Writer Guide.

Quick font resizing
After selecting text, the font size can be quickly increased or decreased using the tools Increase
Font Size (Ctrl+]) (macOS ⌘+]) and Decrease Font Size (Ctrl+[) (macOS ⌘+[) on the
Text Formatting toolbar. The amount by which the font size changes depends on the standard
sizes available for the font in use.

Note
AutoLayout text boxes automatically adjust font size of text inserted into it. For
example, when a long piece of text is inserted into an AutoLayout text box, thefont size may decrease in size to fit into the box.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 91

Selecting text
Text must be selected before it can be formatted using one of the following methods. Any
formatting changes applies only to the selected text.
• To format all the text in a text box, click once on the border of the text box to display theselection handles. Any formatting changes applies to all text in the text box.
• To format only part of the text, select text using one of the following methods:– Click in the text and drag the cursor over the text to highlight the text.
– Double-click on text to select a complete word or triple click to select a wholeparagraph.
– Click in the text, then press and hold the Shift key and use the keyboard arrow keys
to select text.

Using styles
When text is entered, either in an AutoLayout text box or in a text box, it is formatted with a set ofpredefined attributes known as a style. The style used depends on the type of text box being
used. For more information on using, modifying and updating styles, see Chapter 2, Master
Slides, Styles and Templates.
Sometimes it is quicker and more efficient to apply manual or direct formatting. However, insituations where the same formatting is required in many different parts of a presentation, the useof styles is recommended. This creates a consistent look to a presentation and reduces thepossibility of any errors. Impress has two categories of styles – Presentation Styles and Drawing
Styles.

Presentation Styles
Presentation styles are used in AutoLayout text boxes, master slide backgrounds, and masterslide background objects.
The style applied to the text depends on the type of AutoLayout text box. These styles cannot bedeleted, renamed or changed for another presentation style to change the formatting of the text.
For example, to change an outline style for another outline style, the outline level has to bechanged using the keyboard shortcuts Tab or Shift+Tab.
Presentation styles can be modified to change the text formatting or updated to change the styleafter formatting the text.

Note
Unlike LibreOffice Writer, where it is recommended to use styles wheneverpossible, manual or direct formatting has to be used more often in Impress. The
reason is that Presentation Styles in Impress are restricted. For example, it is notpossible to have two different Outline 1 levels using different types of bullet points
for the same outline level. Also, the lack of support for character styles forces theuse of manual or direct formatting to format sections of text when necessary.

Drawing Styles
Drawing styles are used for text in text boxes and any graphic object placed on a slide. For
information on formatting graphic objects, see Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
When text is entered into a text box, the Default Drawing Style is applied to the text. This style
can be changed by selecting another style from the text group of Drawing Styles.

92 | Impress Guide 7.5

Drawing Styles that are part of the LibreOffice installation cannot be deleted or renamed, but canbe modified to change the text formatting or updated to change the style after formatting the text.
Custom drawing styles can be created, but are only available for the presentation being created.
However, when creating a presentation template, custom drawing styles used in the template areavailable for any presentation that uses the same template.

Text formatting
Direct formatting
Direct or manual text formatting can be applied directly to characters, words, sentences, andparagraphs. Direct formatting overrides any formatting that has been applied to text when using
styles.
1) Format text using one of the following methods. Any formatting applied to text is
immediate.
– Use the formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar and select a formatting option from the drop-downmenu. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context menu or a dialog
providing further formatting options to apply to the selected text.
– Use the options available in the Paragraph and Character dialogs.
– Use the options available in the Paragraph and Character panels in the Properties
deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click outside the text box to deselect the text.

Paragraph dialog
1) Select text in a paragraph or the whole paragraph. See “Selecting text” on page 92 formore information.
2) Use one of the following methods and open the Paragraph dialog (Figure 70). Any
formatting applied to a paragraph is immediate.
– Right click on the selected text and select Paragraph from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Paragraph on the Menu bar.
3) Use the various options available on the tabbed pages of the Paragraph dialog to format
the text.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
5) Click outside the text box to deselect the text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for text in the pages of
the Paragraph dialog, refer to the Writer Guide.

Sidebar Paragraph panel
An alternative method of formatting paragraphs is to use the Paragraph panel (Figure 71) in theProperties deck on the Sidebar. The formatting options are limited, but are similar in use to theformatting options in the various pages of the Paragraph dialog. Any formatting applied to aparagraph using the Sidebar is immediate.
1) Select the text box so that the selection handles and border are displayed.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 93

Figure 70: Paragraph dialog — Indents & Spacing page

Figure 71: Paragraph panel panel in Properties deck on Sidebar3) Click on Paragraph to open the Paragraph panel.
4) Format the text using the various tools available in the Paragraph panel.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Paragraphdialog to format text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for text in the
Paragraph panel on the Sidebar, refer to the Writer Guide.

94 | Impress Guide 7.5

Character formatting
Direct formatting
Direct or manual text formatting can be applied directly to characters, words, and sentences.
Direct character formatting overrides any formatting that has been applied to text when using
direct text formatting and presentation or drawing styles.
1) Select the characters or words for formatting. See “Selecting text” on page 92 for more
information.
2) Format characters using one of the following methods.
– Various formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context
menu or dialog where further formatting options are selected.
– Use the options available in the Character dialog. Clicking OK on the dialog applies
the formatting changes.
– Use the options available in the Character panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar. Formatting applied to character(s) is immediate.
3) Click outside the text box to deselect the text.

Character dialog
1) Select the characters or words in the text box for formatting. See “Selecting text” onpage 92 for more information.

Figure 72: Character dialog — Fonts page

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 95

Figure 73: Character panel in Properties deck on Sidebar2) Open the Character dialog (Figure 72) using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the selected text box and select Character from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Character on the Menu bar.
3) Use the various options available on the tabbed pages of the Character dialog to format
the selected characters.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
5) Click outside the text box to deselect it.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for characters in thepages of the Character dialog, refer to the Writer Guide.

Sidebar Character panel
An alternative method of formatting characters is to use the Character panel (Figure 73) in theProperties deck on the Sidebar. The formatting options available in the Character panel are
limited, but are similar in use to the formatting options available in the various pages of the
Character dialog.
1) Select the characters or words in the text box for formatting. See “Selecting text” onpage 92 for more information.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Character to open the Character panel.
4) Format the text using the various tools available in the Character panel.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Character
dialog to format text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for characters in thepages of the Character panel on the Sidebar, refer to the Writer Guide.

96 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 74: Example of outline unordered list

Creating lists
The procedure to create an unordered (bulleted) or ordered (numbered) list varies depending on
the type of text box used. The tools to manage and format a list are the same.

Notes
Creating unordered or ordered lists in Impress is similar to LibreOffice Writer. For
more information on unordered or ordered lists, see the Writer Guide.
In AutoLayout text boxes, promoting or demoting an item in a list changes thepresentation style to match the outline level. For example, second outline level
corresponds to Outline 2 style, third outline level to Outline 3 style, and so on.
This change of outline level may change the formatting of the list point (forexample font size, bullet type, and so on).

AutoLayout text boxes
In AutoLayout text boxes and, by default, the outline styles available are unordered lists. An
example of these outline styles is shown in Figure 74. These outline styles are presentationstyles and cannot be deleted, but can be modified or updated to the presentation requirements.
See Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates for more information on styles.
By default, the list created in an AutoLayout text box is an unordered list. To customize the list
appearance or to change from unordered to ordered or ordered to unordered, see “Formatting
lists” on page 100 for more information.
1) Create a new presentation and make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Select a layout for the slide using one of the following methods:– Right-click in a blank area on the slide and select a layout type from the context menu
that opens.
– Go to Slide > Layout on the Menu bar and select a layout from the drop-down list.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 97

Figure 75: Outline toolbar

Figure 76: Lists panel in Properties deck on Sidebar– Select a layout from the layouts displayed in the Layouts panel in the Properties deckon the Sidebar.
3) Click on the text Click to add Text and start typing the first list item.
4) When the first list point is finished, click on Enter to create a new list point.
5) Use the keyboard combination Shift+Enter to start a new line without creating a newlist point. This new line has the same indentation as the text in the list point.
6) To demote the outline level of a list point, use one of the following methods:– Click on the Tab key.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Right Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Right
Arrow).
– Click on Demote on the Outline toolbar (Figure 75).
– Click on Demote on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar(Figure 76).
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Demote from the submenu.
7) To promote the outline level of a list point, use one of the following methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut Shift+Tab.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Left Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Left
Arrow).
– Click on Promote on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Promote on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Promote from the submenu.
8) To move a list point lower in the list order without changing the outline level, use one of
the following methods:– Click on Move Down on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Move Down on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Move Down from the submenu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Down Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Down
Arrow).
98 | Impress Guide 7.5

9) To move a list point higher in the list order without changing the outline level, use one of
the following methods:– Click on Move Up on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Move Up on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Move Up from the submenu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Up Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Up Arrow).
10) To change the type and appearance of a list, see “Formatting lists” on page 100 for more
information.

Note
Do not change the outline style of a list point by selecting the list point and thenselecting another outline style. In Impress it is not possible to changepresentation styles used for outline levels in this way.

Text boxes
1) Create a text box on a slide and make sure the cursor is flashing in the text box. See“Starting Impress” on page 18 on how to create a text box.
2) Create a list using one of the following methods:– Click on Toggle Unordered List or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting
toolbar, or in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Unordered List or Ordered List
from the submenu.
3) When the first list point is complete, click on Enter to create a new list point.
4) Use the keyboard combination Shift+Enter to start a new line without creating a newlist point. This new line has the same indentation as the text in the list point.
5) To increase the indent level of a list point, use one of the following methods:– Click on the Tab key.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Right Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Right
Arrow).
– Click on Demote on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Demote on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Demote from the submenu.
6) To decrease the indent level of a list point, use one of the following methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut Shift+Tab.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Left Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Left
Arrow).
– Click on Promote on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Promote on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Promote from the submenu.
7) To move a list point lower in the list order without changing the indent level, use one of thefollowing methods:
Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 99

– Click on Move Down on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Move Down on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Move Down from the submenu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Down Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Down
Arrow).
8) To move a list point higher in the list order without changing the indent level, use one of
the following methods:– Click on Move Up on the Outline toolbar.
– Click on Move Up on the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Format > Lists on the Menu bar and select Move Up from the submenu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+Up Arrow (macOS ⌥+Shift+Up Arrow).
9) To change the type and appearance of a list, see “Formatting lists” on page 100 for more
information.

Formatting lists• Change the list type, properties, size, position, and scope for the entire list or for a single
list point using the Bullets and Numbering dialog (Figure 77). Right-click on a list itemand select Bullets and Numbering from the context menu to open the Bullets andNumbering dialog.
• Change the list type, promote or demote a list point, or move a list point up or down in thelist order using the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 77: Bullets and Numbering dialog

100 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 78: More Bullets dialog

Figure 79: More Numbering dialog• Promote or demote a list point, or move a list point up or down in the list order using theOutline toolbar.
• Change the list type using the tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.
• Format the text used in the list. See “Formatting text” on page 91 for more information.
• Click on More Bullets or More Numbering after clicking on the triangle ▼ on the right ofToggle Unordered List or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting toolbar, or in the
Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. This opens the More Bullets dialog(Figure 78) and More Numbering dialog (Figure 79).

Note
For more information on the options available in the Bullets and Numbering dialog
for unordered or ordered lists, see the Writer Guide.

Text callouts
A text callout is a short line of text connected by a line to indicate a feature of an illustration or
drawing. Two types of text callouts are available –– Callouts for horizontal text and Vertical
Callouts for vertical text (Figure 80).
The text callouts are a legacy from earlier versions of LibreOffice and are available on the Text
toolbar (Figure 81). These tools can also be installed on other toolbars by customizing a toolbar,
for example Standard or Line toolbar. For more information on customizing toolbars, see
Appendix B, Toolbars or the Getting Started Guide.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 101

Figure 80: Example of horizontal and vertical text callouts

Figure 81: Text toolbar

Note
More callout shapes can be found by selecting Callout Shapes on the Drawing
toolbar, or the Callouts panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. These callouts
have the same purpose as text callouts, but have different options available.

Creating text callouts
1) Click on Callouts for horizontal text, or Vertical Callouts for vertical text on the Text
toolbar.
2) Click in the slide and drag the cursor to create the callout.
3) Double click in the callout box to enter text mode.
4) Type the required text, then click in a blank space in the slide. The callout box adjusts its
size horizontally and/or vertically to fit the text within the callout box.
5) Select the callout and click on the selection handle at the end of the connector line, thendrag the end of the connector line to the required position.
6) With the callout still selected, click on the callout box and drag it to the required position.
7) Click in a blank space in the slide to deselect the text callout and save the changes.

Editing text callouts
1) Double click in the callout box to enter text mode and, if required, edit and format the text.
2) Click in a blank space in the slide to save the changes to the text.
3) Select the text callout so that the selection handles are displayed.
4) Right click on the selected text callout and select an option from the context menu tochange the attributes for position, size, line, and area of the text callout. For more
information, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects, and Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes.
5) Click on the selection handle at the end of the connector line and drag it to change theposition of the line end or the length of the connector line.

102 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 82: Position and Size dialog — Callout page6) Select the text callout and open the Position and Size dialog (Figure 82) using one of thefollowing methods:– Right-click on the selected callout and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.

Note
The Callout page in the Position and Size dialog shown in Figure 82 is only
available when a text callout has been selected. It is not available for Callout
Shapes that are available on the Drawing toolbar, or in the Callouts panel in the
Shapes deck on the Sidebar.
7) Click on the Callout tab to open the formatting options available for text callouts.
8) Select the style of text callout from Straight Line, Angled Line, or Angled Connector
Line.
9) In Spacing, enter the amount of space required between the end of the callout line andthe callout box.
10) In Extension, select from the drop-down list how the callout line from extends the calloutbox.
11) In the By text box, enter a distance value to create a space between the start point of theconnector line and the callout box.
12) In the Position text box, select Top, Middle, or Bottom to position the start point of theconnector line on the callout box.
13) In Length, enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box tothe angle point of the connector line.

Note
The By text box is used for Optimal, From top, and From left extensions.
Position text box is used for Horizontal, and Vertical extensions. The Length
option is only available if Angled Connector Line is selected as callout style andthe Optimal check box is not selected.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 10314) In Optimal, select this option to display the angle point in a connector line at an optimal
distance from the callout box.
15) Click in a blank space on the slide to deselect the text callout and save the changes.

TablesTables convey structured information quickly when used in a presentation and can be createddirectly in a presentation, eliminating the need to embed a Calc spreadsheet or a Writer text
table. Impress tables do have limited functionality. It is recommended to embed tables into apresentation when greater functionality is required in the table.
Several predefined table designs are available in the Table Design panel in the Properties deckon the Sidebar (Figure 83). The Table Design panel is only available when a table is selected ina slide. Also, when working with tables in Impress, the Table toolbar (Figure 84) automatically
opens, providing tools for creating and formatting a table.

Inserting tables
When inserting a table into a slide, it is useful to know the number of rows and columns required
as well as an approximate idea of how the table will look. The table can then be formatted after
creation should it be necessary.

Figure 83: Table Design panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 84: Table toolbar
104 | Impress Guide 7.5

Note
When a table is inserted into a slide, the table is created inside a text box at thecentre of the slide with the default style and settings already applied. The text box
is the same size as the rows and columns of the table. The default table style andsettings are hard coded into LibreOffice. The table is then formatted to thepresentation requirements using the tools and options available.

Insert Table dialog
1) Select the slide which will contain the table and, if necessary, modify the slide layout tocreate space for the table.
2) Go to Insert > Table on the Menu bar to open the Insert Table dialog (Figure 85).
3) Specify the Number of columns and Number of rows in the text boxes.
4) Click OK to insert the table in the centre of the slide and close the dialog.

Figure 85: Insert Table dialog

Figure 86: Insert Table graphic

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 105

Table graphic
Select the slide which will contain the table and, if necessary, modify the slide layout to create
space for the table.
1) Click on Table on the Standard or Table toolbar to open the Table graphic (Figure 86).
2) Click, hold and drag the cursor across and down in the table graphic to create therequired number of rows and columns.
3) Release the cursor to insert the table in the centre of the slide and close the Tablegraphic.
4) Alternatively, click on More Options in the Table graphic to open the Insert Table dialog
and create the rows and columns required.

Formatting tables
Sidebar Table Design panel
1) Insert a table into a slide or select a table in a slide.
2) Click on Table Design in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Table Design
panel and display the available designs.
3) Select a design for the table and the types of rows and columns from the available
options.
The following options for rows and columns are available in the Table Design panel:
Header row
Selected by default. In a table, the first row is normally a header row and is displayed witha different background from the rest of the table.
Total row
If selected, it changes the background of the last row to make it stand out from the otherrows.
Banded rows
Selected by default. Alternate rows have different backgrounds making it easier to readdata entered into the rows. An example of banded rows is shown in Figure 87.
First column
When selected, highlights the first column of the table using a darker background.
Last column
When selected, highlights the last column of the table using a darker background.
Banded columns
When selected, alternate columns are highlighted with dark and light colors. An example
of banded columns is shown in Figure 87.

Figure 87: Example of a banded table

106 | Impress Guide 7.5

Table toolbar
When a table is selected, the Table toolbar automatically opens. If the Table toolbar does notopen when a table is selected, go to View > Toolbars > Table on the Menu bar. The Table
toolbar contains the majority of the tools required to format a table.
Table
Inserts a new table in the selected slide.
Border Style
Opens a drop-down selection of available border styles. Select cells in a table, then apply
a border style. If the required border style is not available, use the Borders page in the
Table Properties dialog.
Border Color
Select a color from the available color palettes for the borders that are used for selected
cells. If the required border color is not available, use the Borders page in the Table
Properties dialog.
Borders
Opens a drop-down menu where a predefined border configuration can be selected forcells. If the required border pattern is not available, use the Borders page in the Table
Properties dialog.
Area Style/Filling
Opens a drop-down menu to apply an area style fill to selected cells: None, Color,
Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap or Pattern. Depending on area style selected, the second
drop-down list shows the available fillings for the each area style selected. Refer to
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects for more information.
Merge Cells
Merges the selected cells into one cell. The contents of merged cells are also merged.
Alternatively, right-click on selected cells and select Merge Cells from the context menu,
or go to Format > Table > Merge Cells on the Menu bar.
Split Cells
Splits a selected cell into multiple cells either horizontally, in equal proportions, orvertically. Make sure that the cursor is positioned in the cell for splitting, then click on Split
Cells to open the Split Cells dialog (Figure 88).
Alternatively, right-click on the selected cell and select Split Cells from the context menu,
or go to Format > Table > Split Cells on the Menu bar.

Figure 88: Split Cells dialog

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 107

In the Split Cells dialog, select the number of cells required when splitting a cell andwhether to split the cell Horizontally or Vertically. When splitting horizontally, the selected
cells can be split using Into equal proportions to create cells of equal size. The contents ofthe split cell are kept in the original cell (left or top cell).
Optimize
Evenly distributes the selected rows and columns in a table either horizontally or
vertically. Selecting Optimize opens the Optimize sub-toolbar (Figure 89) and contains
the following tools. Alternatively, right-click in selected cells and select the appropriate
Optimize tool from the context menu.

Figure 89: Optimize sub-toolbar
Minimal Column Width
Defines the minimal column width for selected columns and depends on the shortest
entry within a column.
Minimal Row Height
Determines the minimal row height for selected rows and depends on the font size ofthe smallest character in the row.
Optimal Column Width
Defines the optimal column width for selected columns and depends on the longest
entry within a column.
Optimal Row Height
Determines the optimal row height for selected rows and depends on the font size ofthe largest character in the row.
Distribute Columns Evenly
Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column inthe selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
Distribute Rows Equally
Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in theselection.
Align Top, Centre Vertically, Align Bottom
Selects vertical alignment of text in selected cells. Alternatively, right-click in selected cells
and select Align from the context menu or go to Format > Align Text on the Menu bar,then select the required alignment.
Insert Row Above, Insert Row Below, Insert Column Before, Insert Column After
Select a row or column then click on one of these tool to insert a row or column.
Alternatively, right-click in a selected cell and select Insert from the context menu, thenselect one of the insert options from the sub-context menu.
Alternatively, go to Format > Table > Insert Rows or Insert Columns on the Menu bar toopen the Insert Row dialog (Figure 90) or Insert Column dialog (Figure 91). Selectnumber of rows or columns and the insertion position then click OK to insert.

108 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 90: Insert Rows dialog

Figure 91: Insert Columns dialog

Delete Row, Delete Column, Delete Table
After selecting a cell, clicking on these tools deletes a single row, a single column, or thecomplete table. To delete more than one row or column, highlight cells across the numberof rows or columns as required, then click on Delete Row or Delete Column.
Alternatively, right-click in the selected cells and select Delete > Delete Row, Delete
Column, or Delete Table from the context menu.
Alternatively, after selecting a cell, go to Format > Table on the Menu bar and selectDelete Row, Delete Column, or Delete Table from the submenu.
Select Table, Select Column, Select Rows
These tools select a complete table, or columns/rows where cells are selected.
By default these tools are not displayed on the Table toolbar. To display these tools,
right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and select Visible Buttons from the context
menu. Click on the tool required from the Visible Buttons list to add it to the toolbar.
Table Design
Click on this tool to open the Table Design panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
See “Sidebar Table Design panel” on page 106 for more information.
Table Properties
Click on this tool to open the Table Properties dialog.

Table Properties dialog
The Table Properties dialog has five tabbed pages that provide formatting options for Font, Font
Effects, Borders, Background, and Shadow. The Table Properties dialog is opened using oneof the following methods:• Right-click in a table and select Table Properties from the context menu.
• Go to Format > Table > Properties on the Menu bar.
• Click on Table Properties in the Table toolbar.
The formatting options available on each dialog page are as follows:
Font
In Figure 92, select the font from Western, Asian or Complex the Family, Typeface or
Style (Italic, Bold, etc.), Size and Language for text in the selected table. A sample of the
font selected is displayed in the preview box.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 109

Figure 92: Table Properties dialog — Font page

Figure 93: Table Properties dialog — Font Effects page

110 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 94: Table Properties dialog — Borders page

Figure 95: Table Properties dialog — Backgrounds page
Font Effects
In Figure 93, select the font effect from Font Color, Text Decoration and Effects therequired effects for the text in the selected table. A sample of the font effects applied tothe text is displayed in the preview box.
Borders
In Figure 94, select a border configuration from the options available in Line
Arrangement, Line, and Padding. Refer to Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects formore information on borders.
Background
In Figure 95, select a background (area fill) from None, Color, Gradient, Image, Pattern,or Hatch. The options available change to match the background selected. This page
provides the same functions as Area Style/Filling on the Table toolbar. Refer to Chapter
6, Formatting Graphic Objects for more information on adding backgrounds.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 111

Figure 96: Table Properties dialog — Shadow page
ShadowIn Figure 96, select the properties for the shadow being added to a table. The option Use
shadow must be selected before the other options can set. Refer to Chapter 6, Formatting
Graphic Objects for more information on adding shadows.

Position and size
Tables are placed into text boxes when created and are treated just like any other graphic object
in an Impress presentation. However, only the Position and Size dialog can be used for tables.
See “Position and Size dialog” on page 80 for more information.
Open the Position and Size dialog using one of the following methods after selecting the table:• Right-click on the table and select Position and Size from the context menu.
• Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
The position of the table text box can also be changed by clicking on the border and dragging tomove the table text box to a new position. Also, the table text box size can be changed byclicking and dragging on the selection handles. See “Starting Impress” on page 18 for more
information.

Note
When the size of a text box containing a table is changed, the table also
increases or decreases in size to keep the text box filled with the table.

Using fields
Fields allow the automatic insertion of text into a slide. Fields are commonly used when creating
templates and slide masters. For more information, see Chapter 2, Slide Masters, Styles, andTemplates.

Inserting fields
1) Select the slide so that it appears in the Workspace.
2) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the type of field from the options in thesubmenu. The field is placed centrally on the selected slide in a text box.

112 | Impress Guide 7.5

3) If necessary, position and resize the field text box. See “Starting Impress” on page 18 formore information.
4) If necessary, format the text used for the field information. See “Formatting text” onpage 91 for more information.

Field types
Date (fixed)
Inserts the current date into a slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated.
Available date formats depends on the language setting in Tools > Options > Language
Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Language
Settings > Language). Right-click on the date field and select the required date format
from the context menu.
Date (variable)
Inserts the current date into a slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated
each time the file is opened. Available date formats depends on the language setting in
Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice > Language Settings > Language). Right-click on the datefield and select the required date format from the context menu.
Time (fixed)
Inserts the current time into a slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated.
Available time formats depends on the language setting in Tools > Options > Language
Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Language
Settings > Language). Right-click on the time field and select the required time format
from the context menu.
Time (variable)
Inserts the current time into a slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated
each time the file is opened. Available time formats depends on the language setting in
Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice > Language Settings > Language). Right-click on the time
field and select the required time format from the context menu.
AuthorInserts the first and last names of the author of the presentation. This information is takenfrom values entered in the LibreOffice user data. To modify this information go to Tools >Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice >User Data).
Slide Number
Inserts the slide number into the current slide. Alternatively, go to Format > Slide
Number on the Menu bar. To add a slide number to every slide, go to View > Master
Slide on the Menu bar and insert the slide number field on the master slide.
Slide Title
Inserts the slide title. The default slide name is Slide # if the slide has not been renamed.
Slide Count
Inserts the total number of slides in the presentation.
File Name
Inserts the name of the file used for the presentation. The file name only appears after the
file has been saved.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 113

Using hyperlinks
When inserting text that can be used as a hyperlink, such as a website address or URL, Impress
formats it automatically, creating a hyperlink, applying color, and underlining. If default settings
are not being used in Impress, then the hyperlink has to be inserted manually.

Tips
To prevent automatically turning website addresses or URLs into hyperlinks, go toTools > AutoCorrect Options > Options and deselect URL Recognition.
To change the color of hyperlinks, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice >Application Colors, scroll to Unvisited links and/or Visited links. Select thecheckboxes, then select new colors from the color palettes for the links and click
OK. Note that this color change changes the color for all hyperlinks across allcomponents of LibreOffice.

Inserting hyperlinks
1) Select the slide where the hyperlink is going to be inserted.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlinks on the Menu bar or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 97).
3) On the left hand side, select the type of hyperlink for insertion.
4) Create the hyperlink using the Hyperlink dialog, then click Apply to insert the hyperlink
into the slide. The hyperlink is inserted into a text box.
5) Click Close or OK to close the dialog.

Figure 97: Hyperlink dialog — Internet page114 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 98: Hyperlink dialog — Mail pageNote
The top right part of the dialog changes depending on the hyperlink type. A fulldescription of all options, and their interactions, is beyond the scope of thischapter. A summary of the most common choices used in a presentation is given
below.

Hyperlink types
Internet
In Figure 97, select either Web or FTP protocol. Enter the required web address in the
URL text box and a name for the hyperlink in the Text text box.
Mail
In Figure 98, enter email details in Recipient and the subject of the link in Subject.
Document
In Figure 99, a hyperlink is created to another document or to another place in adocument, commonly referred to as a bookmark. Enter the details in the Path text box, or
click on Open File to open a file browser. Leave this blank if the link is to a target in thesame presentation.
Optionally, specify a target, for example a specific slide. Click on Target in Document toopen a dialog where a target can be selected. If the name of the target is known, type it
into the Target text box.
New Document
In Figure 100, a hyperlink is created to a new document. Select Edit now to edit the
newly created document immediately or Edit later to only create the hyperlink. Choose
the type of document to create from the File type drop-down list. Click on Select path toopen a file browser so that a directory is selected for the new document.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 115

Figure 99: Hyperlink dialog — Document page

Figure 100: Hyperlink dialog — New Document page
Further Settings
This section in the Hyperlink dialog is common to all the hyperlink types, although somechoices are more relevant to some types of links.
Frame
Set the value to determine how the hyperlink opens. This applies to documents that
open in a web browser.
116 | Impress Guide 7.5

Form
Specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button.
Text
Specifies the text that will be visible to the user.
Name
Applicable to HTML documents. It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attributein the HTML code behind the hyperlink.

Formatting hyperlinks
A hyperlink is inserted in the centre of the current slide. To edit the text, the size of a hyperlink
text box, or to reposition the hyperlink on the slide:1) Click and drag a selection marquee over the hyperlink text to display a text box borderand selection handles.

Note
DO NOT click directly on the hyperlink text. Clicking on the hyperlink text will
open the hyperlink.
2) Right-click on the selected hyperlink and select the type of formatting required from theoptions available in the context menu.
3) To reposition hyperlink, click and drag on the text border to move the hyperlink on theslide.
4) Select Position and Size from the context menu or press the F4 key to open the Position
and Size dialog. Options can be selected to move the hyperlink or resize the text box.
See “Starting Impress” on page 18 for more information.

Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text | 117

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 4,
Adding and Formatting
ImagesIntroduction
Images are often used in presentations as they can convey a large amount of information more
quickly than the written word. Images, such as a company logo for example, can give a
presentation a more professional look. Also, an Impress presentation can consist of only images,
such as a slideshow of holiday snapshots to share with friends.

ImagesThis section describes several ways to insert an image from an external source into thepresentation. Once the image has been inserted, it can be formatted extensively.

Inserting images
After inserting an image from a file into a presentation, the image can be formatted after it has
been placed on a slide.
1) Insert a new slide into the presentation or select a slide in the presentation. See
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress for more information.
2) Select a layout for the slide. See Chapter 1, Introducing Impress for more information.
3) Go to Insert > Image on the Menu bar and the Insert Image file browser opens(Figure 101).
4) Navigate to the directory containing the required image and select the file. LibreOffice iscompatible with a large number of image formats.
5) If necessary, select Preview and a thumbnail of the selected file is displayed in thepreview pane on the right of the file browser.
6) Click on Open to place the image in the centre of the selected slide and close the filebrowser window. The image is displayed with selection handles around the image border.
7) Format the image to the presentation requirements. See “Formatting images” onpage 125 for more information.

Figure 101: Example of Insert Image file browser

120 | Impress Guide 7.5

Linking image files
To insert a linked image, select Insert as Link in the Insert Image file browser. The selected
image file is then inserted as a link to a file rather than embedding the image file into apresentation. However, it is preferable to embed images so that a presentation can be copied
and used on other computers. Sometimes, it makes sense to link an image file rather thanembed it and the reasons for linking could be as follows:• When an image file is large, linking rather than embedding dramatically reduces the filesize of a presentation.
• When the same image file is used in many presentations. For example, when using thesame background image for all the presentations created.
• When the linked file is only available when the presentation is opened. For example, if
the presentation is a slide show of holiday photographs.

Inserting scanned images
Inserting an image from a scanner is normally a simple process if the following points are valid
for the computer being used:• Scanner software driver has been installed on the computer.
• Scanner is supported by the SANE system and the computer operating system is Linuxor other UNIX operating system.
• Scanner is TWAIN compatible and the computer operating system is Windows ormacOS.
• Scanner is configured on a computer with LibreOffice software installed.
The following scanning procedure is only an example to demonstrate how to insert an image
from a scanner. The actual procedure used depends on computer operating system, the type ofscanner being used, and the scanner driver software installed.
1) Prepare the image for the scanner and make sure that the scanner is switched on.
2) If the scanner and scanning software has not been used before, go to Insert > Media >Scan > Select Source on the Menu bar to open a scanner dialog.
3) If the scanner and scanning software is already installed on the computer, then go toInsert > Media > Scan > Request on the Menu bar to open a scanner dialog.
4) If there is more than one scanner connected to a computer, select the scanner from theSelect Source or Device Used drop-down list.
5) If available, click Create Preview or Preview to create a preview scan of the image andplace it in the preview area.
6) If necessary, crop the scanned image to what is required and make any necessary
scanning adjustments.
7) Click Scan and the image is scanned. Impress then places the scanned image in thecentre of the selected slide.
8) Format the image to the presentation requirements. See “Formatting images” onpage 125 for more information.

Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 121

Figure 102: Gallery deck on Sidebar

Inserting Gallery images
The Gallery deck on the Sidebar contains a collection of images that can be used in apresentation. Images can also be added to the Gallery, making it an essential tool for creatingpresentations quickly. The Gallery is available for all LibreOffice components. For more
information on the Gallery, see the Getting Started Guide.
1) Open the Gallery deck in the Sidebar (Figure 102) using one of the following methods:– Go to Insert > Media > Gallery on the Menu bar.
– Click on Gallery in the Sidebar.
2) Select a theme from the available themes and the images for that theme are displayed.
3) Scroll through the available images and select the required image.
4) Click and hold on the image and drag it onto the slide. Release the hold and the image isinserted centrally into the slide.
5) Format the image to the presentation requirements. See “Formatting images” onpage 125 for more information.

122 | Impress Guide 7.5

Gallery themes
Default themes
Gallery images are grouped by themes, such as Arrows, Bullets, Diagrams and so on, and thesedefault themes are listed alphabetically in the box at the top of the Gallery deck on the Sidebar(Figure 102). Click on a theme to see its images displayed in the Gallery deck.
The Gallery default themes are read-only. No images or graphics can be added to or deleted
from these themes. The default themes are identified by right-clicking on a theme name and theonly available option in the context menu is Properties.

Custom themes
Custom themes are the only themes where images can be added. Custom themes are listed
alphabetically with the default themes in the box at the top of the Gallery deck on the Sidebar.
Custom themes are identified by right-clicking on a theme name and the options available in thecontext menu are Delete, Rename, and Properties.

Creating themes
1) Open the Gallery deck in the Sidebar using one of the following methods:– Go to Insert > Media > Gallery on the Menu bar.
– Click on Gallery in the Sidebar.
2) Click New at the bottom of the Gallery deck and the Properties of New Theme dialog
opens (Figure 103).
3) Click on General and type a name for the new theme in the text box.
4) Click OK to save the new theme and close the dialog. The new theme is displayed in thelist of themes in the Gallery.

Note
The name of the Properties of New Theme dialog changes to show the name of
the newly created custom theme in the Gallery deck.

Adding theme images
1) Right-click on a custom theme name in the theme list on the Gallery deck and selectProperties from the context menu to open the Properties of New Theme dialog.

Figure 103: Properties of New Theme dialog — General page

Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 123

Figure 104: Properties of New Theme dialog — Files page2) Click on Files to open the Files page (Figure 104), then click on Find Files to open a
Select Path dialog.
3) Navigate to the folder that contains the images required and select the folder.
4) Click OK to close the Select Path dialog. The files contained in the folder appear in theProperties of New Theme dialog.
5) If necessary, select Preview and any image selected appears in the preview box.
6) Select the files required for the custom theme and click on Add. The added files
disappear from the file list and the images appear in the custom theme on the Gallery
deck.
7) To add all the files in the list, then click Add All. All the files disappear from the list and theimages appear in the custom theme on the Gallery deck.
8) Click OK and close the Properties of New Theme dialog.

Deleting theme images
Only images added to a custom themes can be deleted.
1) Open the Gallery deck and select a custom theme.
2) Right-click on the image being deleted and select Delete from the context menu.
3) Click Yes in the confirmation message to delete the image.

Note
Images in custom themes are linked files and are deleted from the Gallery only.
The original image files are not deleted.

Updating themes
All images in the Gallery are linked files. It is recommended that any custom themes are updated
on a regular basis to make sure that all the files are still available.
1) Open the Gallery deck and select a new theme that has been created.

124 | Impress Guide 7.5

2) Right-click on the name of a custom theme that contains at least one image.
3) Select Update from the context menu and the links to all the image files are updated

Formatting images
For more information on moving, resizing, rotating, slanting or skewing images and objects, see
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.

Moving images
1) Click on an image to select it and display the selection handles.
2) Move the cursor over the image until it changes shape. The cursor shape depends on thecomputer operating system, for example a clenched hand.
3) Click and drag the picture to the desired position, then release the cursor when the image
is in the desired position.

Resizing images
1) Click on an image to select it and display the selection handles.
2) Position the cursor over one of the selection handles. The cursor changes shape giving agraphical representation of the direction of the resizing, as follows:– Corner selection handles resize both the width and the height of the graphic object
simultaneously.
– Top and bottom selection handles resize the image height.
– Left and right selection handles resize the image width.
3) Click and drag the selection handle to resize the image, then release the cursor when theimage is at the required size.

Note
To retain the original proportions of the graphic, hold down the Shift key, thenclick on a selection handle and drag the selection handle. Make sure to release
the cursor before releasing the Shift key.

Tip
Re-sizing a bitmapped (raster) image affects the image resolution causing somedegree of blurring. It is recommended to use a specialized graphics program tocorrectly scale the picture to the desired size before inserting it into apresentation. LibreOffice recommends Gimp (https://www.gimp.org).

Rotating, slanting or skewing images
1) Click on an image to select it and display the selection handles.
2) Select rotation mode (Figure 105) using one of the following methods. The color andshape of the selection handles changes depending on the computer operating systemand setup.
– Click on Rotate on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 106).
– Click again on a selection handle.
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 125

Figure 105: Example of rotating, slanting and skewing images
1)
2)

Rotation mode
Rotating image

3)
4)

Slanting image
Skewing image

Figure 106: Drawing toolbar
3) The central selection handle is the normal rotation point for the selected image. If
required, click, hold and drag this rotation point to another position (even outside of theimage) to change how the selected image is rotated.
4) Click and drag a selection handle to rotate, slant or skew the image as follows. A ghost
image appears while dragging the cursor.
– Corner selection handles rotate the image.
– Left and right selection handles slant the image.
– Top and bottom selection handles skew the image.
5) Release the cursor when the required rotation, slant or skew is reached.

Note
To restrict the rotation angles to multiples of 15 degrees, click on a selection
handle, hold down the Shift key and drag to rotate, slant or skew. Make sure torelease the cursor before releasing the Shift key.

126 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 107: Image toolbar

Figure 108: Image Filter sub-toolbar

Using Image Filters
Image Filter toolbar
When an image is selected, the Image toolbar (Figure 107) and the Image Filter sub-toolbar(Figure 108) become available to format an image.
1) Select an image on a slide.
2) Go to View > Toolbars > Image on the Menu bar to open the Image toolbar. The Image
toolbar only opens when an image is selected.
3) Click on Filter to open the Image Filter toolbar. The Image Filter toolbar only opens when
an image is selected.
4) Select the required filter and it is applied immediately to the image.
5) Alternatively, go to Format > Image > Filter on the Menu bar and select a filter from thesubmenu. This applies the image filter at the filter default settings.
6) Click outside the image to deselect it and save the presentation.

Image filters
The effect each image filter has on an image is described below. The best way to judge if a filter
works is to try it. See the Draw Guide for more information on image filters and examples of thefilter effects.
InvertInverts or reverses the color values of a color image (similar to a color negative), or thebrightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert to the originalgraphic.
SmoothSoftens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter reducing the contrast between
neighboring pixels and produces a slight lack of sharpness. Selecting this filter opens the
Smooth dialog to set and use the smooth radius parameter.
SharpenSharpens the image by applying a high pass filter, increasing the contrast between
neighboring pixels emphasizing the difference in brightness. This accentuates the outlines
and the effect is strengthened if the filter is applied several times.

Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 127

Remove Noise
Removes noise by applying a median filter comparing every pixel with its neighborcreating an image that looks smoother. It replaces any pixel with extreme values thatdeviate in color by a large amount from the mean value with a pixel that has a mean color
value. The amount of image information does not increase because there are fewer
contrast changes.
Solarization
Solarization is a phenomenon in photography where an image recorded on a negative oron a photographic print is wholly or partially reversed in tone. Dark areas appear light orlight areas appear dark. Solarization was originally a photochemical effect used during
photographic film development and is now used in the digital world of computing to createa change or reversal of color. Selecting this image filter opens the Solarization dialog,
where the Threshold value for solarization can be defined. Entering a threshold value
above 70% reverses the color values. Selecting the Invert option causes all the colors to
be inverted.
Aging
Aging creates a look that resembles photographs developed in the early days ofphotography. All pixels are set to their gray values. The green and blue color channels are
reduced by the amount specified in Aging degree in the Aging dialog. Red color channel
is not changed. Selecting this image filter opens the Aging dialog, where the Aging degree
can be defined creating an old look to an image.
Posterize
Posterizing reduces the number of colors in an image making it look flatter. When used ona photograph, posterizing can make the photograph look like a painting. Selecting thisimage filter opens the Posterize dialog, where the number of poster colors can be defined
to produce the required effect.
Pop ArtSelect this image filter to change the colors of an image to a pop-art format.
Charcoal Sketch
Selecting this image filter displays an image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of theimage are drawn in black and the original colors are suppressed.
ReliefThis image filter calculates the edges of an image in relief as if the image is illuminated bya light source. Selecting this image filter opens the Emboss dialog where the position of
the Light source can be selected producing shadows that differ in direction andmagnitude.
MosaicThis image filter joins groups of pixels and converts them into a rectangular tile in a single
color creating an image that appears to be a mosaic. The larger the individual rectangles
created, the fewer details the mosaic graphic has. Selecting this image filter opens theMosaic dialog, where the number of pixels used can be set to create the Width andHeight of each tile created. Selecting Enhanced edges enhances the edges of each tile tocreate a sharper definition.

Changing image mode
The Image Mode drop-down list on the Image toolbar provides options to change the color orimage mode of a selected image. The options for image mode are as follows and an example ofusing Image Mode is shown in Figure 109.

128 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 109: Example of image modes
1)
2)

Original
Greyscale3)4)Black/White
WatermarkDefault
Image color is not changed.
Grayscale
The image is shown in grayscale. A color image becomes monochrome in grayscale.
Color sliders can be used to apply a uniform color to the monochrome graphic object.
Black and White
The image is shown in black and white. All brightness values below 50% appear black, allbrightness values over 50% appear white.
WatermarkIn an image, the brightness is raised and the contrast reduced to allow the image to be
used in the background as a watermark.

Color adjustment
The Color toolbar is used to adjust individual colors within the whole of the image (red, green,blue), as well as the brightness, contrast, and gamma of the image. Increasing the gamma valueof an image makes it more suitable to be used as a background or watermark as the image hasless interference with a dark text. An example of changing the percentage and levels for color,brightness, contrast, and gamma of an image is shown in Figure 110.
After selecting an image, open the Color sub-toolbar (Figure 111) using one of the following
methods to change the values for color adjustment:• Click on Color in the Image toolbar.
• Go to Format > Image > Color on the Menu bar.

Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 129

Figure 110: Example of adjusting color levels
1)
2)
3)
4)

Original
25% Red
25% Green
25% Blue5)6)
7)

25% Brightness
50% Contrast
Gamma Level 5

Figure 111: Color sub-toolbar
130 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 112: Color Replacer dialog

Replacing colors and transparent areas
The Color Replacer dialog (Figure 112) only allows a color to be replaced or changed inembedded images for another color or a color set as transparent. The embedded image must bea bitmap (for example BMP, GIF, JPG, or PNG), or a metafile (for example WMF). Up to fourcolors can be replaced at once. Color Replacer only works on the same color in the entire image.
Individual areas in an image cannot be selected for color replacement.
The colors available in the Replace with drop-down lists are all contained in color palettes thatare part of the installation of LibreOffice. If any custom colors have been created, then thesecolors are available in the custom palette. For more information on creating custom colors, see
the Draw Guide.

Note
The Color Replacer can only be used on embedded images. If the Color Replacer
is used on a linked image, the following error message appears This image islinked to a document. Do you want to unlink the image in order to edit it?.

Replacing colors
1) Select an embedded image to start using the Color Replacer.
2) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog.
3) Click on Pipette at the top of the Color Replacer dialog to activate the color selectionmode.
4) Move the cursor over the color being replaced in the selected image and click on thecolor. A check box is now marked and the selected color appears in Source color.
5) If necessary, select another three colors in the selected image. A maximum of four colors
can be selected.
6) Enter the amount of tolerance required for replacing the color in the Tolerance box. The
default selection is 10% tolerance.
7) Select a color from the color palettes available in the Replace with drop-down list for eachcolor selected. Transparent is the default selection.

Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 131

Figure 113: Example of replacing colors
8) After selecting up to four colors for replacement, click Replace to replace the colors in theselected image. An example of replacing colors is shown in Figure 113.
9) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is not what is required, select Edit > Undo
in the Menu bar and repeat the color replacement.

Notes
If the Replace button does not become active when replacing colors, then the fileformat of the image is not compatible with LibreOffice Impress.
Using Color Replacer replaces all occurrences of the Source color in theselected image.
The default selection of Transparent in Replace with removes the selected color
from the image and creates transparent areas in the image.

Replacing transparent areas
1) Select an embedded image to start using the Color Replacer.
2) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog.
3) Select Transparency in the Color Replacer dialog.
4) Select a color from the available color palettes in the drop-down list next to Transparency.
5) Click Replace to replace the transparent areas with the selected color.
6) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is not what is required, select Edit > Undo
in the Menu bar and repeat the transparency replacement.

Tolerance parameter
The Tolerance parameter is used to set how much of the source color in an embedded image isreplaced by another color.
• Replacing colors that are similar to the color being replaced, enter a low value for thetolerance parameter.
• Replacing a wider range of colors, enter a higher value for the tolerance parameter.

132 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 114: Example of changing image transparency

Figure 115: Area dialog — Shadow page

Image transparency
Specifies the transparency in an image. A percentage value of 0% is a fully opaque image and apercentage value of 100% is a fully transparent image. As with the gamma value of an image,increasing the transparency makes the image blend more smoothly into the background making
any overlay text easier to read.
Click on Transparency on the Image toolbar and change the percentage value in the text box toadjust the image transparency. An example of adjusting the transparency percentage is shown in
Figure 114.

Adjusting shadow settings
Select an image, then click on Shadow on the Image toolbar to apply a shadow to the image.
The shadow applied uses the settings from the Shadow page of the Area dialog (Figure 115). If ashadow is already applied to the image, clicking on Shadow removes the shadow from theimage.
The preview box in the dialog shows how the shadow looks when the settings are adjusted andapplied as follows:
1) Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Area on the Menu bar to open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Shadow to open the Shadow page.
3) Select the option Use shadow in Properties.
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 133

4) Select the shadow position from one of nine positions for casting the shadow from theimage.
5) Select a shadow color from the available color palettes in the Color drop-down list.
6) Enter a distance for the shadow to be offset from the image in the Distance box.
7) Enter a value in the Blur box to create a softer look for the shadow. The higher the setting,the softer the shadow appears. Value of 0 (minimum), the shadow is sharp. The value of150 (maximum), the shadow is at its softest.
8) Enter a percentage in the Transparency box. The value of 0% (minimum), the shadow is
opaque. The value of 100% (maximum), the shadow is transparent.
9) Click on OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes to the shadow setting.

Note
After changing the shadow settings in the Area dialog, these shadow settings areapplied to an image each time Shadow on the Image toolbar is used to apply ashadow.

Cropping images
In Impress, images can be cropped using a mouse or a dialog. Mouse cropping is easier, butdialog cropping provides more precise control.

Quick cropping
1) Select an image and use one of the following methods to put the image into cropping
mode and crop marks appear around the image (Figure 116):– Click Crop Image on the Image toolbar.
– Go to Format > Image > Crop on the Menu bar.
– Right click on the image and select Crop from the context menu.
2) Place the cursor over any of the crop marks and the cursor changes shape. Click, holdand drag the crop mark to crop the image.

Figure 116: Image crop marks
134 | Impress Guide 7.5

– Corner crop marks change width and height of an image.
– Left and right crop marks change the width of an image.
– Top and bottom crop marks change the height of an image.
3) Click outside the image to deactivate cropping mode.

Note
Press and hold the Shift key, then click, hold and drag a crop mark to
proportionally reduce width and height of the image at the same time. Release
the cursor before releasing the Shift key.

Dialog cropping
1) Select an image and go to Format > Image > Crop Dialog on the Menu bar to open the
Crop dialog (Figure 117).
2) Crop the image using the options given in the Crop dialog. A preview of the selected
image and cropping results appear in the dialog.
3) To return to the original size of the image and cancel the cropping, click on Original Size.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Cropping options
The following options are available in the Crop dialog:
Crop
Adjusts the crop size and type of cropping for an image.

Figure 117: Crop dialog

Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 135

Figure 118: Example of Keep scale cropping

Figure 119: Example of Keep image style cropping
Keep scale
Maintains the original scale of the image when cropped. The size of the image changes
to the cropped size (Figure 118).
Keep image size
Maintains the original size of the image when cropped. The scale of the image changes(Figure 119). To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negativevalues in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values
in the cropping boxes.
Left
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the image, or anegative amount to add white space to the left of the image. If Keep image size isselected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the image, or anegative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the image.
Right
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the image, ora negative amount to add white space to the right of the image. If Keep image size isselected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the image, or anegative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the image.
Top
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the image, or anegative amount to add white space above the image. If Keep image size is selected,
enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the image, or a negative
amount to decrease the vertical scale of the image.
BottomIf Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the image, or anegative amount to add white space below the image. If Keep image size is selected,
enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the image, or a negative
amount to decrease the vertical scale of the image.
Scale
Changes the scale of the selected image.
WidthEnter the width for the selected image as a percentage.
HeightEnter the height of the selected image as a percentage.

136 | Impress Guide 7.5

Image Size
Changes the size of the selected image.
WidthEnter a width for the selected image.
HeightEnter a height for the selected image.
Original Size
Returns the selected image to its original size.

Deleting images
Click on an image to display the selection handles and press the Delete or Backspace key.

Creating image maps
An image map defines areas of the image (called hotspots) associated with a URL (a web
address or a file on the computer). Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks. In
Impress, clicking on a hotspot opens the linked page in the appropriate program (for example,
default browser for HTML pages; LibreOffice Writer for ODT files; PDF viewer for PDF files).
Hotspots can be created in various shapes, such as rectangles, ellipses, and polygons, andseveral hotspots can be included in the same image. When clicking on a hotspot, the URL opens
in a browser window or frame that has been specified. Also, text can be specified to appear when
the cursor hovers over a hotspot.
1) Select an image on a slide and go to Tools > ImageMap on the Menu bar and theImageMap dialog opens (Figure 120). The main part of the dialog shows the selected
image where hotspots will be defined.

Figure 120: Image Map dialog
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 137

2) Use the tools at the top of the dialog and the fields to define hotspots and their links.
3) Click on Apply to apply the settings.
4) When finished, click on Save to save the image map to a file and open a file browser.
5) Navigate to the folder where the image map is going to be saved and enter a name forthe image map.
6) Click on Save and the file browser closes.
7) Click on Close to close the ImageMap dialog.
The tools available in the ImageMap dialog are as follows:
Apply
Applies any changes made.
Open
Opens a file browser window for navigating to a folder where an image map has beensaved.
Save
Opens a file browser window for navigating to a folder where the image map is to be
saved.
Close
Closes the Image Map dialog. A confirmation window opens asking for confirmation ofwhat happens to any changes that have been made.
SelectUsed to select a hotspot that has been created on an image.
Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon and FreeForm Polygon
Drawing tools for hotspot shapes. These tools work in exactly the same way as thecorresponding tools in the Drawing toolbar. For more information see Chapter 5,
Managing Graphic Objects.
Edit Points, Move Points, Insert Points, Delete Points
Advanced editing tools to manipulate the shape of a polygon hotspot. Select Edit Points
first to activate the other points tools.
Undo
Reverses any previous action taken.
Redo
Carries out any action that has been previously undone.
ActiveToggles the status of the hotspot activating a selected hotspot or deactivating it if active.
Macro
Associates a macro with the hotspot instead of a hyperlink.
Properties
Sets the hyperlink properties and adds the Name attribute to the hyperlink.
Address
Enter the URL address that points to a hyperlink, or to an anchor in a document (forexample a specific slide number). Using an anchor in a document, write the address inthis format: file:///<path>/document_name#anchor_name.
Text
Enter the text that is displayed when the cursor is moved over the hotspot.

138 | Impress Guide 7.5

FrameWhere the target of the hyperlink opens.
_blankOpens in a new browser window.
_self
Default selection and opens in the current window.
_top
File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy.
_parent
File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, thecurrent frame is used.

Tip
The value _self for the target frame works on the vast majority of occasions. It is
not recommended to use the other values, if available, unless absolutely
necessary.

Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images | 139

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 5,
Managing Graphic Objects

Introduction
This chapter describes how to rotate, distort, arrange, and position graphic objects on a slideusing the available tools in Impress. However, some of the techniques described in this chapter
are also applicable to images imported into slides.

Drawing toolbar
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 121) contains the majority of the tools normally used to creategraphic objects. If this toolbar is not visible, select View > Toolbars > Drawing from the Menu
bar. By default, the Drawing toolbar is docked vertically at the left side of the Impress window.

Figure 121: Drawing toolbar

Note
The Drawing toolbar shown in Figure 121 may differ between computer operating
systems and setup. Also, the Drawing toolbar displayed depends on how many
drawing tools have been installed on the toolbar. Right-click in an empty area of
the Drawing toolbar, then select Visible Buttons from the context menu todisplay, install and remove available tools. See Appendix B, Toolbars and theGetting Started Guide for more information on customizing toolbars in Impress.
From left to right, the drawing tools shown in Figure 121 are as follows:
SelectUsed to select objects. To select a group of objects, position the cursor above the top left
object, then click, hold and drag the cursor below the bottom right object of the intended
selection. A rectangle identifying the selection area is displayed (also known as amarquee). Several objects also can be selected by holding down the Shift key while
selecting the individual objects.
Zoom & Pan
Used to zoom out and pan the selected slide in the Workspace. Hold down the Ctrl key(macOS ⌘) and select the tool to zoom out and reduce the screen display of a slide in
LibreOffice. The current zoom factor is displayed as a percentage value on the Status bar.
Hold down the Shift key and select the tool to move the displayed slide withoutchanging the zoom percentage.
Insert Text Box
Creates a text box with text aligned horizontally. See Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting
Text for more information on working with text.
Insert Vertical Text
Creates a text box with text aligned vertically. This tool is available only when Asian
language support has been enabled in Tools > Options > Language Settings >Languages (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language Settings > Languages).
See Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more information on working with text.

142 | Impress Guide 7.5

Line Color
Click on the triangle ▼ next to Line Color to open a color palette and select a color forthe line. More colors are available by selecting a different color palette from thedrop-down list at the top of the color palette.
Fill Color
Click on the triangle ▼ next to Fill Color to open a color palette and select a color for thearea fill. More colors are available by selecting a different color palette from thedrop-down list at the top of the color palette.
Insert Line
Draws a straight line from the point where the cursor is dragged to the point where thecursor is released. Press the Shift key to restrict the angle of the line to multiples of 45°.
Press the Alt key (macOS ⌥) to draw a line from its center. Release the cursor before
releasing the Shift or Alt (macOS ⌥) keys.
Rectangle
Draws a rectangle when the cursor is dragged from the top left to the bottom right corner.
Press the Shift key to draw a square. Press the Alt key (macOS ⌥) to draw a shapefrom its center. Press the Shift+Alt keys (macOS ⌥+Shift) to draw a square fromthe center. Release the cursor before releasing the Shift or Alt (macOS ⌥) keys.
EllipseDraws an ellipse. Press the Shift key to draw a circle. Press the Alt key (macOS ⌥) todraw a shape from its center. Press the Shift+Alt keys (macOS ⌥+Shift) to draw acircle from the center. Release the cursor before releasing the Shift or Alt (macOS ⌥)keys.
Line and Arrows
Draws a straight line ending with an arrowhead. The arrowhead is placed at the end of
the line where the cursor is released. Click the triangle ▼ next to Line and Arrows toshow the available options for lines and arrows (Figure 122). The Shift and Alt(macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the Insert Line tool. Actual icon displayed
depends on the tool that had previously been selected.

Figure 122: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar
Curves and Polygons
Draws a shape depending on the option that has been selected. Click the triangle ▼ next
to Curves and Polygons to show the available options for curves and polygons(Figure 123). Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.

Figure 123: Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 143

Connectors
Draws a connector line between two figures. Click the triangle ▼ next to Connectors toshow the available options for connectors (Figure 124). Actual icon displayed depends on
the tool that had previously been selected. For more information see “Connectors andgluepoints” on page 171.

Figure 124: Connectors sub-toolbar
Basic Shapes
Click the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes to show the available options for basic shapes(Figure 125). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the
Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.

Figure 125: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar
Symbol Shapes
Click the triangle ▼ next to Symbol Shapes to show the available options for symbol
shapes (Figure 126). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the
Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.

Figure 126: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar
Block Arrows
Click the triangle ▼ next to Block Arrows to show the available options for block arrows(Figure 127). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the
Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.

Figure 127: Block Arrows sub-toolbar
Flowchart
Click the triangle ▼ next to Flowchart to show the available options for flowchart shapes(Figure 128). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the
Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.

144 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 128: Flowchart sub-toolbar
Callout Shapes
Click the triangle ▼ next to Callout Shapes to show the available options for callouts(Figure 129). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the
Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.

Figure 129: Callouts sub-toolbar
Stars and Banners
Click the triangle ▼ next to Stars and Banners to show the available options for stars
and banners (Figure 130). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as
the Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected.

Figure 130: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar
3D-Objects
Click the triangle ▼ next to 3D-Objects to show the available options for 3D objects(Figure 131). The Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys have the same effect as the
Rectangle tool. Actual icon displayed depends on the tool that had previously been
selected. Alternatively, go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar to open the
3D-Objects toolbar. For more information on 3D objects, see “Working with 3D objects” onpage 178.

Figure 131: 3D-Objects sub-toolbar
RotateSelect an object then click on this tool to switch the object in rotation mode. The selection
handles change color and pivot point appears in the center of the object.
Align Objects
Click the triangle ▼ next to Align Objects to show the available options for alignment
tools (Figure 132) for two or more objects. Alternatively, go to View > Toolbars > Align
Objects on the Menu bar to open the Align Objects toolbar. See “Aligning objects” onpage 164 for more information.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 145

Figure 132: Align Objects sub-toolbar
Left, Centered, Right
Determines the horizontal alignment of selected objects.
Top, Center, Bottom
Determines the vertical alignment of selected objects.
ArrangeChanges the stack level of an object. Click the triangle ▼ next to Arrange to show theavailable options to arrange the position of selected objects (Figure 133). Alternatively,
select the required positioning tool on the Standard toolbar. See “Arranging objects” onpage 171 for more information.

Figure 133: Position sub-toolbar
Bring to front
Selected object is moved in front of all other objects.
Bring forward
Selected object is moved one level up in the stack.
Send backwards
Selected object is moved one level down in the stack.
Send to backSelected object is moved behind all other objects.
In front of object
Moves the first selected object in front of the second selected object.
Behind object
Moves the first selected object behind the second selected object.
ReverseSwaps the stacking order of two selected objects.
Distribute Selection
Changes the distribution between objects by using the horizontal and vertical spacing
between objects. Click the triangle ▼ next to Select at least three objects to distributeto show the available distribution tools (Figure 134). Alternatively, go to View > Toolbars> Distribute Selection on the Menu bar to open the Distribute Selection toolbar. A
minimum of three objects have to be selected for the distribution tools to be active.

Figure 134: Distribute Selection sub-toolbar

146 | Impress Guide 7.5

Horizontally Left
Distributes the selected objects to make the left edges of the objects evenly spacedfrom one another.
Horizontally Centre
Distributes the selected objects to make the horizontal centers of the objects evenly
spaced from one another.
Horizontally Spacing
Distributes the selected objects horizontally to make the objects evenly spaced fromone another.
Horizontally Right
Distributes the selected objects to make the right edges of the objects evenly spacedfrom one another.
Vertically Top
Distributes the selected objects to make the top edges of the objects evenly spacedfrom one another.
Vertically Centre
Distributes the selected objects to make the vertical centers of the objects evenly
spaced from one another.
Vertically Spacing
Distributes the selected objects vertically to make the objects evenly spaced from one
another.
Vertically Bottom
Distributes the selected objects to make the bottom edges of the objects evenly spacedfrom one another.
Shadow
Applies a shadow to a selected object using the shadow settings from the Area or Linedialog.
Crop Image
This tool only becomes active when an image is selected that can be cropped.
FilterThis tool only becomes active when an image is selected and opens the available filter
options on the Image Filter sub-toolbar (Figure 135) for application to an image. For more
information on image filters, see the Draw Guide.

Figure 135: Image Filter sub-toolbar
InvertInverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image.
Apply the filter again to reverse the effect.
SmoothSoftens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
SharpenSharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
Remove Noise
Removes noise by applying a median filter.
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 147

Solarization
Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks likewhat can happen when there is too much light during photo development.
Aging
All pixels are set to their gray values. The green and blue color channels are thenreduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed.
Posterize
Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the
reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings.
Pop ArtConverts an image to a pop-art format.
Charcoal Sketch
Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black,and the original colors are suppressed.
Relief
Displays a dialog for creating reliefs. You can choose the position of the imaginary lightsource that determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks
in relief.
MosaicJoins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger theindividual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has.
PointsSelect this tool and then select an object to edit the individual points in the object. The
object must be converted to a curve or polygon first before editing the object points.
Clicking on the keyboard shortcut F8 also selects this tool.
Show Gluepoints Functions
Opens the Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 136) for editing the gluepoints of a graphic object.
Glue points are the positions where connector lines terminate or start. See “Gluepoints”
on page 175 for more information.

Figure 136: Gluepoints toolbar

Creating lines and shapes
This section is an introduction to creating lines and shapes for use in presentations. For more
information on working with lines and shapes, see the Draw Guide.

Drawing regular shapes
Regular shapes that are available on the Drawing toolbar are as follows:
Rectangle
Ellipse
Basic Shapes

Symbol Shapes
Block Arrows
Flowchart

Callouts Shapes
Stars and Banners
3D Objects

Some icons for regular shapes have a triangle ▼ next to the icon that gives access to several
different types of regular shapes. Also, the icons for some of the regular shapes displayed on the
Drawing toolbar show the last tool used for each of these regular shapes.
148 | Impress Guide 7.5

1) Select the required tool from the Drawing toolbar or a sub-toolbar after selecting thetriangle ▼ next to the tool icon.
2) Place the cursor on the slide, then click and drag to define an enclosing rectangle.
3) Release the cursor and the selected shape is drawn on the slide.
4) Press and hold the Shift key when creating a shape to maintain the ratio between
height and width. For example, using Rectangle or Ellipse to draw a square or a circle.
Release the cursor before releasing the Shift key.
5) Press and hold the Alt key (macOS ⌥) to draw a shape from its center. Release thecursor before releasing the Alt key (macOS ⌥).
6) Press and hold the Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys when creating a shape to maintainequal height and width and draw the shape from the center. For example, when using
Rectangle or Ellipse tool to draw a square or a circle. Release the cursor before
releasing the Shift and Alt (macOS ⌥) keys.
7) Press and hold the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) when creating a shape to snap the top left
corner of the shape selection box to the nearest grid point.

Note
If the Snap to Grid option in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) has been
selected, pressing and holding the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) prevents the top left
corner of the shape selection box snapping to the nearest grid point.

Regular shape adjustment
When creating shapes that are included in Impress, one or more dots maybe displayed in adifferent color to the selection handles. These dots perform a different adjustment depending on
the shape and are listed below.

Basic shapes
Basic shape

Shape adjustment function

Rectangle, Rounded

Changes the radius of the curve used for corners on a roundedrectangle or square.

Square, Rounded

Changes the radius of the curve used for corners on a roundedrectangle or square.

Parallelogram

Changes the internal angles between the sides.

Trapezoid

Changes the internal angles between the sides.

Circle Pie

Changes the size of the filled sector.

Block Arc

Changes both internal diameter and size of the filled area.

Isosceles Triangle

Changes the shape and type of the triangle.

HexagonChanges the internal angles between the sides.

OctagonChanges the internal angles between the sides.

CylinderChanges the perspective.

Cube

Changes the perspective.

Folded Corner

Changes the size of the folded corner.

Cross

Changes the thickness of the four arms of the cross.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 149

Basic shape

Shape adjustment function

Frame

Changes the thickness of the frame.

Ring

Changes the internal diameter of the ring.

Symbol shapes
Symbol shape

Shape adjustment function

Smiley Face

Changes the smile on the face.

Sun

Changes the shape of the symbol.

Moon

Changes the shape of the symbol.

Prohibited

Changes the thickness of the ring and the diagonal bar.

Square Bevel

Changes the thickness of the bevel.

Octagon Bevel

Changes the thickness of the bevel.

Diamond Bevel

Changes the thickness of the bevel.

Double Bracket

Changes the curvature of the bracket.

Left Bracket

Changes the curvature of the bracket.

Right Bracket

Changes the curvature of the bracket.

Double Brace

Changes the curvature of the bracket.

Left Brace

Changes the curvature of the brace and the position of the point.

Right Brace

Changes the curvature of the brace and the position of the point.

Block arrows
Block arrows

Shape adjustment function

Right Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Left Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Down Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Up Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Left and Right Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Up and Down Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Circular Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

4-way Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

ChevronChanges the angle between the sides and the shape.

Pentagon

Changes the angle between the sides and the shape.

Striped Right Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Up, Right and Down Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Notched Right Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Up and Right Arrow

Changes the shape and thickness of the arrow.

Right Arrow Callout

Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

Left Arrow Callout

Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

Down Arrow Callout

Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

Up Arrow Callout

Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

Left and Right Arrow Callout Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

150 | Impress Guide 7.5

Block arrows

Shape adjustment function

Up and Down Arrow Callout

Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

4-way Arrow Callout

Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

Up and Right Arrow Callout

Changes the shape and thickness of the callout.

Callout shapes
All Callouts use shape adjustment dots to change the length, position and angle of the pointer.

Stars and banners
Stars and banners

Shape adjustment function

4-Point Star

Changes the thickness and shape of the star points.

8-Point Star

Changes the thickness and shape of the star points.

24-Point Star

Changes the thickness and shape of the star points.

Vertical Scroll

Changes the width and shape of the scroll.

Horizontal Scroll

Changes the width and shape of the scroll.

Doorplate

Changes the inward curvature of the corners.

Drawing curves, polygons and freeform lines
Curves, polygons and lines on the Drawing toolbar have a triangle ▼ next to the icon. Clicking on
this triangle ▼ opens a sub-toolbar giving access to several different types of curves, polygons
and lines. The icons on the Drawing toolbar show the last tool used for each of these curves,
polygons and lines. If a filled curve, filled polygon, or filled freeform line was selected, Impress
draws the line connecting the last point to the start point and fills the inside area with the default
fill color.

Curves1) Click the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar to open theCurves and Polygons sub-toolbar.
2) Select either Curve or Curve Filled.
3) Place the cursor on the slide, then click and drag to create the starting point of a curve.
4) Release the cursor and drag the cursor to draw a curve on the slide, bending the line intoa curve.
5) Click to set the end point of the curve and fix the curve on the slide.
6) Drag the cursor to continue drawing a straight line. Each click sets a corner point andallows drawing of another straight line from the corner point.
7) Double-click to end the drawing of the curve. If Curve Filled was selected, Impress
automatically fills the curve with the default fill color.

Note
Holding down the Shift key when drawing lines with the curve or polygon tools
restricts the angles between lines to 45 or 90 degrees.

Polygons and Polygons 45°
1) Click the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar to open theCurves and Polygons sub-toolbar.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 151

2) Select either Polygon, Polygon Filled, Polygon (45°) or Polygon Filled (45°).
3) Place the cursor on the slide, then click and drag to draw the first line from the start point.
Release the cursor and a line between the first and second points is drawn.
4) Move the cursor to draw the next line. Each click sets a corner point and allows drawingof another line.
5) Double-click to end the drawing of a polygon. If Polygon Filled or Polygon Filled (45°)
was selected, Impress automatically fills the polygon with the default fill color.

Note
If Polygon (45°) or Polygon Filled (45°) were selected, the movement of the
cursor and the angles between lines is restricted to increments of 45°.

Freeform lines
Using Freeform Line or Freeform Line Filled tools is similar to drawing with a pencil on paper.
1) Click the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar to open theCurves and Polygons sub-toolbar.
2) Select either Freeform Line or Freeform Line Filled.
3) Click and drag the cursor to the line shape required.
4) When finished drawing a freeform line, release the cursor and the drawing is completed. If
Freeform Line Filled was selected, Impress automatically fills the drawing between thestart and end points with the default fill color.

Drawing lines and arrows
Straight lines
A straight line is the simplest element or object in Impress to create.
1) Use one of the following methods to draw a line:– Click Insert Line in the Drawing toolbar.
– Click the triangle ▼ on the right of Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar andselect Insert Line from the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar.
2) Click at the start position for the line and drag the cursor.
3) Release the cursor at the end position of the line. A selection handle appears at each endof the line. The selection handle at the starting point of the line is larger than the selection
handle at the end point.
4) Keep the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) pressed while drawing a line to enable the end of the line
to snap to the nearest grid point.
5) Keep the Shift key pressed while drawing a line to restrict the drawing angle of a line tomultiple of 45 degrees.
6) Keep the Alt key (macOS ⌥) pressed while drawing a line to cause the line to extend
outwards symmetrically in both directions from the start point. This draws lines by startingfrom the middle of the line.

ArrowsArrows are drawn like lines and are classified as a subgroup of lines, that is lines witharrowheads. Hovering the cursor over each type of arrow that is available shows the type ofendings each tool will draw.
152 | Impress Guide 7.5

1) Click the triangle ▼ on the right of Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and selectthe type of arrow from the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar.
2) Click at the starting position for drawing the arrow, then drag the cursor. The arrowhead(s)is drawn at the end of the line when the cursor is released.
3) Keep the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) pressed while drawing an arrow to enable the end of thearrow to snap to the nearest grid point.
4) Keep the Shift key pressed while drawing an arrow to restrict the drawing angle of anarrow to multiple of 45 degrees.
5) Keep the Alt key (macOS ⌥) pressed while drawing an arrow to cause the arrow toextend outwards symmetrically in both directions from the start point. This draws arrows
by starting from the middle of the arrow.

Note
If the Snap to Grid option in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid
(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) has been
selected, pressing and holding the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) whilst drawing a line orarrow has the opposite effect and prevents the line or arrow snapping to thenearest grid point.

Grouping objects
This section gives only a brief introduction to grouping of objects. An example of grouping two
objects together is shown in Figure 137. For more information on working with grouped objects,
see the Draw Guide.
Grouping of objects is similar to putting objects into a container. Objects within a group are
moved together as one object and any changes made are applied globally to the objects within
the group. A group can always be undone and the objects that make up the group can always be
manipulated separately.

Temporary grouping
Temporary grouping is when several objects are selected together. Any changes to the objects
are applied to all of the objects within the temporary group. For example, a temporary group of
objects can be rotated in its entirety.

Figure 137: Example of grouping objects

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 153

A temporary group is created using one of the following methods:• Hold down the Shift key whilst clicking multiple objects on a slide.
• Click and drag the cursor to create a marquee around multiple objects. Release thecursor and all the objects within the marquee are selected.
To cancel a temporary grouping of objects, simply click outside of the selection handles displayedaround the objects.

Permanent grouping
1) Objects are grouped together using one of the following methods:– Hold down the Shift key whilst clicking multiple objects on a slide.
– Click and drag the cursor to create a marquee around multiple objects. Release thecursor and all the objects within the marquee are selected.
– To select all the objects on the slide, go to Edit > Select All on the Menu bar, or use
the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+A (macOS ⌘+A).
2) With selection handles displayed, use one of the following methods to create a group of
selected objects:– Go to Format > Group > Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+G (macOS ⌘+Shift+G).
– Right-click on an object within the selected group and select Group from the context
menu.

Editing or formatting groups
1) Click on an object in the group to select the group. Any editing or formatting can then be
carried out on all the objects within the group or on individual objects within the group.
2) To edit an individual object within a group, enter the group using one of the following
methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut F3.
– Go to Format > Group > Enter Group on the Menu bar.
– Right-click and select Enter Group from the context menu.
3) Select individual objects within the group for editing or formatting. An example of editing
individual objects in a group is shown in Figure 138.

Figure 138: Example of editing inside a group154 | Impress Guide 7.5

4) When editing or formatting is completed, use one of the following methods to exit thegroup and the whole group then becomes selected:– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F3 (macOS ⌘+F3).
– Go to Format > Group > Exit Group on the Menu bar.
– Right-click and select Exit Group from the context menu.

Ungrouping
1) Click on any one of the objects in the group to select the group.
2) With selection handles displayed, use one of the following methods to ungroup a group of
objects:– Go to Format > Group > Ungroup on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+G (macOS ⌘+⌥+Shift+G).
– Right-click on the group and select Ungroup from the context menu.

Tip
If group and ungroup commands are regularly used, or any other command,commands can be added to a toolbar so that they are readily available. See
Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress; Appendix B, Toolbars; and theGetting Started Guide for more information on customizing the user interface.

Positioning and resizing graphic objects
Using the cursor
Positioning
1) Click on an object or a group of objects to display the selection handles.
2) Move the cursor over a selected graphic object until the cursor changes shape. The
cursor shape depends on the computer setup and the computer operating system.
3) Click and drag the object to the desired position. During movement, a ghost image of theobject appears to help with repositioning (Figure 139).
4) Release the cursor when the object is in the desired position.

Figure 139: Example of moving objects

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 155

Note
The arrow keys can also be used to quickly move a selected object or group to a
new position.

Resizing
1) Click on an object or a group of objects to display the selection handles.
2) Move the cursor over a selection handle.
3) Click and drag the selection handle to resize the graphic object. During resizing, a ghost
image of the object appears to help with resizing (Figure 140).

Figure 140: Example of resizing objects

Figure 141: Position and Size dialog

156 | Impress Guide 7.5

4) To maintain the width to height ratio, hold down the Shift key before clicking anddragging on a selection handle. Remember to release the cursor before releasing theShift key.
5) Release the cursor when the object is at the desired size.

Position and Size dialog
Positioning
For a more accurate placement of a graphic object on a slide, use the Position and Size dialog(Figure 141) as follows:
1) Select an object to display the selection handles and open the Position and Size dialog
using one of the following methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected object and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the title bar for the Position and Size panel in
the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click on the Position and Size tab to open the Position and Size page.
3) In the Position section, specify Position X (horizontal) and Position Y (vertical) position of
the object. The values represent the distance from the selected Base point. The default
selection for Base point is relative to the top left corner of the slide.
4) If necessary, in the Protect section of the dialog, select the Position option to prevent theobject from being repositioned.
5) Click OK to save the changes and to close the dialog.

Note
The units of measurement used in this dialog and other Impress dialogs are set inTools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General).

Resizing
1) Select an object to display the selection handles and open the Position and Size dialog
using one of the following methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected object and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the title bar for the Position and Size panel in
the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click on the Position and Size tab to open the Position and Size page.
3) In Size, select a Base point to use as an anchor when resizing the object. The default
selection of top left corner means that the top left corner of the object will not change
position when resizing.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 157

4) To maintain the proportions between width and height, in the Size section select the Keepratio option before changing the Width or Height. When Keep ratio is selected, changing
the value of one dimension automatically changes the other dimension maintaining theratio between object width and height.
5) To specify the object width or height independently, make sure Keep ratio is deselected,
then, in the Size section, enter a value for the Width and/or Height of the object.
6) If necessary, in the Protect section of the dialog, select the Size option to prevent theobject from being resized.
7) Click OK to save the changes and to close the dialog.

Sidebar Position and Size panel
Use the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 142) to position
and resize a graphic object.

Positioning
1) Select an object to display the selection handles.
2) Click on Properties in the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Position and Size to open the panel.
4) Specify Position X (horizontal) and Position Y (vertical) position of the object. The values
represent the distance from the Base point that has been selected in the Position andSize dialog.
5) Press the Enter key to make the changes.

Figure 142: Position and Size panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

158 | Impress Guide 7.5

Resizing1) Select an object to display the selection handles.
2) Click on Properties in the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Position and Size to open the panel.
4) To maintain the proportions between width and height, select the Keep ratio option beforechanging the Width or Height. When Keep ratio is selected, changing the value of one
dimension automatically changes the other dimension maintaining the ratio between
object width and height.
5) To specify the object width or height independently, make sure Keep ratio is deselected,
then, enter a value for the Width and/or Height of the object.
6) Press the Enter key to make the changes.

Applying special effects
As well as the basic actions of moving and resizing an object, a number of special effects canalso be applied to objects in Impress. This section describes how to rotate, flip, and distort an
object.

Rotating graphic objects
Quick rotation
1) Select an object to display the selection handles.
2) On the Line and Filling toolbar, click on the triangle ▼ next to Transformations then clickon Rotate on the Transformations sub-toolbar. The selection handles change shape andcolor as shown in Figure 143. A pivot point indicating the rotation center also appears in
the center of the object.
3) Move the cursor over one of the corner handles and the cursor changes shape indicating
the movement direction.
4) Click on a corner selection handle and move in the direction required to rotate the object.
Only the corner selection handles are active for rotation.
5) When satisfied with the rotation, release the cursor.
6) To change the rotation center of the object, click and drag the pivot point to the desired
position before rotating. The pivot point can be moved to any position on the slide, evenoutside of the object boundaries.

Figure 143: Example of rotating objects

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 159

Figure 144: Position and Size dialog — Rotation page7) To restrict the rotation angles to multiples of 15 degrees, press and hold the Shift key
while rotating the object. This is useful for rotating pictures through a right angle, forexample from portrait to landscape. Remember to release the Shift key before
releasing the cursor.

Position and Size dialog rotation
Instead of rotating an object manually, use the Rotation page of the Position and Size dialog(Figure 144) to accurately rotate an object.
1) Select an object to display the selection handles, then open the Position and Size dialog
using one of the following methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected object and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the title bar for the Position and Size panel in
the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click on the Rotation tab to open the Rotation page.
3) If necessary, in Pivot Point enter a measurement for Position X and Position Y to movethe position of the pivot point. The default position of the pivot point is the center of theobject. Alternatively, select a pivot point from one of the 9 positions in Default settings.
4) In Rotation Angle, enter the degree amount for rotation in the Angle text box.
Alternatively, in Default settings, click on the rotation angle indicator and drag it to a new
angle. The angle of rotation is displayed in the Angle text box.
5) Click OK to save the changes and to close the dialog.

160 | Impress Guide 7.5

Sidebar rotation
Use the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 142 on page 158)
to rotate an object as follows:
1) Select an object to display the selection handles.
2) Click on Properties in the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Position and Size to open the panel.
4) In Rotation, enter the degree amount for rotation in the text box or click on the rotation
angle indicator and drag it to a new angle. The angle of rotation is displayed in the
Rotation text box.
5) Press the Enter key to make the changes.

Flipping objects
Quick flipping1) Click on an object to display the selection handles.
2) Quickly flip a selected object so it faces the other direction using one of the following
methods:– Right-click on the selected object and select Flip > Vertically or Horizontally fromthe context menu.
– Click on Vertically or Horizontally flip tool on the Standard toolbar.
– Go to Format > Flip > Vertically or Horizontally on the Menu bar.
– Click on Flip Vertically or Flip Horizontally in the Position and Size panel on theProperties deck of the Sidebar (Figure 142 on page 158).

Flip tool
To change the position and angle that an object flips over, the Flip tool on the Transformations
toolbar (Figure 145) is used as shown by the example in Figure 146.
1) Click on an object to display the selection handles.
2) Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations to open the Transformations toolbar.
3) Click on Flip on the Transformations toolbar and a symmetry axis appears as a dashedline through the center of the object (Item (1) in Figure 146). The object is flipped about
this axis of symmetry.
4) Click and drag the symmetry axis to a new position, or position the cursor in one of thecircles at each end of the symmetry axis and drag with the cursor to change the angle(Item (2) in Figure 146).
5) Place the cursor over one of the selection handles for the object.
6) Click and drag the cursor across the symmetry axis to flip the object. The new position of
the object is shown faintly until the cursor is released.

Figure 145: Transformations toolbar

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 161

Figure 146: Example of using the Flip tool7) Release the cursor and the object appears flipped over. Angle and position of the flip
depends on the angle and position of the symmetry axis (Item (3) in Figure 146).

Note
Press and hold the Shift key while moving the symmetry axis to rotate it in
45 degree increments.

Mirror copies
Impress does not include a mirror command. However, mirroring an object can be emulated byflipping the object:
1) Select the object to make a mirror copy and copy the object to the clipboard.
2) Flip the object using one of the methods in “Quick flipping” on page 161, then move theflipped object to one side.
3) Click in an empty area of the slide to deselect the object.
4) Paste the copied object from the clipboard into the slide.
5) Select both objects, then right-click and select Alignment from the context menu.
6) Select the type of alignment required. Top, Center, or Bottom if a horizontal mirror copy
is being created. Left, Centered, or Right if a vertical mirror copy is being created.

Distorting images
Three tools on the Transformations toolbar allow an object to be distorted.
• Distort – distorts an object in perspective.
• Set to circle (slant) and Set in Circle (perspective) – both create a pseudo 3D effect.

Note
When using these tools, an object has to be converted to a curve before
distorting. Converting an object into a curve cannot be reversed and can only beundone by using the Undo function.

162 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 147: Example of object distortion
1)
2)

Original shape
Corner distortion

3)
4)

Vertical distortion
Horizontal distortion

Figure 148: Example of perspective distortion
1)
2)

Original object
Set in Circle (perspective) distortion

Distort tool
Examples of corner, vertical, and horizontal distortion of an object using the Distort tool are
shown in Figure 147.
1) Select an object and click on Distort on the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
3) Click and drag a corner selection handle to distort the object using the opposite corner
selection handle as an anchor point for the distortion.
4) Click and drag the vertical selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
vertical side as an anchor point for the distortion.
5) Click and drag the horizontal selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
horizontal side as an anchor point for the distortion.

Set in Circle (perspective) tool
Example of distorting an object using the Set in Circle (perspective) tool is shown in Figure 148.
1) Select an object and click on Set in Circle (perspective) in the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted togive an indication of how the resulting object will look.

Set to circle (slant) tool
Example of distorting an object with the Set to circle (slant) tool is shown in Figure 149.
1) Select an object and click on Set to circle (slant) in the Transformations toolbar.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 163

Figure 149: Example of slant distortion
1)
2)

Original object
Set in Circle (slant) distortion

2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted togive an indication of how the resulting object will look.

Aligning objects
Use the alignment tools in LibreOffice to adjust the relative position of an object compared toanother object. These alignment tools are only active if two or more objects are selected. The
alignment options are as follows:• Left, Centered, Right — determines the horizontal alignment of selected objects.
• Top, Center, Bottom — determines the vertical alignment of selected objects.
Select two or more objects for alignment and use one of the following methods to access thealign options:• Click on the triangle ▼ next to Align Objects on the Line and Filling toolbar. Select analignment option from the tools available. The Align Objects icon shown on the Line andFilling toolbar depends on the last tool used.
• Go to View > Toolbars > Align Objects on the Menu bar to open the Align Objects
toolbar. Select an alignment option from the tools available.
• Right-click on the group of selected objects and select Align Objects and then one of thealignment options from the context menu.

Using grid or snap functions
In Impress, objects can be positioned accurately and consistently using grid points, snap points
and lines, object frames, individual points on objects, or page edges. This function is known as
Snap and allows positioning of an object in exactly the same place on multiple slides.
It is easier to use snap functions at the highest practical zoom value for a presentation. Two
different snap functions can be used at the same time. For example, snapping to a guide line andthe slide edge. It is recommended to activate only those snap functions that are really required.

Configuring grid and snap
To configure the grid and snap in a presentation, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress> Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) on the Menu bar todisplay the Grid dialog (Figure 150).

164 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 150: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — Grid page
Grid
Specifies the settings for the grid used in Impress. This grid helps to determine the exact
position of objects. Also, the grid can be set in line with the snap grid. If the snap grid isactivated, to move or create individual objects without snapping to the grid, keep the Shift
key pressed to deactivate this function for as long as necessary.
Snap to gridSpecifies how frames, drawing elements, and controls are moved between grid points.
To change the status of Snap to grid only for the current action, drag an object while
holding down the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘).
Visible gridSpecifies how the grid is displayed.
Resolution
Horizontal
Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
VerticalDefines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
Subdivision
Horizontal
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
VerticalSpecify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.
Synchronize axes
Specifies how the current grid settings are changed symmetrically. The resolution andsubdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same.
Snap
To snap lines
Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when the cursor isreleased. Also, this setting can be defined by using Snap to Snap Guides on the
Options toolbar (Figure 151).

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 165

Figure 151: Options toolbar
To the page margins
Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
The cursor or a contour line of the object must be in the snap range. In a presentation,
this function can also be accessed with Snap to page Margins in the Options toolbar.
To object frame
Specifies whether to align the contour of the object to the border of the nearest object.
The cursor or a contour line of the object must be in the snap range. In a presentation,
this function can also be accessed with Snap to Object Border in the Options toolbar.
To object points
Specifies whether to align the contour of the object to the points of the nearest object.
This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the object is in the snap range. In apresentation, this function can also be accessed with Snap to Object Points in the
Options toolbar.
Snap range
Defines the snap distance between the cursor and the object contour. Snaps to a snap
point if the cursor is closer than the distance selected.
Constrain Objects
When creating or moving objects
Specifies that objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) whencreating or moving them. This setting can be temporarily deactivated by pressing andholding the Shift key.
Extend edges
Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the
Shift key is pressed before releasing the cursor. This also applies to an ellipse (acircle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When Extend edges
is not selected, a square or a circle is created based on the shorter side or diameter.
When rotating
Specifies that objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that is selected. To
rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when rotating. Release
the Shift key when the desired rotation angle is reached.
Point reduction
Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, this is useful in
reducing the editing points.
The grid and snap functions can also be displayed and switched on or off using one of thefollowing methods:• Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) on the Menu bar to display the Grid dialog.
• Right-clicking on a slide and using the options in the context menu.
• Using the tools in the Options toolbar.

166 | Impress Guide 7.5

Snap to gridUsing Snap to Grid
Use the Snap to Grid function to move an object exactly onto a grid point in a slide. This function
can be switched on and off using one of the following methods:• Go to View > Snap Guides > Snap to Grid on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on a slide and select Snap Guides > Snap to Grid from the context menu.
• Click on Snap to Grid on the Options toolbar.

Displaying grid
To display or turn off the grid in a presentation using one of the following methods:• Go to View > Grid and Helplines > Display Grid on the Menu bar.
• Click on Display Grid on the Options toolbar.
• Right-click on a slide and select Grid and Helplines > Display Grid from the context
menu.
• Select Visible grid option in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid (macOS
LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid).

Changing color of grid points
By default and depending on the display and computer setup, the grid points are gray and are notalways easy to see. To change the color of the grid points, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice> Application Colors (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Application Colors)
to open the Options LibreOffice Application Colors dialog (Figure 152). Select a more suitable
color for the grid from the drop-down list in the Drawing/Presentation section to make the grid
points more prominent against the color scheme being used.

Figure 152: Options LibreOffice dialog — Application Colors page
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 167

Figure 153: New Snap Object dialog

Snap points and lines
Unlike the grid, snap lines and snap points are inserted when positioning an object to a specificposition on a slide. Snap lines can either be horizontal or vertical and appear as dashed lines.
Snap points appear as small crosses with dashed lines. Snap points and snap lines do notappear in printed output.

Inserting snap points and lines
To insert a snap point or line use one of the following methods to open the New Snap Object
dialog (Figure 153):• Go to Insert > Snap Guide on the Menu bar.
• Right-click in an empty space on a slide and select Insert Snap Guide from the context
menu.
The options available in the New Snap Object dialog are as follows:
Position
Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page.
X:
Enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the left edge ofthe page.
Y:
Enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the top edge ofthe page.
Type
Specifies the type of snap object required.
Point
Inserts a snap point. Both X: and Y: text boxes are active.
VerticalInserts a vertical snap line. Only X: text box is active.
Horizontal
Inserts a horizontal snap line. Only Y: text box is active.

Tip
When positioning snap lines, it is useful to display the rulers by selecting View >Rulers on the Menu bar. Click on the horizontal or vertical ruler and drag a snapline onto the slide.

168 | Impress Guide 7.5

Displaying snap points and lines
Display or turn off snap points and lines in a presentation using one of the following methods:• Go to View > Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides on the Menu bar.
• Click on Display Snap Guides on the Options toolbar.
• Right-click on a slide and select Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides from the context
menu.

Editing snap points
1) Right-click on a snap point and select Edit Snap Point from the context menu to open the
Edit Snap Point dialog (Figure 154).
2) Enter new X: and Y: coordinate settings for the snap point and click OK.
3) Alternatively, click on the snap point and drag it to a position on the slide.

Editing snap lines
1) Right-click on a snap line and select Edit Snap Line from the context menu to open the
Edit Snap Line dialog (Figure 155).
2) Enter a new X: coordinate setting for vertical snap lines or a new Y: coordinate setting forhorizontal snap lines and click OK.
3) Alternatively, click on a snap line and drag it to a new position on the slide.

Deleting snap points and lines
1) Right-click on a snap point or line.
2) Select Delete Snap Point or Delete Snap Line from the context menu.

Note
Clicking on Delete in the Edit Snap Point dialog or Edit Snap Line dialog alsodeletes a snap point or snap line.

Figure 154: Edit Snap Point dialog

Figure 155: Edit Snap Line dialog
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 169

Configuring snap range
The default snap range of when an object snaps to a snap point or line can be configured asfollows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > Grid (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > Grid) on the Menu bar to open the Options
LibreOffice Impress Grid dialog.
2) Enter the number of pixels to set the proximity of when the object snaps into position in
the Snap range text box. The default setting is 5 pixels.
3) Click OK to set the new snap range and close the dialog.

Using Helplines
Helplines are a function in Impress to help position objects and can be displayed while an object
is being moved. They extend from the edges of the object to the rulers at the top and left side ofa workspace and do not have a snap function (Figure 156).
Use one of the following methods to display helplines while moving an object:• Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > View (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > View) to open the Options LibreOffice Impress
View dialog (Figure 157) on the Menu bar and select Helplines while moving.

Figure 156: Example of using helplines

Figure 157: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — View page170 | Impress Guide 7.5

• Click on Helplines While Moving on the Options toolbar.
• Right-click in an empty area on a slide and select Grid and Helplines > Helplines While
Moving from the context menu.

Arranging objects
Impress organizes objects in a stack so that the objects on the top level of the stack cover theobjects on lower levels, if any overlapping occurs. The stack level of each object can be changed
by arranging shapes on a slide. Select an object or objects and use one of the following methods
to change the stack level:• Click on the required arrange tool on the Line and Filling toolbar.
• Right-click on selected objects and select Arrange from the context menu, then selectthe required arrange option from the sub-context menu.
• Go to Format > Arrange on the Menu bar and select an option from the submenu.
The options available for arranging the object stack level on a slide are as follows:
Bring to Front
Selected object is moved in front of all other objects.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift++ (macOS ⌘+Shift++).
Bring Forward
Selected object is moved one level up in the stack.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl++ (macOS ⌘++).
Send Backward
Selected object is moved one level down in the stack.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+– (macOS ⌘+–).
Send to Back
Selected object is moved behind all other objects.
Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+– (macOS ⌘+Shift+–).
In Front of Object
Moves the first selected object in front of the second selected object. Select the firstobject, then click on the second object and the objects swap position.
Behind Object
Moves the first selected object behind the second selected object. Select the first object,then click on the second object and the objects swap position.
ReverseSwaps the stacking order of two selected objects.

Connectors and gluepoints
Connectors are lines that can be anchored to gluepoints and by default are positioned on theborder of an object. When an object with a connector attached is moved or resized, theconnector automatically adjusts to the change. When creating a flowchart, organization chart,
schematics, or diagrams, it is highly recommended to use connectors instead of simple lines.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 171

Connectors
When a connector is drawn or selected, Impress displays selection handles that are different tothe selection handles for normal lines. The termination points of a connector are round at eachend of a connector. The square selection handles on a connector line are used to change therouting of a connector where applicable.
Impress offers a wide variety of predefined connectors, which differ in the termination shape(none, arrow, circle) and in the way the connector is drawn (straight, line, curved). The connector
types that are installed on the Connectors sub-toolbar (Figure 158) are normally indicated by acheck mark or highlighting, depending on the computer operating system and setup.
The full range of predefined connectors can be accessed by clicking on the triangle ▼ on the title
bar of the Connectors sub-toolbar and selecting Visible Buttons. For more information on
installing connectors onto the Connectors sub-toolbar, see Appendix B, Toolbars.

Figure 158: Connectors sub-toolbar
The connector types are numbered to indicate the installation position from left to right on the
sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)

Connector Ends with Arrow 12)
Straight Connector Ends
13)
with Arrow
Curved Connector Ends
14)
with Arrow
Line Connector Ends with 15)
Arrow
Connector
16)
Straight Connector
Curved Connector
17)Line Connector
18)
Connector with Arrows
Straight Connector with
19)
ArrowsCurved Connector with
20)
ArrowsLine Connector with Arrows 21)
Connector Starts with
Arrow
22)
Straight Connector Starts
with Arrow
23)
Curved Connector Starts
with Arrow
24)
Line Connector Starts with
Arrow
25)
Connector Ends with Circle 26)
Straight Connector Ends
with Circle
27)Line Connector Ends with 28)
CircleCurved Connector Ends
with Circle

Connector Starts with
CircleStraight Connector Starts
with Circle
Line Connector Starts with
CircleCurved Connector Starts
with Circle
Connector with Circles
Straight Connector with
CirclesLine Connector with Circles
Curved Connector with
Circles

Connector types
Standard
Connector name starts with Connector. Line segments run vertically and horizontallycreating a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends.
Line
Connector name starts with Line. Consists of a line segment with two smaller segments at
the ends and creates a connector that bends near a gluepoint. To adjust the length of theline segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click the connector and drag thebend point.
Straight
Connector name starts with Straight. Consists of a single line and draws a straight line
connector.
CurvedConnector name starts with Curved. Based on Bézier curves and curves around objects,
creating a curved line connector.
172 | Impress Guide 7.5

Drawing connectors
1) Click on the triangle ▼ next to Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open theConnectors sub-toolbar.
2) Select the type of connector required from the Connectors sub-toolbar.
3) Move the cursor over one of the objects to be connected and small crosses appear
around the object edges, normally in the same position as selection handles. Thesecrosses are gluepoints to which a connector attaches, as shown in Figure 159.
4) Click on the required gluepoint to attach one end of the connector, then click, hold anddrag the connector to another object.
5) When the cursor is over the gluepoint of the target object release the cursor and theconnector is drawn.
6) The selection handles that appear on the connector are used to adjust the path of theconnector so that the connector can be adjusted not to cover another object in its path, asshown by the example in Figure 160.

Figure 159: Example of connector gluepoints

Figure 160: Example of connectors between objects

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 173

Figure 161: Connector dialog

Note
The ends of the connector cannot be swapped, that is start point cannot become
the end point and the end point cannot become the start point. To swap the ends
of a connector, a new connector has to be created in the opposite direction.

Formatting connectors
To detach or reposition a connector, click on a round selection handle at either end of theconnector and drag to a different location, as shown in Figure 160.
To change the connector route between objects avoiding any objects on the route, click on asquare control handle on the connector line and drag it to a new position, as shown in
Figure 160.
To change a connector type, right-click on the connector and select Connector from the context
menu to open the Connector dialog (Figure 161). Use this dialog to select a connector type andchange the connector properties.
Type
Select the connector type from the drop-down list.
Line skew
Defines the skew of the line and the dialog preview displays the result.
Line spacing
Sets the spacing for the connectors.
Begin horizontal
Amount of horizontal space required at the beginning of the connector.
Begin verticalAmount of vertical space required at the beginning of the connector.
End horizontal
Amount of horizontal space required at the end of the connector.

174 | Impress Guide 7.5

End verticalAmount of vertical space required at the end of the connector.
Preview window
A left click zooms in on the preview and a right-click zooms out.

Gluepoints
Glue points are not the same as the selection handles of an object. The selection handles are formoving or changing the shape of an object. Glue points are used to fix or glue a connector to an
object so that when the object moves, the connector stays fixed to that object. All objects havegluepoints, which are not normally displayed and only become visible when Connectors on the
Drawing toolbar is selected.
To insert, customize or delete gluepoints on an object, open the Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 162)
using one of the following methods:• Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
• Go to Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
• Click on Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.

Gluepoint types
When the Gluepoints toolbar opens, only the six tools on the left of the toolbar are active. The
remaining six tools on the right of the toolbar only become active when Gluepoint Relative isdeselected.
The six tools on the left of the Gluepoints toolbar are as follows:
Insert Gluepoint
Inserts a gluepoint when clicking twice on an object. See “Inserting gluepoints” onpage 176 for more information.
Exit Direction Left
Connector attaches to the left edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Top
Connector attaches to the top edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Right
Connector attaches to the right edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Bottom
Connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected gluepoint.
Gluepoint Relative
Maintains the relative position of a selected gluepoint to an object when that object isresized. This tool is selected by default when the Gluepoint toolbar opens.
The six tools on the right of the Gluepoints toolbar only become active when Gluepoint Relativeis deselected.

Figure 162: Gluepoints toolbar

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 175

Gluepoint Horizontal Left
When applied to a gluepoint in an object and the object is resized, the horizontal positionof the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the left edge of the object. The
vertical position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Horizontal Center
When applied to a gluepoint in an object and the object is resized, the horizontal positionof the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the horizontal center of theobject. The vertical position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Horizontal Right
When applied to a gluepoint in an object and the object is resized, the horizontal positionof the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the right edge of the object. The
vertical position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Vertical Top
When applied to a gluepoint in an object and the object is resized, the vertical position of
the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the top edge of the object. The
horizontal position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Vertical Center
When applied to a gluepoint in an object and the object is resized, the vertical position of
the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the vertical center of the object.
The horizontal position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.
Gluepoint Vertical Bottom
When applied to a gluepoint in an object and the object is resized, the vertical position of
the gluepoint remains fixed at the same distance from the bottom edge of the object. The
horizontal position of the gluepoint changes with the resizing of the object.

Note
Glue points inserted into an object can only have one horizontal position and one
vertical position. Only one horizontal position and/or one vertical position can beselected on the Gluepoints toolbar and used to customize a gluepoint.

Inserting gluepoints
By default, most objects normally have four gluepoints. Insert additional gluepoints into an object
as follows:
1) Make sure no objects are selected and use one of the following methods to open the
Gluepoints toolbar:– Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Go to Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Click on Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
2) Select the object, then click on Insert Gluepoint on the Gluepoints toolbar. Alternatively,
right-click on a gluepoint previously inserted and select Insert Gluepoint from the context
menu.
3) Move the cursor to a position where the gluepoint is to be inserted into an object and click
to insert the gluepoint.
4) To insert more gluepoints, move the cursor to a new position and click to insert anothergluepoint.
5) With the gluepoint selected, select the type of gluepoint required from the options on the
Gluepoints toolbar.
176 | Impress Guide 7.5

6) To move a gluepoint to another position, click on the gluepoint and drag it to its new
position.
7) When inserting gluepoints is complete, make sure Insert Gluepoint on the Gluepoints
toolbar is deselected.

Tip
When inserting, moving or customizing gluepoints, it is recommended to use thezoom function to make it easier to work with gluepoints. Also, gluepoints snap to
the grid making it easier to position a gluepoint.

Note
Only gluepoints that have been inserted onto an object can be customized ordeleted. The default gluepoints included with an object cannot be customized ordeleted.

Customizing gluepoint exit direction
1) Make sure no objects are selected and use one of the following methods to open the
Gluepoints toolbar:– Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Go to Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Click on Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
2) Double-click on a gluepoint that has been inserted to select the gluepoint forcustomization.
3) Select an exit direction for the connector from the options available on the Gluepoints
toolbar, or right-click on the gluepoint and select the exit direction from the context menu.
4) When customizing exit direction is complete, make sure Insert Gluepoint on the
Gluepoints toolbar is deselected.

Customizing gluepoint position
1) Make sure no objects are selected and use one of the following methods to open the
Gluepoints toolbar:– Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Go to Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Click on Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
2) Double-click on a gluepoint that has been inserted to select the gluepoint forcustomization.
3) Click on Gluepoint Relative on the Gluepoints toolbar to deselect this tool, or right-clickon the gluepoint and deselect Gluepoint Relative from the context menu.
4) Select the horizontal and vertical positioning tools required for the gluepoint. Only one
horizontal positioning tool and one vertical positioning tool can be used on a gluepoint at
any one time.
5) When customizing gluepoint position is complete, make sure Insert Gluepoint on the
Gluepoints toolbar is deselected.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 177

Deleting gluepoints
1) Make sure no objects are selected and use one of the following methods to open the
Gluepoints toolbar:– Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Go to Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
– Click on Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
2) Select the gluepoint that has been previously inserted.
3) Press the Delete, or Backspace key, or go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar.

Working with 3D objects
Although Impress offers advanced functions to manipulate 3D objects, this guide describes only
the 3D settings applicable to an object. For additional information on how to use advanced 3D
effects such as geometry and shading, refer to the Draw Guide.
3D objects can be created in Impress in any of the following ways:• Click on the triangle ▼ next to 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar and select a 3D object
from the drop-down list. After selection, draw a 3D object in exactly the same way as anyother object. The icon shown on the Drawing toolbar depends on the 3D object that had
been previously selected and used.
• Go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar to open the 3D-Objects toolbar(Figure 163). This toolbar is the same as the 3D-Objects sub-toolbar that is available on
the Drawing toolbar.
• Right-click on an object already drawn on a slide and select Convert > To 3D or To 3D
Rotation Object from the context menu. To 3D adds thickness to the object to create a
3D object. To 3D Rotation Object creates a 3D object by rotating the object around anaxis.
• Select an object and click on Toggle Extrusion on the Drawing toolbar to apply a basic
3D effect and open the 3D-Settings toolbar (Figure 164). Select one of the options on the
3D-Settings toolbar to apply a different 3D effect.
The options available on the 3D-Settings toolbar are as follows:
Toggle Extrusion
Adds thickness to an object and activates the 3D properties.
Tilt Down
Tilts the object downwards around a horizontal axis.

Figure 163: 3D-Objects toolbar

Figure 164: 3D-Settings toolbar

178 | Impress Guide 7.5

Tilt Up
Tilts the object up around a horizontal axis.
Tilt Left
Tilts the object left around a vertical axis.
Tilt Right
Tilts the object right around a vertical axis.
Depth
Determines the thickness of the shape. An extended toolbar opens where some default
values are given. If none of the values are satisfactory, select Custom and then enter thedesired thickness.
Direction
Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to Direction opens a sub-toolbar to select the direction of
the perspective as well as the type (parallel or perspective).
Lighting
Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to Lighting opens a sub-toolbar to specify the direction
and intensity of light.
Surface
Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to Surface opens a sub-toolbar to specify the type of
surface from Wire Frame (useful when manipulating the object), Matt, Plastic, or Metal.
3D–Color
Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to 3D–Color opens a color palette to select a color forobject thickness when an object is extruded to 3D.

Note
Most of the Fontwork shapes (see “Fontwork” on page 181) have 3D properties
and can be manipulated with the 3D-Settings toolbar.

Converting objects
Objects are converted into different types using one of the following methods:• Right-click on the object and select Convert from the context menu, then select aconversion option from the context menu.
• Select an object and go to Format > Convert on the Menu bar and select a conversion
option from the submenu.
The options for converting objects to another type are as follows:
To Curve
Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve. Click on Points on the Drawing toolbar toedit the points after conversion to a Bézier curve.
To Polygon
Converts the selected object to a polygon. Click on Points on the Drawing toolbar to edit
the object after conversion to a polygon. A polygon always consists of straight segments.
To Contour
For basic shapes and is equivalent to converting to polygon. For more complex shapes(or for text objects) this conversion creates a group of polygons that can be manipulatedby entering the group.
To 3–D
Converts the selected object to a 3D object.
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 179

To 3–D Rotation Object
Creates a three-dimensional shape by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis.
To Bitmap
Converts the selected object to a bitmap.
To Metafile
Converts the selected object to Windows Metafile Format (WMF), containing both bitmap
and vector graphic data.

Note
In most cases the conversion to a different type of object does not immediately
produce visible results.
To Curve, To Polygon, To 3–D, and To 3–D Rotation Object are additional toolsthat can be added to the Drawing toolbar. See Appendix B, Toolbars for more
information.

Interaction with objects
Associating an object to an action that is performed when the object is clicked is called aninteraction.
1) Select an object for interaction and open the Interaction dialog (Figure 165) using one of
the following methods:– Click on Interaction on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Right-click on the object and select Interaction from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Interaction on the Menu bar.

Figure 165: Interaction dialog
180 | Impress Guide 7.5

2) Select the interaction from the available options in Action at mouse click and any
parameters (if applicable) that maybe available. The Interaction dialog changes
depending on the type of interaction selected. The interactions and parameters are
explained in Table 4.
3) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.
4) To remove an interaction from an object, repeat the procedure and select No action as
the interaction type at Step 2.
Table 4: Interaction types and parameters
Interaction

Parameters

No action

No parameters.

Go to previous slide

No parameters.

Go to next slide

No parameters.

Go to first slide

No parameters.

Go to last slide

No parameters.

Go to page or object

Specify the target from the list in the Target box. Search for a
specific target in the Slide/Object box at the bottom of the screen.

Go to document

Select the document in the Document box. Use Browse to open afile browser. If the document to be opened is in ODP format, thetarget list is populated allowing selection of the specific target.

Play soundSelect the file containing the sound to be played. Use Browse toopen a file browser.

Run program

Select the program to execute. Use Browse to open a file browser.

Run macro

Select a macro that runs during the presentation. Use Browse toopen the Macro Selector dialog.

Exit presentation

When the cursor is clicked over the object, the presentation
terminates.

Fontwork
With Fontwork, graphical text art objects can be created to make a presentation more attractive.
There are many different settings for text art objects (line, area, position, size, and more) giving alarge selection of effects. Fontwork is also available with the Writer, Calc, and Draw modules ofLibreOffice, but there are small differences in the way that each module displays it. For more
information about Fontwork, see the Getting Started Guide.

Creating Fontwork
1) Go to Insert > Fontwork on the Menu bar to open the Fontwork Gallery dialog(Figure 166).
2) Select a Fontwork style from the dialog and click OK. The selected Fontwork appears
centrally on the slide and the dialog closes.
3) Double-click on the Fontwork text graphic to switch on editing mode.
4) Type in the required text to replace the default text in the Fontwork graphic and the text
appears over the default text as shown by the example in Figure 167.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 181

Figure 166: Fontwork Gallery dialog

Figure 167: Example of creating Fontwork

182 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 168: Fontwork toolbar

Figure 169: Fontwork panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 170: Fontwork Shape sub-toolbar
5) Press the Esc key or click outside the Fontwork graphic and the text replaces default text.

Fontwork toolbar
The Fontwork toolbar (Figure 168) becomes visible and active when a Fontwork object isselected. If the toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Fontwork on the Menu bar. Also,
the Fontwork panel opens in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 169) and contains thesame tools as the Fontwork toolbar.
The Fontwork toolbar contains the following tools:
Insert Fontwork Text
Opens the Fontwork Gallery dialog.
Fontwork Shape
Changes the shape of the selected object. Clicking on the triangle ▼ next to Fontwork
Shape opens the Fontwork Shape sub-toolbar (Figure 170) allowing selection of different
Fontwork shapes.
Fontwork Same Letter Heights
Changes the height of characters in the selected Fontwork object. Toggles between
normal height where the characters have different heights to where all characters havethe same height.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 183

Fontwork Alignment
Specifies the text alignment within the frame. Options available are Left Align, Center,
Right Align, Word Justify, and Stretch Justify. The effects of the text alignment can only
be seen if the text spans over two or more lines. In the Stretch Justify mode, all lines arefilled completely.
Fontwork Character Spacing
Selects the spacing between characters and whether kerning pairs are used. Options
available are Very Tight, Tight, Normal, Loose, Very Loose, and Custom Spacing. For
Custom Spacing, input a percentage value: 100% is normal character spacing, less than
100% character spacing is tighter, and more than 100% character spacing is looser.
Toggle Extrusion
Converts the Fontwork object into a 3D shape using extrusion. See the Draw Guide formore information.

Modifying Fontwork
It is possible to treat Fontwork text as an object and apply all the formatting that has been
described in this chapter. Assign line properties only to Fontwork which does not have a 3D
effect, otherwise the changes will not be visible. Also, modify some of the Fontwork shapes bymoving the dot that is displayed along with the selection handles. This is similar to modification of
the angles of trapezoid and parallelogram basic shapes.

Animations
Animated slide transitions can be added between slides to give presentations a more
professional look when changing to the next slide (see Chapter 9, Slide Shows for more
information on transitions). However, Impress also allows animations to be added onto the slides
to create more interest in a presentation.
An animation consists of a sequence of images or objects called frames that are displayed insuccession when the animation runs. Each frame may contain one or more objects. For example,
bullet points appearing one by one; pictures, shapes or other objects appearing singly or as agroup onto a slide. Animations can be controlled using the keyboard, a click, or automatically in a
timed sequence.

Note
Anything that can be placed onto a slide is an object. For example, an object canbe an image, clip art drawing, text, and so on.

Tip
Animations can look great in a presentation, but overuse of animations can makea good presentation into a poor presentation. Always use discretion when adding
animations to a presentation.

Creating an animation
1) Select an object on a slide and open the Animation deck on the Sidebar (Figure 171)using one of the following methods:– Click on Animation on the Sidebar.
– Right-click on a selected object and select Animation from the context menu.
– Go to View > Animation on the Menu bar.
184 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 171: Animation deck on Sidebar2) Click on Add Effect to add the selected object into the Animation preview box.
3) Select a category type from the options available in the Category drop-down list.
4) Select an animation effect from the options available in the Effects list.
5) Select how the animation starts from the options available in the Start drop-down list.
6) Select how the animation appears from the options available in the Direction drop-list.
Available options are specific to the effect selected in the Effects list.
7) Enter a time in seconds for how long the animation lasts in the Duration box.
8) Enter a timing delay in seconds for when the animated object appears in the presentationin the Delay box.
9) If necessary, click on Options to open the Effect Options dialog to set any effect options
required for the animation, then click OK to close the Effect Options dialog.
10) If necessary, change the order of when the selected object appears in the animation using
Move Up or Move Down below the Animation preview box.
11) Click on Play to preview the animation effect.
12) If necessary, select Automatic Preview so that each time the animation is changed,
there is a preview of the effect.
13) When satisfied, run the slide show to check the presentation.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 185

Animation tools and options
The available tools and options on the Animation deck on the Sidebar provides control over how
an animation is applied to an object on a slide.
Add EffectAdds a selected object to the Animation preview box and add animation effects to theobject.
Remove Effect
Removes a selected object and its animated effects from the Animation preview box.
Move Up
Moves the selected object and its animation effect up the order of animation effects thathave been applied to an object.
Move Down
Moves the selected animation effect down the order of animation effects that have been
applied to an object.
Category
Select a category from the options available in the drop-down list.
EffectSelect an animation effect from the options available in the list.
Start
Select from the drop-down list how an animation effect starts when running an animation:
On click
Animation stops at this effect until the next click.
With previous
Animation runs immediately.
After previous
Animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends.
Direction
Select from the drop-down list how an animation effect appears on the slide. The options
available depend on the animation effect selected.
Options
Opens the Effect Options dialog for adjusting and applying options to the animation effectand timing.
Duration
Select the duration, in seconds, of the selected animation effect.
Delay
Select the delay, in seconds, of when the animation effect starts.
Automatic Preview
Select this option to automatically preview an animation effect when it is applied to an
object.
Play
Test run the animation.

186 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 172: Effect Options dialog — Effect page

Effect Options dialog
Effect page
The Effect page (Figure 172) contains options that match the animation effect selected:
Settings
Direction
Specify the direction of the animation effect from the options available in the drop-down
list.
Enhancement
Sound
Select a sound from the drop-down list that plays when the animation effect is run.
After animation
Select from the drop-down list what happens after an animation effect ends.
— Don't dim – no after-effect runs.
— Dim with color – after the animation a dim color fills the shape.
— Hide after animation – hides the shape after the animation ends.
— Hide on next animation – hides the shape on the next animation.
Dim color
Select a dim color from the available color palettes.
Text animation
Select the animation mode for the text in an object:— All at once – animates the text all at once.
— Word by word – animates the text word by word.
— Letter by letter – animates the text letter by letter.
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 187

Figure 173: Effect Options dialog — Timing page
Delay between characters
Specifies the percentage of delay between animations of words or letters.

Timing page
The Timing page on the Effect Options dialog (Figure 173) contains the following options:
TimingStart
Displays the start property of the selected animation effect.
— On click – animation stops at this effect until the next click.
— With previous – animation runs immediately.
— After previous – animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends.
DelaySpecifies a delay in seconds before the effect starts.
Duration
Specifies the duration in seconds of the effect.
RepeatSpecifies whether and how to repeat the current effect. Enter the number of repeats, or
select from the list:— none – effect is not repeated.
— Until next click – animation is repeated until the next click.
— Until end of slide – animation repeats as long as the slide is displayed.
Rewind when done playing
Specifies whether to let the animated object returns to its starting state after the
animation ends.

188 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 174: Effect Options dialog — Text Animation page
Trigger
Animate as part of click sequence
Specifies whether to let the animation start in the normal click sequence.
Start effect on click ofSpecifies whether to let the animation start when a specified shape is clicked. Selectthe shape by its name from the drop-down list.

Text Animation page
The Text Animation page on the Effect Options dialog (Figure 174) contains the following
options:
Group text
Specifies how the text is animated.
As one object
Whole text object is animated.
All paragraphs at once
All text paragraphs are animated.
By XX level paragraphs
Text for the outline level selected is animated. The options available depends on how
many outline levels there are in the animated text.
Automatically afterSpecifies a delay in seconds before the text animation effect starts.
Animate attached shape
Animates an object that contains text.
In reverse order
Text paragraphs are animated in reverse order.

Animated images
Animation of drawing objects, text objects, and graphic objects (images) on slides can make apresentation more interesting. LibreOffice Impress provides a simple animation editor where
animation images (frames) can be created by assembling objects from a slide. The animation
effect is achieved by rotating through static frames that are created.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 189

Figure 175: Animation dialog

Creating animated image
The following is an example of how to create an animated image.
1) Select an object or group of objects for inclusion in an animation and go to Insert >Media > Animated Image to open the Animation dialog (Figure 175).
2) Add an object or objects using one of the following methods:– Click on Apply Object to add a single object or a group of objects to the current
animation frame.
– Click on Apply Objects Individually to create a separate animation frame for each of
the selected objects.
3) In Animation Group, select Bitmap object.
4) Enter the frame (image) number in the Image Number box to setup the image.
5) In Duration specify the duration time in seconds for displaying a frame.
6) Specify the number of times a frame is displayed in the animation sequence in Loop
Count. This is called looping.
7) Repeat Steps 4 thru 6 for each image or object used for the animated image.
8) Click on Create and the animated image appears centrally on the slide.

Note
If the image to be copied consists of several objects, each object can be treatedas a separate frame. In this case, click on Apply Objects Individually.
Remember that each object is centered in the animation.

190 | Impress Guide 7.5

Animation dialog controls
First Image
Jumps to the first image in the animation sequence.
Backwards
Plays the animation backwards.
Stop
Stops playing the animation.
Play
Plays the animation.
Last Image
Jumps to the last image in the animation sequence.
Image Number
Indicates the position of the current image in the animation sequence. To view anotherimage, enter its number or click the up and down arrows.
DurationEnter the number of seconds to display the current image. This option is only available if
Bitmap object is selected in Animation group.
Loop Count
Sets the number of times that animation will play. If the animation is to play continuously,
select Max. This option is only available if Bitmap object is selected in Animation group.
Apply Object
Adds selected object or objects as a single image.
Apply Objects IndividuallyAdds an image for each selected object. If a grouped object is selected, an image iscreated for each object in the group.
Delete Current Image
Deletes the current image from the animation sequence.
Delete All Images
Deletes all images in the animation.
NumberTotal number of images in the animation.
Group object
Assembles images into a single object so that they can be moved as a group. Individual
objects can still be edited by double-clicking the group in the slide.
Bitmap object
Combines images into a single image.
CreateInserts the animation into the current slide.

Note
An animation, such as an animated GIF, can be selected. Click Apply Objects
Individually to open it for editing. When finished editing the animation, click
Create to insert a new animation into a slide.

Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects | 191

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 6,
Formatting Graphic Objects

Introduction
The format of each graphic object, in addition to its size, rotation, and position on the slide, isdetermined by a number of attributes that define the line, text, and area fill of each object. These
attributes (among others) also contribute to a graphics style. Although this chapter discusses
mainly the manual formatting of objects, it concludes by showing how to create, apply, modify,
and delete graphics styles.

Working with lines
In LibreOffice the term “line” indicates both a freestanding segment (line), the outer edge of ashape (border), or an arrow. In most cases, the properties of the line that can be modified arestyle (solid, dashed, invisible, and so on), width, color, and type of arrowhead.

Note
When adding color to a line or arrow, refer to “Color fills” on page 204 on how tochange color, create custom colors, modify colors, or delete colors.

Line and Filling toolbar
Format a line using the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 176) as follows:
1) Make sure a line is selected on a slide.
2) Select a line style from the Line Style drop-down list.
3) Either type the line width in the Line Width text box, or use the up and down arrows tochange the line width.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color and select a color from one of the color
palettes that are available.
5) If necessary, select from the Arrow Style drop-down list the type of arrowhead for eachend of the line and change the line into an arrow. The left drop-down list adds an arrowhead to the beginning of the line. The right drop-down list adds an arrow head to the endof the line.
6) If necessary, click on Shadow to add a shadow to the line. The shadow applied uses thesettings set in the Line dialog (for more information, see “Line dialog” on page 196).
7) Deselect the line to save the changes to the line.

Sidebar
To format a line using the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 177):
1) Make sure a line is selected on a slide.

Figure 176: Line and Filling toolbar

194 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 177: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Line to open the Line panel.
4) In Line when an arrow is being created, select from the Arrow Style drop-down list thetype of arrowhead for each end of the line and change the line into an arrow. The leftdrop-down list adds an arrow head to the beginning of the line. The right drop-down list
adds an arrow head to the end of the line.
5) In Line, select from the Line Style drop-down list the type of line from the options
available.
6) In Width, select a line width from the options in Select the width of the line drop-down
list, or enter a width in the Custom Line Width text box.
7) In Color, select a line color from one of the color palettes that are available in the Line
Color drop-down list.
8) In Transparency, move the slider or enter a percentage in the text box to set the shadowtransparency.
9) In Corner style, select a corner style from the options available in the drop-down list.
10) In Cap style, select the style of the line end caps from the drop-down list. The cap style isalso added to dashes if dashes have been used in the line style.
11) Deselect the line to save the changes to the line.
12) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar and open the Line dialog
for more control over formatting lines.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 195

Figure 178: Line dialog — Line pageLine dialog
To fully change the appearance of a line, the Line dialog is used. The line dialog consists of four
pages: Line, Shadow, Line Styles and Arrow Styles, which are explained in the following
sections.
1) Make sure a line is selected on a slide.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 178) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Line panel title bar in the Properties deckon the Sidebar.
3) When all changes have been made to the selected line, click OK to close the dialog andsave the changes. The preview box at the bottom of the dialog shows the effect of any
changes made to a line.

Line properties
The Line page in the Line dialog is where the basic parameters of a line are selected and are as
follows:
Line Properties
Style
Select a line style from the Style drop-down list.
Color
Select a predefined color from the available color palettes. To create a custom color,see to “Color fills” on page 204 for more information.

196 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 179: Example of line transparency(0%; 25%; 50%; 75% left to right)

Figure 180: Example of arrow head centers(default top; center bottom)
WidthSpecifies the thickness of the line.
Transparency
Sets the transparency percentage of a line. Figure 179 is an example of the effectdifferent transparency percentages have when lines placed over an object.
Arrow Styles
Only applicable to individual lines and is not used for lines that form the borders of an
object.
Start Style
Select the arrow style for the start of a line from the drop-down list.
Width
Specifies the thickness of the start arrow ending.
End Style
Select the arrow style for the end of a line from the drop-down list.
Width
Specifies the thickness of the end arrow ending.
CenterMoves the center of the arrow endings to the end point of the line. Figure 180 is an
example of the effects this option is selected.
Synchronize ends
Makes the two line ends identical.
Corner and Cap Styles
Determines how the connection between two segments of a line looks. To appreciate thedifference between corner and cap styles, choose a thick line style and observe how thepreview changes as each option is selected.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 197

Figure 181: Line dialog — Shadow page
Corner style
Select the shape used at the corners of the line from the drop-down list. For a small
angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
Cap style
Select the style of the line end caps from the drop-down list. The caps are added toinner dashes as well.

Line shadows
The Shadow page of the Line dialog (Figure 181) provides options for adding and formatting aline shadow. The shadow settings in this dialog are the same as the shadow settings used for
object areas. However, shadow settings for a line can be different from the shadow settings used
for object areas. For more information on shadow settings, see “Working with shadows” onpage 220.
To quickly apply a shadow to a line, click on Shadow on the Line and Filling toolbar. This createsa shadow using the settings from the Shadow page in the Line dialog.

Line styles
Line styles are useful in a drawing when adding several lines of similar types reducing the need
to format individual lines. LibreOffice provides standard line styles that can be used in a drawing.
Also, line styles can be created, saved, and deleted.
The Line Styles page in the Line dialog (Figure 182) provides the options to use predefined line
styles and to create or change line styles. An example of the line style selected or created isdisplayed at the bottom of the Line Styles page.

Creating line styles
1) Create a line in a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
3) Click on Line Styles to open the Line Styles page.
4) Select from the Line style drop-down menu a predefined line style that is similar to the line
style being created.

198 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 182: Line dialog — Line Styles page5) Click Add and type a name for the new line style in the Name dialog that opens, thenclick OK to close the dialog. The name of the new style appears in the Line style box.
6) In the Type drop-down lists, select Dots or Dash. For lines with only dots or dashes,
select the same type in both Type boxes.
7) In Number, specify the number of dots or dashes required. For different sized groups ofdots or dashes, set a different quantity number in each Number box.
8) In Length, specify the length percentage for dashes. Length is not available if Dots has
been selected for Type.
9) In Spacing, set a spacing percentage between the dots and/or dashes.
10) If necessary, select Fit to line width so that the new style fits the width of the selected line.
11) The new line style created is available only in the current document. To use the new line
style in other documents, click on Save Line Styles and type a unique filename in the
Save as dialog that opens. Saved line styles have the file extension of .sod.
12) To use a previously created line style, click on Load Line Styles, then select a style fromthe list of saved styles and click on Open to load the style into the document.
13) If necessary, click on Modify to change the name of the style and follow Steps 4 thru 11
to create and use a new line style.
14) Click OK to save any changes and close the Line dialog.

Note
When creating a line style, it is recommended to use a unique name for the line
style. This prevents one of the predefined line styles in LibreOffice from being
overwritten and causing formatting problems in other documents that use thepredefined line styles.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 199

Deleting line styles
1) Open the Line dialog and click on Line Styles to open the Line Styles page.
2) Select the line style for deletion from the Line style drop-down list.
3) Click on Delete, then confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog
that opens.
4) Click OK to save any changes and close the Line dialog.

Note
When deleting line styles, make sure that the line style is not used in anotherdocument. It is recommended to only delete line styles that have been createdand not to delete one of the LibreOffice predefined line styles. This prevents any
formatting problems in other documents where the line style has been used.

Arrow styles
Creating arrow styles
Any shape can be used as an arrowhead, but the shape must be convertible to a curve. A curve
is something drawn without lifting a pencil. For example, a star can be converted to a curve, but asmiley face cannot.
1) Select a shape, or create a shape that can be converted to a curve for use as a newarrowhead. The part of the shape that is going to be point of the arrowhead must face
upward. An example of a new arrowhead is shown in Figure 183.
2) If necessary, select the shape, right-click and select Convert > To Curve from the context
menu. If the shape is already a curve, To Curve will not be available.
3) Make sure the arrowhead shape is selected.
4) Open the Line dialog and click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page
(Figure 184).
5) Click on Add, type a name for the new arrow style in the dialog that opens, then click OK.
The new arrowhead style appears on the Arrow Styles page and at the bottom of theArrow style drop-down list.
6) The new arrow style created is available only in the current document. To use the createdarrow style in other documents, click on Save arrow styles and type a unique filename inthe dialog that opens. Saved arrow styles have the file extension of .soe.

Figure 183: Example arrowhead

200 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 184: Line dialog — Arrow Styles page7) To use a previously saved arrow styles, click on Load arrow styles to open a file browser
and select the style from the saved list of styles. Click Open to load the style into adocument.
8) If necessary, make changes to the arrow style and click on Modify, then enter a name inthe dialog to change the name of the arrow style.
9) Click OK to save any changes and close the Line dialog.

Deleting arrow styles
1) Open the Line dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
2) Click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page.
3) Select the arrow style for deletion from the Arrow style drop-down list.
4) Click on Delete, then confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog
that opens.
5) Click OK to save any changes and close the Line dialog.

Note
When deleting arrow styles, make sure that the arrow style is not used in anotherdocument. It is recommended to only delete arrow styles that have been createdand not to delete one of the LibreOffice predefined arrow styles. This prevents
any formatting problems in other documents where the arrow style has beenused.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 201

Figure 185: Example of area fill types
1)
2)
3)

None
Color
Gradient4)
5)
6)

Hatching or Hatch
Bitmap or Image
Pattern

Using area fills
Area fill refers to the inside of an object that has an unbroken border, for example a rectangle,
circle, star, pentagon and so on. Area fills can consist of a color, gradient, hatching, pattern,
bitmap, image, or pattern, as shown by the examples in Figure 185. Area fills can also be madepartly or wholly transparent and throw a shadow.

Note
Although the characteristics of an existing area fill can be changed and thenmodified by clicking the Modify button, it is recommended that only custom area
fills are modified rather than modifying the predefined area fills supplied with
LibreOffice. Predefined area fills may be reset when LibreOffice is updated

Area fill types
The area fill types that are available for use with objects are as follows. To create custom area filltypes, see “Working with area fill types” on page 204 for more information.
None
Select this option if an area fill for an object is not required.
Color
Select a color palette from the available palettes, then select a color in the palette byclicking on the color.
Gradient
Select the required gradient from the available options.

202 | Impress Guide 7.5

Hatching/Hatch
Select the required hatching from the available options. In the Area dialog, Hatching islabelled as Hatch.
Bitmap/Image
Select the required bitmap from the available options. In the Area dialog, Bitmap islabelled as Image.
Pattern
Select the required pattern from the available options.
Use Slide Background/Use Background
Select this option to use one object to create a hole through several objects placed in astack on a slide and show the slide background as an area fill.

Line and Filling toolbar
Tools on the Line and Filling toolbar provide a number of default fillings available to quickly format
the area fill of objects. If this toolbar is not showing, go to View > Toolbars > Line and Filling on
the Menu bar.
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Click on Area Style/Filling on the Line and Filling toolbar and select the type of fillrequired from the drop-down list. For more information on area fills, see “Area fill types”
on page 202 and “Working with area fill types” on page 204.
3) Deselect the object to save any changes.

SidebarThe options available in the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar provide a numberof default fillings available with restricted options to quickly format the area fill of objects.
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck, then click on Area toopen the Area panel (Figure 186).
3) Use the various options in the Fill and Transparency drop-down lists to format the fill andtransparency of an object. For more information on area fills, see “Area fill types” onpage 202 and “Working with area fill types” on page 204.
4) Deselect the object to save any changes.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the Area title bar to open the Area
dialog giving more control over the appearance of the object fill.

Area dialog
Use the Area dialog (Figure 187) to change existing area fills with greater control or create anarea fill.
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Open the Area dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Area on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Area from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Area panel title on the Sidebar.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 203

Figure 186: Area panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 187: Area dialog — Color page3) Click on Area to open the Area page.
4) Select the style of area fill from the options that become available. The number ofavailable options depends on the type of area fill selected. For more information on area
fills, see “Area fill types” on page 202 and “Working with area fill types” on page 204.
5) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Working with area fill types
Color fills
Adding color
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
204 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 188: Pick a Color dialog
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color toopen the options available for a color fill (Figure 187).
3) In Palette, select the required color palette from the drop-down list and the required color
from the available colors shown. All color fills available are solid colors.
– Active – shows the present color fill of a selected object. After selecting a new color,a preview of the selected color appears in New.
– Alternatively, enter the RGB or Hex values of a color in the appropriate text box.
– Alternatively, click on Pick to open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 188). Select a color
from the color box or enter the RGB, Hex, HSB or CMYK values for the color
required.
– If a color has been used before, then select the required color from those available in
Recent Colors.
4) Click OK to close the dialog and save the changes. The color area fill appears in theselected object.

Creating custom colors with Area dialog
Custom colors can be created by changing the values of the following color notations.
RGB notation of Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B)Hex # number
Values of Hue (H), Saturation (S), and Brightness (B)
CMYK percentages of Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K).

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 205

Note
The color notations are linked and changing the value in one set, automaticallychanges the values in the other sets.
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color toopen the options available for a color fill.
3) Specify the values for RGB, or Hex #.
4) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to the Custom palette.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The new color appears as a fillin the selected object.

Creating colors with Pick a Color dialog
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color toopen the options available for a color fill.
3) Click on Pick to open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 188).
4) Create a new color using one of the following methods. A preview of the color created isshown in the colored box below the original color on the left side of the dialog.
– Select a color range from the colored bar, then, using the cursor, move the target in
the colored box until the cursor is on the color required.
– Enter the color values in the RGB text boxes.
– If known, enter the Hex# number in the text box. For example, Hex numbers arenormally used when a specific color has been created, for example a company logo.
– Enter the color values in the HSB text boxes. HSB values do not change the color, but
how a color looks.
– Enter the color percentages in the CMYK text boxes.
5) Click OK to close the Pick a Color dialog.
6) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name for the color in the Name dialog that
opens.
7) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to the Custom palette.
8) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The new color appears as a fillin the selected object.

Deleting custom colors
1) Select an object for editing and open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color to open the options available fora color fill.
3) Select Custom from the Palette drop-down list in Colors.
4) Select the color for deletion from those displayed and click on Delete. There is no
confirmation given when deleting a color.

206 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 189: Extensions: Color Palette dialog
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Only colors that have been created and placed in the custom palette can bedeleted. Colors from color palettes installed with LibreOffice cannot be deleted.

Adding color palettes
Color palettes that are compatible with LibreOffice can be added using Extensions: Color
Palettes as follows:
1) Select an object for editing and open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color to open the options available fora color fill.
3) In Colors, click on Add color palettes via extension to open the Extensions: Color
Palette dialog (Figure 189).
4) Select a color palette from the list of available color palette extensions and click on Install
to install the extension into LibreOffice.
5) Click on Close to close the Extensions: Color Palette dialog and the color palette appears
in the Palette drop-down list ready for use.

Gradient fills
Adding gradients
1) Select an object for editing and open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient (Figure 190) to open theoptions available for a gradient fill.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 207

Figure 190: Area dialog — Gradient page3) In Gradient, select the required gradient from the list of available gradients and it appears
in Preview.
4) To override the default gradient transition of a selection, deselect Automatic in Options
and then enter the values for Type, Increment, Angle, Border, From Color, and To Color in
the available boxes.
5) Click OK to close the dialog and save the changes. The gradient area fill appears in theselected object.

Creating custom gradients
Gradients can be modified or created. Several types of gradients are predefined in LibreOffice.
Changing the From Color and To Color settings could be sufficient to obtain a satisfactory result.
1) Select an object for editing and open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to open the options available
for a gradient fill.
3) In Gradient, select one of the predefined gradient from the list of available gradients andit appears in Preview.
4) In Options, select a gradient type from the Type drop-down list: Linear, Axial, Radial,
Ellipsoid, or Square. Each gradient type changes the gradient displayed in Preview.
5) Adjust the settings in Options as necessary. Options used for gradients are explained inTable 5. Depending on the gradient type selected, some options will not be available.
6) Click on Add and enter a name for the gradient in the Name dialog that opens.
7) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the gradient is added at the end of the gradientsdisplayed in Gradient.
8) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

208 | Impress Guide 7.5

Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete gradients that have beencreated. Custom gradients are always positioned at the bottom of the displayed
gradients. Modifying, renaming or deleting gradients that are installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these gradients.
Table 5: Gradient options
Gradient property

Description

Linear gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in astraight line.

Axial gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from theobject center to the object edges in two opposite directions.

Radial gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in acircular pattern.

Ellipsoid gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in an
elliptical pattern.

Quadratic gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from theobject edges to the object center in four directions.

Square gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color from theobject edges to the object center in a square pattern.

Increment

Enter the number of steps for blending the two colors of the gradient.
By default this is set to Automatic.

Center X

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square, and Rectangular gradients, modify
these values to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.

Center Y

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square, and Rectangular gradients, modify
these values to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.

Angle

For all gradient types, modifies the angle of the gradient axis.

BorderIncrease this value to make the gradient start further away from theborder of the shape.

From Color

The start color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of
the color: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.

To Color

The end color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of
the color: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.

Modifying gradients
1) Select the object for editing where the gradient is going to be modified and open the Area
dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to open the options available
for a gradient fill.
3) Select a gradient previously created and added to the gradients displayed in Gradient.
4) Enter the new values for the gradient options that need to be changed. See Table 5 formore information on gradient options. Depending on the type of gradient selected, some
options may not be available.
5) Click Modify to save the changes. There is no confirmation given when modifying a
gradient.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 209

Renaming gradients
1) Select the object for editing where the gradient is going to be renamed and open the Area
dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to open the options available
for a gradient fill.
3) Right-click on the gradient that is going to be renamed and select Rename from thecontext menu.
4) Enter a name for the gradient in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the name change and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting gradients
1) Select the object for editing where the gradient is going to be deleted and open the Area
dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to open the options available
for a gradient fill.
3) Select a gradient that has been created and added to the gradients displayed in
Gradient.
4) Right-click on the gradient and select Delete from the pop-up menu. Click on Yes toconfirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Advanced gradient controls
1) Select the object that contains a gradient as a fill and open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient to open the options available
for a gradient fill.
3) Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar, or click on
Transformations on the Line and Filling toolbar to open the Transformations toolbar(Figure 191).

Figure 191: Transformations toolbar

Figure 192: Example of using Interactive Gradient tool

210 | Impress Guide 7.5

4) Click on Interactive gradient in the Transformations toolbar. This displays a dashed line
connecting two colored squares. The colors show the From Color and To Color that havebeen used for the selected gradient (Figure 192).
5) Select the type of gradient required for the object from the Type drop-down list in Options
on the Gradient page in the Area dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.
The gradient properties are adjusted depending on the gradient type selected and theseproperties are explained below.
LinearMove the From Color square to change where the gradient starts (border value). Move
the To Color square to change the orientation (angle value).
Axial
Move the To Color square to change both the angle and border properties of the gradient.
Only the To Color square can be moved.
RadialMove the From Color square to modify the border property to set the width of the gradientcircle. Move the To Color square to change the point where the gradient ends (Center X
and Center Y values).
Ellipsoid
Move the From Color square to modify the border property to set the size of the gradientellipsoid. Move the To Color square to change the angle of the ellipsoid axis and the axis
itself.
Quadratic
Move the From Color square to modify the border to set the size of the gradient square orrectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move the To Color square to change thecenter of the gradient.
SquareMove the From Color square to modify the border to set the size of the gradient square orrectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move the To Color square to change thecenter of the gradient.

Note
Moving the squares creates different effects depending on the type of gradient.
For example, for a linear gradient, the start and end squares of the gradient arealways situated either side of the center point of the object.

Image fills
Note
Image fills in the Area dialog are called bitmap fills in the Line and Filling toolbar,
and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. Using the Line andFilling toolbar, or the Area panel for bitmap area fills, is similar to using image
area fills in the Area dialog, but drop-down lists are used with a restricted
selection of options.

Adding image fills
1) Select an object for editing and open the Area dialog.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 211

Figure 193: Area dialog — Image page2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image (Figure 193) to open theoptions available for an image fill.
3) In Image, select the required image from the list of available images and it appears inPreview.
4) Alternatively, click on Add/Import to open a file browser window, then select an image file
to use as an image fill.
5) To override the settings for the selected image, in Options, enter values for Style, Size,
Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling Offset. See Table 6 for information on image options.
6) Click OK to close the dialog and save the changes. The image area fill appears in theselected object.
Table 6: Image options
OptionPurposeStyle – Custom
position/size

When selected, the position of the image in the object and the size ofthe image can be determined.

Style – Tiled

When selected, the image is tiled to fill the area. The size of the image
used for the tiling is determined by the Size settings

Style – Stretched

When selected, an image is stretched to fill object area.

Size – Width

Sets the width of the image. For example, 100% means that theimage original width is resized to occupy the whole fill area width,
50% means that the image width is half that of the fill area.

Size – Height

Sets the height of the image. For example, 100% means that theimage original height is resized to occupy the whole fill area height,
50% means that the image height is half that of the fill area.

Size – Scale

When selected, image size is given as a percentage for Width andHeight. When deselected, the actual size of the image is given for
Width and Height.

212 | Impress Guide 7.5

OptionPurposePosition

When selected, the anchoring point of the image is determined.
Default position is Center.

When Tile is selected, sets the offset for the image width inTiling Position – X
percentage values. 50% offset means that Impress places the middle
offsetpart of the image at the anchor point and starts tiling from there.
When Tile is selected, sets the offset for the image height in
Tiling Position – Y
percentage values. 50% offset means that Impress places the middle
offsetpart of the image at the anchor point and starts tiling from there.
Tiling Offset –Row

When Tile is selected, offsets the rows of tiled images by the enteredpercentage value so that each row is offset from the previous row.

Tiling Offset –ColumnWhen Tile is selected, offsets the columns of tiled images by theentered percentage value so that each column is offset from theprevious column.

Figure 194: Example of using image fills
1)
2)
3)

Original image
Width and height 25% scaled.
Anchor to top left corner.
No offset.
Width and height 25% scaled.
Anchor to top right.
Row offset 50%.

Editing images
1) Select an object for editing that contains an image as a fill, or insert an image into aselected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image toopen the options available for an image fill.
3) Select an image from the options available in Image to use and edit as a fill. Note that
any imported images are also available.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 213

4) In Options, select the properties for Style, Size, Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling
Offset. See Table 6 for more information on image properties. The best way to understandimage properties is to use them. Figure 194 shows examples of using image fills.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Importing images
1) Select an object to import an image file into.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image toopen the options available for an image fill.
3) Click on Add/Import and a file browser window opens.
4) Navigate to the directory containing the image file, then select it and click Open.
5) Enter a name for the new image in the Name dialog that opens, then click OK to close theName dialog. The imported image appears at the bottom of the Image preview box.
6) Select the imported image in the Image preview box.
7) Click OK to import the image into the selected object and close the Area dialog.

Renaming images
1) Select an object that uses an image as an area fill.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image toopen the options available for an image fill.
3) Right-click on the image selected for renaming and select Rename from the context
menu.
4) Enter a new name for the image in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the change and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting images
1) Select an object that contains the image that is going to be deleted.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image toopen the options available for an image fill.
3) Right-click on the image that is going to be deleted in the Image preview box.
4) Select Delete from the context menu and click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only rename or delete images that have been created orimported. Renaming or deleting images that are installed with LibreOffice may
cause problems in documents that use one of these images.

Pattern fills
Using pattern fills
1) Select an object for editing and open the Area dialog.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern (Figure 195) to open theoptions available for a pattern fill.
214 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 195: Area dialog — Pattern page3) In Pattern, select a pattern from the displayed options and it appears in Preview.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The pattern area fill appears inthe selected object.

Creating patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern as a fill, or insert a pattern into the selected
object.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern to open the options available
for a pattern fill.
3) If necessary, select a pattern from the options displayed in Pattern. Note that any custom
or imported patterns are also available. The selected pattern appears in Pattern Editor.
4) Select a color from the available color palettes for the Foreground Color and Background
Color.
5) In Pattern Editor, start creating the pattern by clicking in the squares (pixels) to change
color. Each click in a square swaps the color from Background Color to Foreground Coloror Foreground Color to Background Color.
6) Check the pattern being created in Pattern Editor and Preview to see if the desired effectis being achieved.
7) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
8) Enter a name for the new pattern, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The newpattern appears at the bottom of the displayed patterns in Pattern.
9) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Modifying patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern as a fill, or insert a pattern into the selected
object.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 215

2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern to open the options available
for a pattern fill.
3) If necessary, select a pattern from the options displayed in Pattern. Note that any custom
or imported patterns are also available. The selected pattern appears in Pattern Editor.
4) Enter new colors for Foreground Color and Background Color from the available color
palettes.
5) In Pattern Editor, start modifying the pattern by clicking in the squares (pixels) to change
color. Each click in a square swaps the color from Background Color to Foreground Coloror Foreground Color to Background Color.
6) Check the pattern being created in Pattern Editor and Preview to see if the desired effectis being achieved.
7) Click on Modify to save the pattern changes. There is no confirmation given whenmodifying a pattern fill.
8) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete patterns that have beencreated. Modifying, renaming or deleting patterns that were installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these patterns.

Renaming patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern as a fill, or insert a pattern into the selected
object.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern to open the options available
for a pattern fill.
3) In Pattern, right-click on the pattern that is displayed in the selected object, then selectRename from the context menu.
4) Enter a name for the pattern in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the renaming and close the Name box.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern as a fill, or insert a pattern into the selected
object.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern to open the options available
for a pattern fill.
3) In Pattern, right-click on the pattern that is displayed in the selected object, then selectDelete from the context menu.
4) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Hatch fills
Using hatch fills
1) Select an object for editing and open the Area dialog.

216 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 196: Area dialog — Hatch page2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch (Figure 196) to open theoptions available for a hatch fill.
3) In Hatch, select a hatch from the displayed options and it appears in Preview.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The hatch area fill appears inthe selected object.

Creating hatch fills
When creating new hatch fills or modifying an existing hatch fill, use the options available on the
Hatch page in the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to create new hatch fills rather than modify existing hatch fills.
1) Select an object that contains a hatch fill, or insert a hatch fill into the selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill.
3) As a starting point, select a hatch fill similar to the one being created. The selected hatch
fill appears in Preview.
4) Change the values of the option settings for the hatch fill. The hatch fill displayed inPreview changes to reflect the changes in option values. See Table 7 for information on
hatch options.
5) Click on Add to open a Name dialog and enter a name for the new hatch fill.
6) Click OK to close the Name dialog. The new hatch fill appears at the bottom of the hatch
fills displayed in Hatch.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The new hatch fill appears in theselected object.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 217

Table 7: Hatch options
Hatch option

Meaning

Spacing

Determines the spacing between two lines of the hatching fill. As
the value is changed the Preview is updated.

Angle

Determines the angle used for the hatch lines. Either use theslider or enter a value in the box to change the angle.

Line typeSet single, double or triple line for the style of the hatching fill.

Line color

Select a color of the lines that form the hatching fill from thedrop-down list of available color palettes

Background color

Select a color for the background color behind the hatching lines
from the drop-down list of available color palettes

Modifying hatch fills
1) Select an object that contains a hatch as a fill, or insert a hatch into the selected object.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to open the options available
for a hatch fill.
3) In Hatch, select the hatch that is displayed in the selected object. The selected hatch
appears in Preview.
4) Enter new values for the option settings of the hatch fill. The hatch fill displayed inPreview changes to reflect the changes in option values. See Table 7 for information on
hatch options.
5) Click Modify to save the changes. There is no confirmation given when modifying a hatchfill.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete hatch fills that have beencreated. Modifying, renaming or deleting hatch fills that were installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these hatch fills.

Renaming hatch fills
1) Select an object that contains a hatch as a fill, or insert a hatch into the selected object.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to open the options available
for a hatch fill.
3) In Hatch, right-click on the hatch that is displayed in the selected object, then selectRename from the context menu.
4) Enter a name for the hatch in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the renaming and close the Name box.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting hatch fills
1) Select an object that contains a hatch as a fill, or insert a hatch into the selected object.
2) Click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch to open the options available
for a hatch fill.

218 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 197: Example of using background image as fill3) In Hatch, right-click on the hatch that is displayed in the selected object, then selectDelete from the context menu.
4) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion, then click OK to save the changes and close theArea dialog.

Background image fills
Background image fills are used to allow an object create windows on a slide and display any
background image that has been placed on the slide. Figure 197 shows an example of an ellipse,
the topmost object, being used as a window through the underlying pentagon and rectangle
objects, and showing a portion of the background image.
1) Select a slide in a presentation that uses a background image.
2) Insert several objects onto the slide and position the objects into a stack.
3) Add an object that is going to be used as window onto the object stack as the topmost
object and make sure it is selected.
4) Change the fill of the selected object to a background image fill using one of the following
methods:– Open the Area dialog and select Use Background from the options available on the
Area page.
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 219

– On the Line and Filling toolbar, select Use Slide Background from the options
available in the Area/Style Filling drop-down menu.
– In the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, select Use Slide
Background from the options available in the Fill drop-down list.
5) Deselect the object and the background image appears in the object creating a window.

Note
There are no options available for using a background image fill. When abackground image fill is applied to an object, the whole of the object area is used
for the area fill.

Working with shadows
Shadows can be applied to objects such as lines, shapes and text. The options available forshadows are as follows:
Use shadow
This option must be selected to use a shadow with an object. Only available in the
Shadow page of the Area dialog (Figure 198).
EnableThis option must be selected to use a shadow with an object. Only available in the
Shadow panel in the Properties on the Sidebar (Figure 199).
Position grid
Select one of nine points determining the direction in which the shadow is cast from theobject. Only available in the Shadow page of the Area dialog (Figure 198).
Angle
Determines the angle in which the shadow is cast from the object. Only available in the
Shadow panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 199).
Color
Sets the color used for the shadow.
Distance
Determines the offset distance between the object and the shadow.
Blur
Sets how much the edges of a shadow are blurred or softened.

Figure 198: Area dialog — Shadow page220 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 199: Shadow panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
Transparency
Determines the amount of transparency for the shadow: 0% opaque shadow, 100%transparent shadow.

Area dialog
1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Shadow to open the Shadow page.
3) Select Use shadow in Properties and the shadow options become active.
4) Select from one of nine points in the position grid the direction in which the shadow isgoing to be cast in relation to the object.
5) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes, then selectthe color required for the shadow.
6) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
7) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
8) In Transparency, enter the percentage in the text box for the shadow transparency.
9) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Sidebar
1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Click on Properties to open the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 221

3) Click on Shadow to open the Shadow panel in the Properties deck.
4) Select Enable and the shadow options become active.
5) In Angle, select from one of the options available from the drop-down list to set thedirection of where the shadow is going to be cast in relation to the object.
6) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
7) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes and thenselect the color required for the shadow.
8) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
9) In Transparency, move the slider or enter a percentage in the text box to set the shadowtransparency.
10) Deselect the object to save the changes made.

Line and Filling toolbar
1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Click on Shadow on the Line and Filling toolbar. A shadow is created using the settingsfrom the Shadow page in the Area dialog.
3) Deselect the object to save the changes made.

Working with transparencies
Transparencies can be applied to objects and to any shadow that has been applied to an object.
In Impress two types of transparencies can be applied to an object – uniform transparency andgradient transparency. For more information on gradient transparencies, including an example ofcombining a color gradient with a gradient transparency, see “Gradient fills” on page 207.

Using Area dialog
1) Select an object where a transparency is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Transparency to open the Transparency page
(Figure 200).

Figure 200: Area dialog — Transparency page222 | Impress Guide 7.5

3) To create a uniform transparency, select Transparency and enter a percentage in the textbox.
4) To create a gradient transparency so that the area becomes gradually transparent, selectGradient and select the type of gradient transparency from the Type drop-down list:
Linear, Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic or Square.
5) If a gradient transparency has been selected, set the parameters for the type of thegradient transparency that has been selected. The available options depends on the typeof gradient transparency. Refer to Table 8 for a description of the properties.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Using Area panel on Sidebar
1) Select an object where a transparency is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 186 on page 204).
3) Click in the Transparency option box and open a drop-down list of available types oftransparencies.
4) Select a transparency type from the available options in the drop-down list: Solid, Linear,
Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic or Square. The selection of a transparency typechanges the available options to match the selected transparency type.
a) Select Solid to create a uniform transparency and use the slider or text box to change
the transparency percentage.
b) Select from Linear, Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic or Square to create a
gradient transparency so that the area fill becomes gradually transparent.
c) If a gradient transparency has been selected, the available options change to matchthe type of the gradient transparency. Refer to Table 8 for a description of the gradienttransparency options.
5) Click outside of the object to deselect it and save the changes.
Table 8: Gradient transparency options
Gradient transparency
Meaning
options
Center X

Used for Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The
values to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.

Center Y

Used for Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The
values to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.

Angle

Used for Linear, Axial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square
gradients. Specifies the angle of the gradient axis.

BorderIncrease this value to make the gradient start further away fromthe border of the object.

Start value

Value for the starting transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
100% means fully transparent.

End value

Value for the ending transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
100% means fully transparent.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 223

Text in objects
Note
By default, an object is not dynamic when it is created and does not behave like atext box. If the text exceeds the object borders, then the text has to be reduced in
font size, or the object size increased to accommodate the text.

Adding text1) Select the object where text is to be added.
2) Put the selected object into text mode using one of the following methods. The cursor
becomes a text cursor and flashes inside the object indicating that text mode is active.
The Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens replacing the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Double-click on the object.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F2.
– Go to Insert > Text Box on the Menu bar.
– Click on Insert Text Box on the Standard or Drawing toolbar to insert horizontal text.
– Click on Insert Vertical Text on the Standard or Drawing toolbar to insert vertical text.
3) Type the required text. Horizontal text is centrally aligned horizontally and vertically within
the boundaries of the object. Vertical text is aligned centrally on the left side of the object.
4) Alternatively, copy and paste text into the selected object. It is recommended to paste text
into an object as unformatted text and then format the text to to the presentation
requirements.
5) When finished, click outside of the object or press Esc to cancel text mode. The Line andFilling toolbar automatically opens replacing the Text Formatting toolbar.

Notes
If double-clicking on an object does not work, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu
bar to open the Options toolbar and select Double-click to edit Text.
Vertical text is only available if Asian and/or Complex text layout have been
selected in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages (macOS
LibreOffice > Preferences > Language Settings > Languages).

Formatting text in objects
This section only covers formatting of how text appears inside an object. For more information on
formatting text attributes, see Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
1) Select an object which contains text and use one of the following methods to open the
Text dialog (Figure 201):– Go to Format > Text Box and Shape > Text Attributes on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the text inside the object and select Text Attributes from the context
menu.
2) Click on Text to open the Text page.

224 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 201: Text dialog — Text page3) Format and edit the text within an object using the available options and one of thefollowing methods. See Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more information on
formatting text attributes. The text formatting options for objects are described in Table 9.
– Use the tools available on the Text Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format > Text on the Menu bar and use the options available in the drop-down
menu.
4) Click OK to close the Text dialog and save the changes to the text.
Table 9: Text formatting options for objects
Text options

Meaning

Word wrap text in shape

Starts a new line automatically when the border of the object isreached.

Resize shape to fit text

Expands an object when the text inserted in the object is toolarge.

Spacing to borders

Specify the amount of space between the borders of the object
and the text.

Text anchor

Used to anchor the text to a particular point within the object.

Full width

Anchors the text in the center of the object and uses the full
width of the object before wrapping text.

Text animation
Text can be animated when it has been placed into an object and is a separate animation fromobject animation. For information on object animation, see Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects.
1) Select an object which contains text.
2) Open the Text dialog and click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page
(Figure 202).
3) Select the type of animation required from the available options in the Effect drop-down
list as follows:– No Effect — default setting.
– Blink — text blinks on the screen.
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 225

Figure 202: Text dialog — Text Animation page
– Scroll Through — text moves into the object and then out following the selected
direction.
– Scroll Back and Forth — text moves first in the selected direction, but bounces backat the object border.
– Scroll In — text scrolls in toward the given direction starting from the edge of theobject and stops in the center.
4) In Effect, select the Direction of the animation using one of the four arrows to set thescroll direction for the text.
5) In Properties, select one the following options for the animation:– Start inside — animation starts from inside the object.
– Text visible when exiting – select to see the text when it exits from the animation.
– Animation cycles – select Continuous and the text animates continuously or set a
specific number of cycles for the animation.
– Increment — sets the amount the animation moves in Pixels when selected or a
specific distance when Pixels is deselected. The units of measurement depends on
the settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > General (macOS
LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General).
– Delay — starts the animation when Automatically is selected or after a specific lengthof time when Automatically is deselected.
6) Click OK to close the Text dialog and save the animation effect.

Text columns
1) Select the object which contains text.
2) Open the Text dialog and click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page
(Figure 203).
3) Enter the number of columns required in the Number of columns text box.
226 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 203: Text dialog — Text Columns page

Figure 204: Connector dialog
4) Enter the spacing required between each column in the Spacing text box. The units ofmeasurement depends on the settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress >General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General).
5) Click OK to close the Text dialog and save the changes.

Note
When text columns are added to an object, the whole of the inside of an object isused to format the text into the number of columns that have been created.

Formatting connectors
Connectors are lines that join two objects and always start from or finish at a glue point on an
object. See Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects for a description and use of the connectors.
1) Right-click on a connector and select Connector from the context menu to open theConnector dialog (Figure 204). The Connector dialog displays a preview of the selectedconnector as changes are made.
2) Select the type of connector from the Type drop-down list.
3) Set the Line Skew for the connector. Line skew is used to set the distance between
connectors where multiple connectors overlap.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 227

4) Set the Line Spacing for the connector. Line spacing is used to set the horizontal andvertical space between the connector and the object at each end of the connector.
5) Click OK to close the Connector dialog and save the changes.

Working with drawing styles
To achieve consistency for slides in a presentation, it is recommended to use styles when
applying the same formatting to objects. In Impress, the styles used for objects are calleddrawing styles.
Drawing styles are similar to paragraph styles that are used for text. A drawing style groups all
formatting properties applicable to an object and associates this properties group with a name.
This allows the properties group to be used for other objects. If a drawing style is modified (forexample, changing area color), the changes are automatically applied to all objects that use thesame drawing style.
If Impress is used frequently, a library of well defined drawing styles is an invaluable tool for
speeding up the process of formatting objects to any requirements that have to be followed (forexample, company colors or fonts).
For more information on drawing styles in Impress, see Chapter 2, Slide Masters, Styles, andTemplates.

Linked drawing styles
Drawing styles support inheritance which allows a style to be linked to another (parent) style sothat it inherits all the formatting settings of the parent. This inheritance creates families of styles.
For example, if multiple boxes are required that only differ in color, but are otherwise identicallyformatted, it is recommended to define a style for the box including borders, area fill, font, and soon as the parent drawing style. A number of drawing styles are then created that are
hierarchically dependent to the parent style, but differing only in the fill color attribute. Thesedrawing styles are known as child styles. If it is necessary to change the font size or borderthickness, the parent style is changed and all the child styles change accordingly.

Default drawing style
In Impress, the drawing styles are located in the Styles deck on the Sidebar (Figure 205). Clickon Drawing Styles to open the drawing styles that are available in the presentation. The Default
Drawing Style cannot be deleted and is automatically applied to any graphic object created on aslide. This style is the starting point for creating new drawing styles.

Note
The Default Drawing Style can be modified, but a modified Default Drawing Style
only applies to the presentation where the style was modified.

Creating drawing styles
New style from Sidebar
1) Select an object or create a new object.
2) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar using one of the following methods:– Click on Styles at the side of the Sidebar.
– Click on Show the Styles Sidebar on the Line and Filling toolbar.

228 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 205: Styles deck in Sidebar

Figure 206: Graphic Styles dialog — Organizer page
– Use the keyboard shortcut F11 (macOS ⌘+T).
3) Click on Drawing Styles in the Styles title bar to open the Drawing Styles panel.
4) Right-click on a drawing style that is selected in the list and select New from the context
menu to open the Graphic Styles dialog (Figure 206).
5) Click on Organizer to open the Organizer page.
6) Enter a name for the new drawing style in the Name text box.
7) In Inherit from text box, select None from the drop-down list if the new drawing style is
NOT going to be linked. This prevents the new drawing style from being linked to theDefault Drawing Style that was applied to the new object when it was created.
8) Use the various pages in the Graphic Styles dialog to format the new style, as follows:– Font, Font Effects, Indents & Spacing, Alignment, Tabs, Highlighting and Asian
Typography — provides options for formatting any text inserted into a graphic object.
– Dimensioning — provides options for dimension lines formatting.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 229

– Text, Text Animation, Connector, Line, Area, Shadowing, and Transparency —provides options for graphic object formatting.
9) Click OK to close the Graphics Styles dialog and save the new drawing style.

Note
Any new drawing style created is automatically placed in the Custom Styles
category.

New style from selected object
1) Select an object to use for creating a new drawing style.
2) Carry out any formatting changes to the object using the various dialogs and menu
options available in Impress.
3) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Drawing Styles on the left of the Styles
title bar to open the Drawing Styles panel.
4) Click on New Style from Selection on the right of the Styles deck title bar to open the
New Style from Selection dialog.
5) Enter a name for the new drawing style in the Enter new style name text box. A list isdisplayed of existing custom styles of that are available.
6) Click OK to save the new drawing style and close the New Style from Selection dialog.

Modifying drawing styles
1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Drawing Styles on the left of the Styles
title bar to open the Drawing Styles panel.
2) Right-click on the style that is to be modified and select Modify from the context menu to
open the Graphic Styles dialog.
3) Carry out any formatting changes to the drawing style using the options in the various
pages of the Graphic Styles dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Updating drawing styles
1) Select an object or create a new object.
2) Carry out any formatting changes to the object using the various dialogs and menu
options available in Impress.
3) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Drawing Styles on the left of the Styles
title bar to open the Drawing Styles panel.
4) Click on Update Style on the right of the Styles deck title bar to update the style. There isno confirmation that the style has been updated.

Applying drawing styles
1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Drawing Styles on the left of the Styles
title bar to open the Drawing Styles panel.
2) Select an object in the presentation to apply a drawing style.
3) Double-click on the drawing style name and apply the drawing style to the selected
object.

230 | Impress Guide 7.5

Note
Before deleting a custom drawing style, make sure the style is not in use in thepresentation.

Deleting drawing styles
The predefined drawing styles in Impress cannot be deleted, even if the predefined drawing style
is not in use. Only custom (user defined) styles can be deleted.
1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Drawing Styles on the left of the Styles
title bar to open the Drawing Styles panel.
2) Right-click on a custom drawing style and click Delete on the context menu.
3) Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the custom drawing style.

Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects | 231

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 7,
OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts,
and Other Objects

OLE objects
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is software technology that allows linking and embeddingof the following types of files into an Impress presentation.
LibreOffice spreadsheets
LibreOffice charts
LibreOffice drawings
LibreOffice formulas
LibreOffice text
The major benefit of using OLE objects is that it provides a quick and easy method of editing an
object using tools from the software that created the object. These file types can all be createdusing LibreOffice and OLE objects can be created from new or from an existing file.

Inserting new OLE objects
1) Select the slide in a presentation where the OLE object is going to be inserted.
2) Go to Insert > Object > OLE Object on the Menu bar to open the Insert OLE Object
dialog (Figure 207).
3) Select Create new and then select the type of OLE object in Object Type.
4) Click OK and a new OLE object is inserted in the center of the slide in edit mode. The
toolbars displayed change providing the necessary tools to create a new OLE object.

Figure 207: Insert OLE Object dialog — New page

Figure 208: Insert OLE Object — Create from file page234 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 209: Insert OLE Object dialog — Further Objects page

Inserting OLE objects from files
1) Select the slide in a presentation where the OLE object is going to be inserted.
2) Go to Insert > Object > OLE Object on the Menu bar to open the Insert OLE Object
dialog (Figure 208).
3) Select Create from file, then click on Search and a file browser window opens.
4) Navigate to where the file is located, then select the file required and click Open. The
filename appears in the File text box in the Insert OLE Object dialog.
5) Insert the OLE object into the center of the slide in edit mode using one of the following
methods:– Click OK to insert the file as an OLE object.
– Select Link to file, then click OK to insert the OLE object with a link to the originalfile.
– Select Display as icon, then click OK to insert the OLE object as an icon. When theicon is clicked on, the OLE object opens in a new window.

Notes
When inserting a new OLE object, it is only available in the presentation it isbeing inserted into and the OLE object can only be edited using Impress.
For computers using the Windows operating system, an additional option of
Further objects is available in the Object Type list. Clicking on Further objects
opens an Insert Object dialog (Figure 209) allowing an OLE object using othersoftware that is compatible with OLE and LibreOffice to be inserted. This option isavailable for new OLE objects and OLE objects from a file.
By default, when inserting a file into a slide as an OLE object, any changes madeto the original file do not affect the copy of the file inserted into a presentation.
Also, changes to the file copy in a presentation do not change the original file. If
any changes made to the file, either in the original or in the presentation, are toappear in both versions, the original file has to be linked with the presentation
when the file is inserted.

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 235

Editing OLE objects
1) Double-click on the OLE object to open it in edit mode. The toolbars in Impress change toprovide the necessary tools for editing an OLE object.
2) When editing the OLE object is complete, click anywhere outside the OLE object to exit
editing.
3) Save the presentation. Any changes made to the OLE object are also saved.

Resizing and moving OLE objects
Resizing and moving OLE objects is exactly the same as resizing and moving graphic objects in
Impress. For more information, see Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects.

Notes
When resizing or moving a spreadsheet in slides, ignore any horizontal andvertical scroll bars, and the first row and first column. The first row and column areeasily recognizable because of their light background color. They are only used
for spreadsheet editing purposes and are not included in the spreadsheet thatappears as an OLE object on the slide.
Do not double click on an OLE spreadsheet object when moving or resizing.
Double clicking opens the OLE object editing mode for spreadsheets.

Spreadsheets
To include a spreadsheet in an Impress presentation, either insert an existing spreadsheet file, orinsert a new spreadsheet as an OLE object. For more information on spreadsheets, see the Calc
Guide and the Getting Started Guide.
Embedding a spreadsheet into Impress includes most of the functionality of a Calc spreadsheet.
Impress is capable of using Calc functions to carry out calculations and data analysis. However, if
complex data or formulas are going to be used, it is recommended to perform those operations ina separate Calc spreadsheet first, then embed the spreadsheet into Impress with the results.
It is tempting to use spreadsheets in Impress for creating tables or presenting data in a tabularformat. However, inserting a table into Impress is often more suitable and quicker, depending on
the complexity of the data. See Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text for more information on
inserting and formatting tables.
The entire spreadsheet is inserted into a slide as an OLE object. If the spreadsheet contains
more than one sheet and the one required is not visible, double-click the spreadsheet and thenselect a different sheet from the sheet tab row at the bottom.

Editing spreadsheets
When a spreadsheet is inserted into a slide, it is in edit mode ready for inserting or modifying
data or modifying the format (Figure 210). The following also happens to provide tools andfunctions for spreadsheets:• A Spreadsheet Formatting toolbar opens at the top of the Workspace as shown by theexample in Figure 210. The following tools become available providing basic formatting
for spreadsheets:– Name Box — gives the active cell reference or the name of a selected range of cells.
– Function Wizard; Select Function; Formula.
236 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 210: Example of spreadsheet editing in Impress

Figure 211: Spreadsheet Formatting toolbar– Input Line — edit box for entering data or reviewing the displayed contents of theactive cell. If necessary, click on the triangle ▼ on the right to expand the edit box
and provide space for long functions requiring multiple lines.
• The Formatting toolbar for spreadsheets (Figure 211) opens replacing the Line and Filling
toolbar.
• Menu bar changes providing spreadsheet formatting options.

Cell navigation
By default, when an embedded spreadsheet is opened, the active cell is A1. To move around the
spreadsheet to select a cell to make it active, use one of the following methods:• Keyboard arrow keys.
• Position the cursor in a cell and click.
• Press the Enter key to move one cell down and Shift+Enter combination to move
one cell up.
• Press the Tab key to move one cell to the right and Shift+Tab combination to move
one cell to the left.

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 237

Note
Other keyboard shortcuts are available to navigate around a spreadsheet. Referto Getting Started Guide or the Calc Guide for more information.

Entering data
Data input into a cell can only be done when a cell is active. An active cell is easily identified by athickened and bolder border. The cell reference for the active cell is displayed in the Name Box
at the left hand end of the Calc editing toolbar.
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select a cell to make it active and start typing in the cell or in the Input Line. The data
input displayed in the Input Line makes the data entry easier to read.
3) Use the various tools and options on the Menu bar to enter data, formula, function, text,
or date into a cell.
4) To confirm data input into a cell use one of the following methods:– Select a different cell with the cursor.
– Press the Enter key, or the Shift+Enter key combination.
– Press the Tab key, or Shift+Tab key combination.
5) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit mode and save the changes.

Tip
Sometimes it is necessary to treat numbers as text, for example, telephone
numbers. To prevent Impress from removing the leading zeros, or right aligning
numbers in a cell, type a single quotation mark (') before entering a number as
text.

Merging cells
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Highlight the required number of cells to be merged.
3) If there is no data in the cells being merged, use one of the following methods to merge
cells:– Go to Format > Merge and Unmerge Cells > Merge and Center Cells on the Menu
bar.
– Go to Format > Merge and Unmerge Cells > Merge Cells on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected cells and select Merge Cells from the context menu.
4) If the selected cells for merging contain data, the Merge Cells dialog (Figure 212)
automatically opens. Merge the selected cells as follows:a) Use one of the methods in Step 3 to merge cells and open the Merge Cells dialog.
b) Select an option in the Merge Cells dialog.
c) Click OK to merge the cells and close the Merge Cells dialog.
5) When finished editing the embedded spreadsheet, click anywhere outside the border toexit edit mode and save the changes.
238 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 212: Merge Cells dialog

Figure 213: Insert Cells dialog

Unmerging cells
Only multiple cells that have been merged can be unmerged or split into separate cells.
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select a cell that was formed from merging from multiple cells.
3) Unmerge the merged cell into separate cells using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Merge and Unmerge Cells > Unmerge Cells on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the cell and select Unmerge Cells from the context menu.
4) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Inserting cells
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select the same number of cells on the embedded spreadsheet that are going to beinserted.
3) Insert cells using one of the following methods. Inserting cells opens the Insert Cells
dialog (Figure 213).
– Go to Sheet > Insert Cells on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected cells and select Insert from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl++ (macOS ⌘++).

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 239

4) Select an insert option for cells, then click OK to insert the cells and close the Insert Cells
dialog.
5) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Inserting rows
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select the same number of rows on the embedded spreadsheet that are going to beinserted.
3) Insert rows using one of the following methods:– Go to Sheet > Insert Rows > Rows Above or Sheet > Insert Rows > Rows Belowon the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the row header for the selected rows and select Insert Rows Above orInsert Rows Below from the context menu.
– Open the Insert Cells dialog and select Entire row to insert rows above the selectedrows.
4) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Inserting columns
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select the same number of columns on the embedded spreadsheet that are going to beinserted.
3) Insert columns using one of the following methods:– Go to Sheet > Insert Columns > Columns Before or Sheet > Insert Columns >Columns After on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the column header for the selected columns and select Insert
Columns Before or Insert Columns After from the context menu.
– Open the Insert Cells dialog and select Entire column to insert columns to the left ofthe selected columns.
4) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Deleting cells
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.

Figure 214: Delete Cells dialog
240 | Impress Guide 7.5

2) Select the cells on the embedded spreadsheet that are going to be deleted.
3) Delete the selected cells using one of the following methods. Deleting cells opens theDelete Cells dialog (Figure 214).
– Go to Sheet > Delete Cells on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected cells and select Delete from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+- (macOS ⌘+-).
4) Select a delete option in the Delete Cells dialog, then click OK to delete the cells andclose the dialog.
5) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Deleting rows
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select the rows for deletion on the embedded spreadsheet.
3) Delete the selected rows using one of the following methods:– Go to Sheet > Delete Rows on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in the row header for the selected rows and select Delete Rows from thecontext menu.
– Open the Delete Cells dialog and select Delete entire row(s).
4) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Deleting columns
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select the columns for deletion on the embedded spreadsheet.
3) Delete the selected columns using one of the following methods:– Go to Sheet > Delete Columns on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in the column header for the selected columns and select Delete
Columns from the context menu.
– Open the Delete Cells dialog and select Delete entire column(s).
4) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Quickly inserting sheets
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Quickly insert a sheet using one of the following methods:– Click on the plus sign to the left of the sheet names and a new sheet is added to the
spreadsheet after the last sheet in the spreadsheet.
– Go to Sheet > Insert Sheet at End on the Menu bar and enter a name for the sheet
in the Append Sheet dialog that opens, then click OK. A new sheet is added to the
spreadsheet after the last sheet in the spreadsheet.
3) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.
Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 241

Figure 215: Insert Sheet dialog

Note
If there are multiple sheets in an embedded spreadsheet, only the active sheet isshown on the slide after exiting edit mode.

Inserting sheets
For more control over inserting sheets into an embedded spreadsheet, the Insert Sheet dialog(Figure 215) is used as follows:
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Open the Insert Sheet dialog using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the sheet names and select Insert Sheet from the context menu.
– Go to Sheet > Insert Sheet on the Menu bar.
3) In Position, select one of the following options:– Before current sheet — inserts sheets before the active sheet in the spreadsheet.
– After current sheet — inserts sheets after the active sheet in the spreadsheet.
4) In Sheet, select New sheet and the No. of sheets required.
5) In the Name text box, enter a name for the new sheet. This option is not available if
inserting multiple sheets.
6) Click OK to insert the sheet and close the Insert Sheet dialog.
7) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

242 | Impress Guide 7.5

Insert sheet from file
When inserting a sheet from a file, the Insert Sheet dialog has to be used.
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Open the Insert Sheet dialog using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the sheet names and select Insert Sheet from the context menu.
– Go to Sheet > Insert Sheet on the Menu bar.
3) In Position, select one of the following options:– Before current sheet — inserts sheets before the active sheet in the spreadsheet.
– After current sheet — inserts sheets after the active sheet in the spreadsheet.
4) In Sheet, select From file and click on Browse to open an Insert browser window.
5) Navigate to the file location and select the file.
6) Click on Open and the sheet names contained in the file appear in the preview box.
7) If necessary, click on Link to create a link to the original file.
8) Select the sheet required for insertion in the preview box.
9) Click OK to insert the selected sheet into the embedded spreadsheet and close the Insert
Sheet dialog.
10) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Renaming sheets
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select the sheet for renaming to make it active.
3) Right-click on the sheet tab and select Rename Sheet from the context menu, or go to
Sheet > Rename Sheet on the Menu bar.
4) Enter a new name for the sheet in the Rename Sheet dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the name change and close the Rename Sheet dialog.
6) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Moving or copying sheets
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select the sheet for moving or copying to make it active.
3) Right-click on the sheet tab and select Move or Copy Sheet from the context menu, or
go to Sheet > Move or Copy Sheet on the Menu bar to open the Move/Copy Sheetdialog (Figure 216).
4) Move or copy a sheet to another position within the embedded spreadsheet in the same
presentation as follows:a) In Action, select Move or Copy option.
b) In Location, select a destination from the options in the To document drop-down list.
In Impress, the presentation is named as Untitled 1 (current document).
c) In Insert before, select the position within the spreadsheet from the available list.

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 243

Figure 216: Move/Copy Sheet dialogd) If necessary, enter a new name for the sheet in the New name text box.
e) Click on Move to move the sheet, or Copy to copy the sheet and close the Move/Copy
sheet dialog.
5) Move or copy a sheet to another document containing a spreadsheet is as follows:a) Make sure the spreadsheet in the target document is selected.
b) In Action, select Move or Copy option.
c) In Location, select a destination from the options in the To document drop-down list.
In Impress, the presentation is named as Untitled 1 (current document). If the
document is a Calc spreadsheet, the filename of the Calc spreadsheet is displayed.
d) In Insert before, select the position within the spreadsheet from the available list.
e) If necessary, enter a new name for the sheet in the New name text box.
f) Click on Move to move the sheet, or Copy to copy the sheet and close the Move/Copy
sheet dialog.
6) To move the sheet within the embedded spreadsheet using the cursor, click on the sheet
tab and drag the selected sheet to a new position.
7) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

244 | Impress Guide 7.5

Note
To move or copy a sheet from an embedded spreadsheet in an Impresspresentation into another document, then the target document must be a Calc
spreadsheet or a document that contains an embedded Calc spreadsheet.

Deleting sheets
1) Double-click on the embedded spreadsheet to open editing mode.
2) Select the sheet for deletion to make it active.
3) Right-click on the sheet tab and select Delete Sheet from the context menu, or go to
Sheet > Delete Sheet on the Menu bar.
4) Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the sheet.
5) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Formatting spreadsheets
For presentation purposes, it may be necessary to change the formatting of a spreadsheet tomatch the style used in the presentation.
When working on an embedded spreadsheet, any styles created in Calc are also available foruse. However, if styles are going to be used, it is recommended to create specific styles forembedded spreadsheets. Calc styles maybe unsuitable when working in Impress.

Cell data formatting1) Select a cell or a range of cells in an embedded spreadsheet using one of the following
methods:– Click in a cell to select it.
– To select the whole sheet, click on the blank cell at the top left corner between therow and column headers.
– To select the whole sheet, use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+A (macOS ⌘+A).
– To select a column, click on the column header at the top of the spreadsheet.
– To select a row, click on the row header on the left hand side of the spreadsheet.
2) Open the Format Cells dialog (Figure 217) using one of the following methods:– Right-click on a cell and select Format Cells from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Cells on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+1 (macOS ⌘+1).
3) Use the various pages in the Format Cells dialog to format the cell data so that it matches
the style of the presentation.
4) Click OK to close the Format Cells dialog and save the formatting changes.
5) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 245

Figure 217: Format Cells dialog

Row formatting1) Select a row by clicking in the row header.
2) Adjust the row height using one of the following methods:– Right-click in the row header and select Row Height from the context menu to open
the Row Height dialog, then enter the required row height in the Height text box.
– Right-click in the row header and select Row Height from the context menu to open
the Row Height dialog, then select Default value for row height.
– Right-click in the row header and select Optimal Height from the context menu to
open the Optimal Height dialog. Enter an optimal height in the Add text box, or selectDefault value. The optimal row height depends on the font size of the largest
character in a row.
– Hover the cursor over the bottom border in the row header until it changes shape,
then click and drag the border to increase or decrease the row height.
3) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Column formatting1) Select a column by clicking in the column header.
2) Adjust the column width using one of the following methods:

246 | Impress Guide 7.5

– Right-click in the column header and select Column Width from the context menu to
open the Column Width dialog, then enter the required column width in the Width textbox.
– Right-click in the column header and select Column Width from the context menu to
open the Column Width dialog, then select the Default value for column width.
– Right-click in the column header and select Optimal Width from the context menu to
open the Optimal Column Width dialog. Enter an optimal width in the Add text box, or
select Default value. The optimal column width depends on the longest entry within acolumn.
– Hover the cursor over the left or right border in the column header until it changes
shape, then click and drag the border to increase or decrease the column width.
3) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Using formatting styles
When using styles in an embedded spreadsheet and the spreadsheet is in edit mode, Impress
displays the available styles for a spreadsheet in the Cell Styles panel in the Styles deck on the
Sidebar (Figure 218). Styles used in an embedded spreadsheet are similar to LibreOfficeparagraph styles.
1) Select the data in a cell or cells in the embedded spreadsheet.
2) Click on Styles to open the Styles deck in the Sidebar, then click on Cell Styles to open
the Calc styles panel.
3) Double-click on a style to apply that style to the cell data.
4) When editing the embedded spreadsheet is complete, click anywhere outside the border
to exit edit editing mode and save the changes.

Charts
A chart is a graphical interpretation of information that is contained in a spreadsheet. The
following information only provides basic information on charts. For more information about
creating charts and the use of charts, see the Calc Guide.

Figure 218: Cell Styles panel in Styles deck on Sidebar

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 247

Inserting charts
1) Select a slide to insert a chart.
2) Use one of the following methods to insert a chart:– Go to Insert > Chart on the Menu bar and an example chart (Figure 219) is inserted
at the center of the selected slide in editing mode.
– Click on Insert Chart on the Standard toolbar and an example chart is inserted in thecenter of the slide in editing mode.
– Go to Insert > Object > OLE Object on the Menu bar to insert a chart as an OLE
object.
3) If necessary, click outside the chart area to cancel editing mode.

Note
When an embedded chart is in editing mode, the Formatting toolbar (Figure 220)
for charts and a Standard toolbar for charts (Figure 221) automatically open
replacing the Line and Filling, and Standard toolbars.

Selecting chart types
Data can be presented using a variety of different chart types. Impress contains several
examples of chart types that will help to convey information to an audience. Select a chart typeusing the Chart Type dialog, or the Chart Type panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 219: Example of chart in editing mode

Figure 220: Chart Formatting toolbar

Figure 221: Chart Standard toolbar

248 | Impress Guide 7.5

Chart types
The following summary of available chart types to help selection of a chart type suitable for thedata being used to create the chart. Column, bar, pie and area charts are available as 2D or 3D
types. For more information on charts, see the Calc Guide.
ColumnUsed to display data that shows trends over time. This chart is the default chart type used
when a chart is inserted into a slide. It is recommended to use column charts where there
is a relatively small number of data points. If the data is a large time series, it isrecommended to use a line chart.
Bar
Gives immediate visual impact for data comparison where time is not important, forexample comparing the popularity of products in a marketplace.
Pie
Gives a comparison of proportions. For example, when comparing what departments
spent on items or what departments actually spent overall. They work best with a small
range of values, for example six or less. Using larger range of values, reduces the visual
impact of a pie chart.
Area
Versions of line or column charts. Useful when emphasis of volume change is required.
Area charts have a greater visual impact than a line chart, but the type of data used does
make a difference to visual impact.
Line
Time series with progression. Ideal for raw data and useful for charts with data showing
trends or changes over time where an emphasis in continuity is required. In line charts,
the X-axis is ideal for representing time series data.
XY (Scatter)
Typically used for showing and comparing numeric values, like scientific, statistical, andengineering data. Combines X and Y values into single data points and displays them in
irregular intervals, or clusters. The X-axis usually plots the independent variable or control
parameter (often a time series).
BubbleUsed to represent three variables. Two variables identify the position of the center of abubble on a Cartesian graph, while the third variable indicates the radius of the bubble.
Net
Similar to polar or radar graphs and are useful for comparing data not in time series, butshow different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment. The poles of
the net chart are the Y-axes of other charts. Generally, between three and eight axes are
ideal; any more and this type of chart becomes confusing.
StockSpecialized column graphs specifically used for stocks and shares. choose traditionallines, candlestick, and two-column charts. The data required for these charts is
specialized with a series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. The
X-axis represents a time series.
Column and line
Combination of two other chart types. It is useful for combining two distinct, but related
data series, for example sales over time (column) and the profit margin trends (line).

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 249

Figure 222: Chart Type dialog

Chart Type dialog
1) Make sure the chart is selected and in editing mode. The chart has a border and selection
handles when in editing mode.
2) Open the Chart Type dialog (Figure 222) using one of the following methods:– Click on Chart Type on the Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format > Chart Type on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the chart and select Chart Type from the context menu.
3) Select a chart type from the left-hand preview box and the chart examples on the rightchange. The available options for chart types also change to match the selected charttype.
4) Select a chart example from the right-hand preview box.
5) Select the options required for the chart type selected.
6) Click OK to close the Chart Type dialog and return to the edit window.
7) Continue to format the chart, add data to the chart, or click outside the chart to return tonormal view.

Note
The Chart Type and Element panels in the Properties deck on the Sidebar are
only available when a chart has been selected and is in editing mode.

Sidebar Chart Type and Elements panels
1) Make sure the chart is selected and in editing mode. The chart has a border and selection
handles when in editing mode.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Chart Type to open the Chart Type panel (Figure 223).

250 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 223: Chart Type panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 224: Elements panel in Properties deck on Sidebar
4) Select a chart type from the Chart Type drop-down list.
5) Select a chart example from the preview box.
6) Select the required formatting options for the chart type from the Chart Type panel. The
available options change to match the chart type that has been selected.

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 251

Figure 225: Data Table dialog
7) Click on Elements to open the Elements panel (Figure 224).
8) Select the required formatting options for the chart type from the Elements panel.
9) When formatting the chart is complete and all the data has been added to the chart, clickoutside the chart to return to deselect editing and return to normal view.

Formatting charts
Entering chart data
1) Make sure the chart is selected and in editing mode. The chart has a border and selection
handles when in editing mode.
2) Open the Data Table dialog (Figure 225) using one of the following methods:– Click on Data Table on the Formatting toolbar for charts.
– Go to View > Data Table on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the chart and select Data Table from the context menu.
3) Type or paste information into the cells to enter data into the Data Table dialog.
4) Use the tools in the top of the Data Table dialog to insert, delete or reposition rows orcolumns.
5) Click on Close to save the changes and close the Data Table dialog.
6) When formatting the chart is complete and all the data has been added to the chart, clickoutside the chart to return to deselect editing and return to normal view.

Note
To insert, delete or reposition a column, use the tools Insert Series, Delete
Series, Move Series Left, and Move Series Right in the Data Table dialog.

Adding or removing chart elements
1) Make sure the chart is selected and in editing mode. The chart has a border and selection
handles when in editing mode.
2) Add an element to the chart using one of the following methods:– Go to Insert on the Menu bar and select an element from the submenu.
– Right-click directly on the chart and select an element from the context menu.

252 | Impress Guide 7.5

– Right-click directly on the chart wall and select an element from the context menu.
– Open the Elements panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar and select anelement from the options available.

Note
The method selected to add an element changes the type of element that can be
added to the chart. Also, when adding some elements to the chart, a dialog may
open with more options to select for the element being added.
3) Remove an element from a chart using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the chart element and select the delete option from the context menu.
Type of element selected changes the delete options in the context menu.
– Select a chart element and press the Delete or Backspace key to remove theelement from the chart.
– Open the Elements panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar and deselect theelement.
4) When formatting the chart is complete and all the data has been added to the chart, clickoutside the chart to return to deselect editing and return to normal view.

Chart and chart elements formatting
For more information on formatting a chart, chart elements, and the formatting options available,
see the Calc Guide.
1) Make sure the chart is selected and in editing mode. The chart has a border and selection
handles when in editing mode.
2) Format an element on the chart using one of the following methods:– Go to Format on the Menu bar and select an element for formatting.
– Right-click on an element and select Format XXXX from the context menu. The
format options available depend on which chart element has been selected. For
example, select the chart wall and the format option is called Format Chart Wall.
– Use the various tools on the Formatting toolbar for charts to format a chart element.
3) Select an element and open a formatting dialog specific for the element selected.
4) Use the various options in the formatting dialog to format the element.
5) When formatting the chart is complete and all the data has been added to the chart, clickoutside the chart to return to deselect editing and return to normal view.

Resizing and moving charts
A chart and its chart elements can be resized and moved just like other objects on a slide. For
more information on resizing and moving a chart, see Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects andthe Calc Guide.

Audio and video
Inserting audio or video
1) Go to Insert > Audio or Video on the Menu bar and a file browser for Insert Audio orVideo opens (Figure 226).

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 253

Figure 226: Insert Audio or Video dialog

Figure 227: Media Playback toolbar

Figure 228: Media Playback panel in Properties deck on Sidebar2) Navigate to the folder where the audio or video file is located. Only audio and video files
that are compatible with Impress are available in the file browser.
3) Select a compatible audio or video file and click Open to embed the file in the center ofthe slide. The Media Playback toolbar (Figure 227) and the Media Playback panel in theProperties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 228) automatically open.

254 | Impress Guide 7.5

4) Reposition and/or resize the audio or video file. See Chapter 5, Managing Graphic
Objects for more information.

Media playback
The Media Playback toolbar automatically opens when an audio or video file is selected. The
Media Playback toolbar contains the following tools from left to right:
Insert Audio or Video
Opens the Insert Audio or Video file browser where a media file is selected for insertion
into a slide.
Play
Plays the media playback.
Pause
Pauses the playing of the media.
Stop
Stops the playing of media.
RepeatWhen selected, repeats the playing of the media until the tool is deselected.
Position
Selects the position of where to start playing from within the media file.
Mute
Suppresses the volume of a media file.
VolumeAdjusts the volume of the media file.
Media Path
Indicates where the media file is stored on a computer.

FormulasFormulas can be inserted onto a slide as an OLE object. For more information on how to create
and edit formulas, see the Math Guide or the Getting Started Guide.
Go to Insert > Object > Formula Object on the Menu bar to create a formula in a slide and thefollowing happens:• The Menu bar changes to provide tools for editing and formatting a formula.
• The Tools toolbar (Figure 229) opens providing tools to help create and edit a formula.
• The Elements panel in the Sidebar (Figure 230) opens allowing selection of element
categories from the drop-down list and formula elements from the available options.
When creating formulas, care should be taken with font sizes to make sure formulas are similarin size to the font used in the presentation. To change font attributes of a formula, go to Format >Font Size on the Menu bar. To change font type, go to Format > Fonts on the Menu bar.

Note
Unlike formulas in Writer, a formula in Impress is treated as an object and is not
automatically aligned with the rest of the objects on the slide. The formula can be
moved around like other objects in Impress, but cannot be resized.

Chapter 7, OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects | 255

Figure 229: Tools toolbar

Figure 230: Elements panel in Sidebar

Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects
Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects that are compatible with Impress can beinserted into an Impress presentation.
• Go to Insert > File on the Menu bar to open a file selection dialog. Only files compatible
with Impress are available for selection.
• Drawings, text files, HTML files and other objects can also be inserted as OLE objects.

256 | Impress Guide 7.5

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 8,
Adding and Formatting
Slides, Notes, Comments,and Handouts

Working with slides
Inserting new slides
A new slide is inserted into a presentation after the selected slide that is displayed in theWorkspace. If slide masters have been used in the presentation, the inserted slide uses themaster slide of the selected slide displayed in the Workspace.
1) Open an existing presentation, or create a new presentation.
2) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
3) Select the slide in the presentation where a new slide is going to be inserted after theselected slide, then use one of the following methods to insert a new slide:– Go to Slide > New Slide on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected slide in the Slides pane and select New Slide from thecontext menu.
– Right-click on the selected slide in the Slide Sorter view and select New Slide fromthe context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+M (macOS ˄+M).
4) To insert a new slide at the end of a presentation make sure there are no slides selectedin the Slides pane, then use one of the following methods:– Go to Slide > New Slide on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in an empty area in the Slides pane and select New Slide from the context
menu.

Inserting slides from a file1) Open an existing presentation, or create a new presentation.
2) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
3) Select the slide in the presentation where a new slide is going to be inserted after theselected slide. Alternatively, to insert a slide at the end of the presentation, make surethere are no slides selected in the Slides pane.
4) Go to Slide > Insert Slide from File on the Menu bar to open the Insert File dialog(Figure 231).
5) Navigate to the presentation file where the slide is located and select the file, then click on
Open to open the Insert Slides/Objects dialog (Figure 232).
6) Click on the triangle
the list of slides.

▶ next to the filename in the Insert Slides/Objects dialog to expand7) Select the slides required for insertion into the presentation.
8) If required, select Link to embed the slide as an OLE object.
9) If required, select Delete unused backgrounds to remove any unreferenced backgroundslides and presentation layouts from the presentation.
10) Click OK to insert the slide into the presentation and close the dialog.

258 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 231: Insert File dialog

Figure 232: Insert Slides/Objects dialog

Note
When inserting a slide from a file, a slide can be optionally linked instead of
copying. This embeds the slide into a presentation using OLE. See Chapter 7,
OLE, Spreadsheets, Charts, and Other Objects for more information about
embedding OLE objects.

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 259

Tip
Figure 232 shows the importance of giving descriptive names to slides in apresentation to help with identification. Refer to “Renaming slides” on page 261
for more information.

Copying and pasting between presentations
1) Open the source presentation that contains the required slide(s) for copying.
2) Make sure that the Slide Sorter view is open in the Workspace to easily locate theslide(s) for copying.
3) Select the required slide(s) and copy using one of the following methods:– Go to Edit > Copy on the Menu bar.
– Right-click and select Copy from the context menu.
– Click on Copy in the Standard toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+C (macOS ⌘+C).
4) Open the target presentation where the copied slide(s) is going to be pasted.
5) Make sure that Slide Sorter view is open in the Workspace.
6) Select the slide at the point where the copied slide(s) is going to be pasted. Alternatively,
to paste a slide at the end of the presentation, make sure that there are no slides
selected.
7) Paste the copied slide(s) into the target presentation using one of the following methods:– Go to Edit > Paste on the Menu bar.
– Right-click and select Paste from the context menu.
– Click on Paste in the Standard toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+V (macOS ⌘+V).

Dragging and dropping between presentations
1) Open both presentations where slides are going to be moved or copied between.
2) Make sure that both presentations are open in Slide Sorter view in the Workspace.
3) In the target presentation, select the slide at the point where the copied slides are going
to be inserted. Alternatively, to insert slides at the end of the target presentation, makesure that there are no slides selected.
4) In the source presentation, select the required slides that are being moved or copied.
5) To move the slides, click on the selected slides then drag and drop the selected slides
into the target presentation.
6) To copy the slides, click on the selected slides and hold down the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘)while dragging and dropping the slides into the target presentation.

Duplicating slides
Duplicating a slide is an easy method of adding slides to a presentation if the new slides are toinherit formatting, layout, and animations from a selected slide.
1) Open Normal or Slide Sorter view in the Workspace.
260 | Impress Guide 7.5

2) Select the slides for duplication in the Slide Sorter view or the Slides pane.
3) Go to Slide > Duplicate Slide on the Menu bar, or right click on the selected slides andselect Duplicate Slide from the context menu. The duplicated slides are inserted into thepresentation after the selected slides.

Tip
Duplicating a slide is a good way of preventing slides from being shown with toomuch information, which can make it difficult for an audience to understand. If aslide becomes crowded with information, try duplicating the slide and splitting theinformation points over two or more slides. All the formatting, backgrounds, andso on are preserved in each duplicated slide.

Renaming slides1) Open Normal or Slide Sorter view in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide and open the Rename Slide dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Slide > Rename Slide on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected slide in the Slides pane and select Rename Slide from thecontext menu.
– Right-click on the selected slide in the Slide Sorter view and select Rename Slidefrom the context menu.
3) In the Rename Slide dialog, type a new name for the slide in the Name text box.
4) Click OK to save the change and close the Rename Slide dialog.

Expanding slides
Occasionally there may be a slide with too many points to fit in the space available. Instead of
reducing the font size or using other methods to squeeze more text onto the slide, it is better tosubdivide the contents of the slide into two or more slides.

Figure 233: Example of expanding slides
Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 261

Figure 234: Example summary slide
1) Select the slide for expansion in the Slides pane.
2) Go to Slide > Expand Slide on the Menu bar to create new slides from the first outline
level on the original slide. The first outline level becomes the title of each new slide.
Outline levels below each first level on the original slide are moved up one outline level in
the new slides. An example of expanded slides is shown in Figure 233.
3) If necessary, rearrange the new slides in the presentation order.

Creating summary slides
Summary slides are normally used when creating an agenda for a presentation.
1) Select the slide that will be the first slide to appear in the summary.
2) Go to Slide > Summary Slide on the Menu bar to create a summary slide at the end of
the presentation. Bullet points are created using the titles of the slides in the presentation.
An example summary slide is shown in Figure 234.
3) If necessary, move the summary slide to a position where it is to appear in thepresentation.

Note
When expanding a slide, or creating a summary slide, the selected slide MUST
contain an outline.

Deleting slides
Select a slide or slides in the Slides pane, Normal view, or Slide Sorter view in the Workspace,then use one of the following methods to delete slides:• Go to Slide > Delete Slide on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on selected slides and select Delete Slide from the context menu.
• Press the Delete or Backspace key.

Creating slides from an outline
When planning a presentation it may be useful to develop an outline from a LibreOffice Writer
file. Once the outline is created, one or more separate slides can be created for each of the top
level outline elements.

Using a Writer document
1) Open the file in Writer that is going to be used as a base to create a presentation outline.
262 | Impress Guide 7.5

2) Go to File > Send > Outline to Presentation on the Writer Menu bar. A new presentationis created and opens in Impress Outline view. The heading paragraph styles areconverted into the Impress outline styles. An example outline from a Writer document isshown in Figure 235.
3) If necessary, duplicate, or expand slides and manually change slide contents to create apresentation. For more information, see “Duplicating slides” on page 260 and “Expanding
slides” on page 261.

Note
To create a presentation from a Writer document, the Writer document must
contain headings formatted using heading paragraph styles.

Figure 235: Example of outline created from Writer document

Figure 236: Create AutoAbstract dialog

Figure 237: Outline toolbar

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 263

Using AutoAbstract
1) Open the file in Writer that is going to be used as a base to create a presentation outline.
2) Go to File > Send > AutoAbstract to Presentation on the Writer Menu bar to open theCreate AutoAbstract dialog (Figure 236).
3)

Select the number of outline levels for the presentation in the Included outline levels box.
For example, if three levels are selected, all headings formatted with Heading 1 to 3
styles are included as Outline levels 1 to 3. An example outline from a Writer document isshown in Figure 235.

4) Select the number of paragraphs for each outline level for in the presentation in the
Paragraphs per level box. For example, if three paragraphs are selected, each outline
level will contain three paragraphs.
5) Click OK to close the Create AutoAbstract dialog and an outline is created in a new
Impress presentation.
6) Some outline levels may have too many points to fit on one slide. If necessary, duplicate
or expand slides and manually change slide contents to create a simpler presentation.
For more information, see “Duplicating slides” on page 260 and “Expanding slides” onpage 261.
7) When the presentation is created, some hierarchical structure of the outline may be lost. If
necessary, use Promote or Demote tools on the Outline toolbar (Figure 237) to move theoutline points to the correct level.

Note
To create a presentation using AutoAbstract and send content from Writer to
Impress, the text must contain headings formatted with the heading paragraphstyles.

Copying and pasting an outline
1) Open the file in Writer containing an outline that is going to be used as a base to create apresentation outline.
2) Highlight the outline and select Edit > Copy on the Menu bar, or right click on theselected outline and select Copy from the context menu.
3) Create a new presentation in Impress, or create a new slide in an existing presentation.
4) Select the required layout for the slides. For more information, see Chapter 1, Introducing
Impress.
5) Paste the copied outline into the text area of the slide. Do not worry if the text does not fit
the space on the slide.
6) If the slide contains too much text, duplicate or expand slides and manually change slide
contents to create a simpler presentation that an audience can better understand. For
more information, see “Duplicating slides” on page 260 and “Expanding slides” onpage 261.
7) When the presentation is created, some hierarchical structure of the outline may be lost. If
necessary, use Promote or Demote tools on the Outline toolbar (Figure 237) to move theoutline points to the correct level.

264 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 238: Slide Properties dialog — Slide page

Formatting slides
Use master slides in a presentation to create a professional look and avoid manually modifying
the formatting of each individual slide. Multiple master slides can be used in a single presentation
to provide the same look to groups of slides or individual slides. See Chapter 2, Master Slides,
Styles, and Templates for more information about using master slides.

Slide setup
Slide Setup dialog
1) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Open the Slide Properties dialog (Figure 238) using one of the following methods:– Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in an empty area on the slide and select Slide Properties from the context
menu.
3) Use the various options available in the Slide, Background, and Transparency pages in
the Slide Setup dialog to setup the slide. See Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles andTemplates for more information on the various options available in the Slide Properties
dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Slide Setup dialog.

Sidebar Slide panel
Any options selected in the Slide panel (Figure 239) in the Properties deck on the Sidebar are
applied immediately to the slide.
1) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Click on Properties in the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on Slide to open the Slide panel in the Properties deck.
4) Select the slide size to use from the predefined sizes in the Format drop-down list.

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 265

Figure 239: Slide panel in Properties deck on Sidebar5) Select the slide orientation to use from the Orientation drop-down list.
6) Select the slide background to use from the Background drop-down list. The backgroundtype selected changes the options available. For more information on slide backgrounds,
see Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates.
7) If necessary, select the master slide to use from the Master Slide drop-down list.
8) If necessary, select to use or deselect not to use Master Background or Master Objects
on the slide. Only available if a master slide has been used for the slide.
9) If necessary, click on Master View to check on how the master slide selected looks and if
it matches the presentation requirements.

Selecting master slides
A master slide can be applied to all the slides in a presentation, or only to selected slides to allow
the use of more than one master slide in a presentation. For more information on master slides,
see Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles and Templates.
1) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) In the Sidebar, click on Master Slides to open the Master Slides deck (Figure 240) anddisplay the master slides available for use.
3) Select a master slide from the options available in the panels for Used in This
Presentation, Recently Used, or Available for Use.
4) Apply the selected master slide to slides using one of the following methods:– For all slides in the presentation, right-click on the selected master slide and selectApply to All Slides from the context menu.
– For selected slides only, right-click on the selected master slide and select Apply to
Selected Slides from the context menu.

266 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 240: Master Slides deck on Sidebar

Figure 241: Available Master Slides dialog

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 267

Figure 242: Load Master Slide dialog

Changing master slides
1) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide in the Slides panel so that it appears in the Workspace.
3) Right-click in a blank area on the slide in the Workspace and select Change Slide
Master from the context menu to open the Available Master Slides dialog (Figure 241).
4) Navigate the master slides displayed in the Select a Slide Design preview box to locate
the required master slide. If the required master slide is not displayed, then click on Loadto open the Load Master Slide dialog (Figure 242).
a) Select the category of master slide required from the Categories list.
b) Select the template required from the Templates list and a preview of the templateappears in the Preview box.
c) Click OK to close the Load Master Slide dialog and the master slide templates appear
in the Select a Slide Design preview box in the Available Master Slides dialog.
5) Select the required master slide from the master slides displayed and click OK. The slidechanges to show the new master slide and the Available Master Slides dialog closes.

Changing slide background
1) Make sure Normal view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide in the presentation.

268 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 243: Slide Properties dialog — Background page3) Open the Slide Properties dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in an empty area on the slide and select Slide Properties from the context
menu.
4) Click on Background to open the Background page (Figure 243) and select the type ofbackground required. For more information on background types, see Chapter 2, Master
Slides, Styles, and Templates, and Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects.
5) Select from the various options offered by the different background types the backgroundeffect for the selected slide.
6) Click OK to save the changes to the background and close the Slide Properties dialog.

Note
Only the background for one slide in a presentation can be changed at a time. Tochange the background on more than one slide at a time, master slides have to
be used. For more information on slide backgrounds, see Chapter 2, Master
Slides, Styles and Templates.

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 269

Figure 244: Layouts panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Choosing slide layout
After creating a new slide, a layout is then selected to suit the slide contents and the presentation
requirements. Impress comes with predefined layouts that can be applied as a starting point for aslide and Figure 244 shows the predefined layouts that are available. If the layouts available in
Impress do not fit the presentation requirements, layout elements can be rearranged, duplicated,resized, or deleted as necessary.
1) Make sure Normal or Slide Sorter view is selected in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide in the presentation.
3) Change the slide layout using one of the following methods:– Select a layout in the Layouts panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
– Go to Slide > Layout on the Menu bar and select a layout from the options in thesubmenu.
– Right-click on the slide in the Slides pane and select Layout from the context menu,
then select a layout from the options in the submenu.
– Right-click on the slide in Slide Sorter view in the Workspace and select Layout fromthe context menu, then select a layout from the options in the context menu.
– Right-click in an empty area on the slide in Normal view in the Workspace and selectLayout from the context menu, then select a layout from the options in the submenu.
4) When the slide layout has changed, make the necessary formatting, resizing, andrepositioning adjustments to the elements on the slide. For more information on
adjustments of slide elements, refer to the other chapters in this guide.
270 | Impress Guide 7.5

NotesIf the layout is changed on a slide that already contains text and objects, Impress
does not delete these elements, but repositions the elements according to theselected layout. This may result in some elements overlapping or being out of
position.
Custom defined layouts cannot be created and saved in Impress for use on
several slides. It is recommended to create a master slide or template that uses acustom layout and can be used on several slides. For more information on masterslides and templates, see Chapter 2, Master Slides, Styles, and Templates.
Hovering the cursor over a layout in the Layouts panel in the Properties deck on
the Sidebar displays the layout type. These layout types match the layout list thatis displayed in a context menu or submenu.

Presentation notes
Notes provide a convenient way to create reminders or add extra information to slides in apresentation. Notes are not displayed on the main presentation display during a presentation.
When using dual displays, notes can be displayed on the second display as a presentation cue.

Notes
When using a second display, it is recommended to use the Presenter Console.
The Presenter Console allows the display on a second screen of presentation
notes, the next slide, and other useful information while a slide is shown on thedisplay that the audience sees. For more information on the Presenter Console,
see Chapter 1, Introducing Impress and Chapter 9, Slide Shows & Photo Albums.
The notes text box and slide image can be moved and resized on the Notes
page. Also, more text boxes can be added to the Notes page. Refer to the otherchapters in this guide for more information.

Figure 245: Notes view in Workspace

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 271

Adding notes
1) Select a slide to add notes to and open the Notes view (Figure 245) using one of thefollowing methods:– Click on Notes at the top of the Workspace.
– Go to View > Notes on the Menu bar.
2) Click on Click to add notes below the slide then type or paste text or graphics asrequired into the notes box.
3) To add notes to another slide, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
4) When adding notes is complete, return to Normal view in the Workspace.

Adding text
When text is inserted in the Notes text box, it is automatically formatted using the predefined
Notes style that is in Presentation Styles in the Styles deck on the Sidebar. The Notes stylecannot be deleted, but can be modified to match the presentation requirements.
Text boxes can also be added to the notes page and then modified to suit the presentation
requirements. Also, text styles for any text in a text box can be created to suit the text
requirements. Any text styles created are placed in the Custom category. These custom styles
can be deleted when there is no further requirement for the custom style.
For more information on creating styles, adding text, and formatting text, see Chapter 2, Slide
Masters, Styles and Templates, or Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
1) Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.

Figure 246: Notes dialog — Font page272 | Impress Guide 7.5

2) Click on Presentation Styles at the top of the Styles deck to open Presentation Styles.
3) Right click on Notes and select Modify from the context menu. This opens the Notes
dialog (Figure 246).
4) Use the various pages and options in the Notes dialog to modify the Notes presentationstyle to the presentation requirements.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Notes dialog.

Formatting notes
Slide notes
1) Select a slide to add notes to and open the Notes view using one of the following
methods:– Click on Notes at the top of the Workspace.
– Go to View > Notes on the Menu bar.
2) Click on Click to add notes below the slide then type or paste text or graphics asrequired into the notes box.
3) Format the text to the presentation requirements. For more information on creating styles,
adding text, and formatting text, see “Adding text” on page 272, Chapter 2, Slide Masters,
Styles and Templates, or Chapter 3, Adding and Formatting Text.
4) Format any objects or images that have been placed on the slide notes. For more
information on formatting objects, see the other chapters in this user guide.
5) When formatting is complete, go to View > Normal on the Menu bar and close the Notes
view.

Master notes
The slide layout for a presentation is carried out using Master Notes. For more information on
formatting master slides, see Chapter 2, Slide Masters, Styles and Templates.
1) Select a slide that has notes added.
2) Open Master Notes view (Figure 247), go to View > Master Notes on the Menu bar.
3) Open the Slide Properties dialog for master notes (Figure 248) using one of the following
methods:– Go to Slide > Slide Properties on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in an empty area on the master note and select Slide Properties from thecontext menu.
4) Use the options available in the Slide Properties dialog to format the presentation slide
layout.
5) When formatting is complete, go to View > Normal on the Menu bar and close Master
Notes view.

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 273

Figure 247: Master Notes view

Figure 248: Slide Properties dialog — Slide page for Master Notes

274 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 249: Header and Footer dialog — Notes and Handouts page

Headers and Footers
Headers and footers for slide notes page are created and formatted using master slides. The
header and footer areas are as follows:
Header text
Date and time – fixed or variable
Footer text
Page number.
1) Select a slide that has notes added.
2) Go to View > Master Notes on the Menu bar to open Master Notes view.
3) Go to Insert > Header and Footer on the Menu bar to open the Header and Footer
dialog (Figure 249).
4) Click on Notes and Handouts to open the Notes and Handouts page.
5) To add header text to the notes page, select Header and enter the text for the header inthe Header text text box.
6) To add the date and time to the notes page, select Date and time and enter a fixed orvariable date and time as follows:– If the date and time is fixed, select Fixed and enter the date and time required in the
Fixed text box.
– If the date and time is variable, select Variable, then select the date and time format
from the Format drop-down list and select the language used from the Language
drop-down list. The language selected affects the available date and time formats.
7) To add footer text to the notes page, select Footer and enter the text for the footer in theFooter text text box.
Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 275

8) To add page numbers to the notes page, select Page Number so that the page number
appears on each notes page in a presentation.
9) Click on Apply to All to save the changes and close the Header and Footer dialog.

Printing notes
For more information on printing slides and notes, see Chapter 10, Printing, E-mailing, Exporting,and Saving Slide Shows.

Linux or Windows
1) Select a slide that has notes added and open the Notes view. See “Adding notes” onpage 272.
2) Go to File > Print on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P to open the
Print dialog (Figure 250).
3) Select LibreOffice Impress to open the LibreOffice Impress page and access theoptions for printing notes.
4) In Document, select Notes from the Type drop-down list.
5) In Contents, Color, and Size, select any additional options that are required, for example
Slide name, Original colors, Fit to printable page.
6) Click OK to print and close the Print dialog.

macOS1) Select a slide that has notes added and open the Notes view. See “Adding notes” onpage 272.

Figure 250: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — Linux or Windows

276 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 251: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — macOS
2) Go to File > Print on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut ⌘+P to open the Print
dialog (Figure 251).
3) Make sure that LibreOffice is selected from the drop-down list.
4) In LibreOffice Impress, select Notes from the Document drop-down list.
5) In Contents, Color, and Size, select any additional options that are required, for example
Slide name, Original colors, Original size.
6) Click on More and make sure that Original size and All slides are selected.
7) Click OK to print and close the Print dialog.

Exporting notes as PDF
The PDF contains separate pages for the slides and the notes. For example, if the presentationhas 10 slides, the PDF contains 20 pages consisting of 10 pages of individual slides followed by
10 pages of notes formatted for the paper size selected.
1) Select a slide that has notes added and open the Notes view. See “Adding notes” onpage 272.

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 277

Figure 252: PDF Options dialog — General page2) Go to File > Export As > Export as PDF on the Menu bar to open the PDF Options
dialog (Figure 252).
3) Click on General to open the General page.
4) In Structure, select the option Export notes pages.
5) If necessary, select Export only notes pages to create a PDF file that only contains thepresentation notes.
6) If required, open the other pages in the PDF Options dialog and select the necessary
options to create a PDF file.
7) Click on Export to open a file browser window and navigate to the folder where the PDF
file is to be saved.
8) Enter a filename, then click on Save to save the file in the designated folder and close thefile browser window and PDF Options dialog.

Inserting comments
1) Select Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice> Preferences >LibreOffice > User Data) to configure the name and initials that appear in a comment.
This is necessary so that user initials appear in comments and identify the comment
author.

278 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 253: Example of inserting new comment2) In Normal view, go to Insert > Comment on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut
Ctrl+Alt+C (macOS ⌥+⌘+C) to insert a comment (Figure 253).
– A small comment marker containing the user initials creating the comment appears in
the upper left-hand corner of the slide along with a larger comment box. Impress
automatically adds the user name and current date at the bottom of the commentbox.
– If more than one user edits the document, each user is automatically allocated adifferent background color.
3) Type or paste the text into the comment box.
4) If necessary, move the small comment marker anywhere to a different position on theslide. This is normally on or near an object being referred to in the comment.
5) To show or hide the comment markers, go to View > Comments on the Menu bar.

Printing handouts
Handouts are used to distribute a copy of the presentation slides to each member of an audienceand are printed using the printing options available in Impress. Figure 254 shows an example ofhandouts ready for printing.

Note
The printing of handouts depends on the printer, computer operating system, andcomputer setup. The following printing procedure for handouts is only an exampleof how to print handouts.

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 279

Figure 254: Example Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — Handouts page
1) If required, create headers and footers for the handouts as follows:a) Go to Insert > Header and Footer on the Menu bar to open the Header and Footer
dialog.
b) Click on Notes and Handouts to open the Notes and Handouts page.
c) Select the required header and footer options from the default options. See “Headersand Footers” on page 275 for more information.
d) Click on Apply to All to save the options for the handouts and close the Header andFooter dialog.
2) Go to File > Print on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P (macOS ⌘+P)
to open the Print dialog.
3) For Linux or Windows, click on LibreOffice Impress to open the page for handout
printing and select the printing options from the Document drop–down lists as follows:– Type: — select Handouts from the drop down list.
– Slides per page: — select how many slides are printed on a sheet of paper.
– Order: — select the order in which the slides are printed on a sheet of paper.
4) For macOS, make sure LibreOffice is selected and select the printing options from the
LibreOffice Impress drop–down lists as follows:– Document: — select Handouts from the drop down list.
– Slides per page: — select how many slides are printed on a sheet of paper.
– Order: — select the order in which the slides are printed on a sheet of paper.
280 | Impress Guide 7.5

5) In Contents, select Slide name, Date and time, or Hidden pages if one or all of these
options are to be printed on the handouts.
6) In Color, select one option on how the handouts are printed.
7) In Size, select one option on how the handouts are printed.
8) Click on Print to print the handouts and close the Print dialog.

Chapter 8, Adding and Formatting Slides, Notes, Comments, and Handouts | 281

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 9,
Slide Shows and PhotoAlbumsIntroduction
LibreOffice Impress provides the tools to organize and display a slide show, including:• Which slides to show and in what sequence.
• Whether to run the show automatically or manually.
• Transitions between slides.
• Animations on individual slides.
• Interactions: what happens when clicking on a button or link.
• A presenter console.

Creating slide shows
Basic settings
Most tasks associated with putting together a slide show are best done in Slide Sorter view
where all slides in the presentation appear in the Workspace.
1) Open the Slide Sorter view (Figure 255) using one of the following methods:– Go to View > Slide Sorter on the Menu bar.
– Click on the Slide Sorter tab at the top of the Workspace.
2) Go to Slide Show > Slide Show Settings on the Menu bar to open the Slide Show
Settings dialog (Figure 256).
3) Select the options required for the slide show.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Slide Show Settings dialog.

Slide Show options
Range
Select which slides to include in the slide show.
All slides
Includes all slides except for those slides marked Hidden (see “Hiding slides” onpage 286). Slides are shown in the sequence they occur in the file. To change thesequence, either rearrange the slides in Slide Sorter view or select the custom slide
show option.

Figure 255: Slide Sorter view in Workspace284 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 256: Slide Show Settings dialog
From
Starts the show at the slide selected from the drop-down list. For example, there
maybe several slides at the beginning that describe the company, but when presenting
this slide show to work colleagues, this introduction could be skipped.
Custom slide show
Shows the slides in a different sequence from the sequence previously setup. Thissetting is not available until a custom slide show has been setup (see “Custom slide
show” on page 287). Many different custom shows can be setup as required from one
set of slides and they appear in the drop-down list for this option.
Presentation Mode
Select which slides to include in a slide show.
Full screen
Shows the slides full screen without the LibreOffice program controls visible and exits
the show after the last slide.
In a window
Runs the slide show in the Impress window and exits the show after the last slide.
Loop and repeat after
Restarts the slide show after the last slide has displayed and after the specified timedelay. Setting of this option allows the slide show to automatically run continuously. A
pause slide is displayed between the last slide and the start slide. Press the Esc key at
any time to stop the show. If zero is entered as time delay, the show restarts
immediately without showing a pause slide.
Show logo
Shows the LibreOffice logo on the pause slide when Loop and repeat after option is
selected.

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 285

Note
Before selecting the option Loop and repeat after, make sure that the option Afteris selected and that an interval time setting has been entered. The option After isin Advance slide options located in the Slide Transitions deck on the Sidebar(Figure 261 on page 290). If there is no interval time setting for After, then theoption Loop and repeat after will not function.
Options
Determine how the slide show runs as a presentation.
Change slides manually
Prevents slides from changing automatically even if an automatic transition has been
set up.
Mouse pointer visible
Shows the mouse pointer during a slide show. If a laser pointer or other device is being
used to highlight items of interest during the show, this can be useful.
Mouse pointer as pen
Enables writing or drawing on slides during the presentation. Anything written with thepen is not saved when exiting the slide show. The color of the pen cannot be changed.
Animations allowed
Displays all frames of animated GIF files during the slide show. If this option is notselected, only the first frame of an animated GIF file is displayed. This has nothing to
do with the slide animations described in “Animations” on page 12.
Change slides by clicking on background
Advances to the next slide when the slide background is clicked. Also, pressing thespacebar advances to the next slide.
Presentation always on top
Prevents any other program window from appearing on top of the presentation.
Multiple Displays
Determines how the slide show is displayed.
Presentation display
Select from the drop-down list which display to use for full screen slide show mode.
Only available if the computer being used for the slide show is connected to more than
one display monitor.

Note
The multiple displays setting is not an option saved with the presentation file, but
is instead saved as a local setting in the user configuration for the computer. Thismeans that if the presentation is opened on a different computer, the local
settings for that computer are applied.

Hiding slides
Some slides may not be required in a particular slide show. Either hide some of the slides or set
up a custom slide show to suit the requirements. For example, there maybe draft slides that are
not shown until they are finished, or there maybe some slides that contain information that is not
to be shown to an audience.

286 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 257: Example of hiding Slides 2 and 4

Figure 258: Slide View toolbar

Hiding slides
1) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view in the Workspace, select the slides that are to be
hidden.
2) Hide selected slides using one of the following methods. Hidden slides are displayed
greyed out indicating that it is hidden as shown in Figure 257. The slide is not deleted andremains in the presentation file.
– Click on Hide Slide in the Slide View toolbar (Figure 258).
– Right-click on the selected slide and select Hide Slide from the context menu.
– Go to Slide > Hide Slide on the Menu bar.

Showing hidden slides
1) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view, select the hidden slides.
2) Show the selected slides using one of the following methods. Show Slide is only active
when there hidden slides are selected in a presentation.
– Click on Show Slide in the Slide View toolbar.
– Right-click on the selected slide and select Show Slide from the context menu.
– Go to Slide > Show Slide on the Menu bar.

Custom slide show
To show the slides in a different order, rearrange the slides in the Slides pane or Slide Sorterview in the Workspace, or create a custom slide show.

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 287

Figure 259: Custom Slide Shows dialog

Figure 260: Define Custom Slide Show dialog

Creating custom slide show
1) Select which slides are to be included in the custom slide show and select the order inwhich the slides are to be shown.
2) Go to Slide Show > Custom Slide Show on the Menu bar to open the Custom Slide
Shows dialog (Figure 259).
3) Click on New to open the Define Custom Slide Show dialog (Figure 260).
4) Type a name for the new custom slide show in the Name text box.
5) In the Existing slides box, select the slides using one of the following methods:– Click on an individual slide to select it.
– Hold down the Shift key and click the first and last slide to create a consecutive
group of slides.
– Hold down the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘) and click on individual slides to create a groupof slides.
6) Click on >> to include the slides in the Selected slides box.
7) If required, rearrange the slide order in the Selected slides box by clicking on a slidename and dragging it to a new position in the list.
8) Click OK to close the Define Custom Slide Shows dialog.
9) Click on Start in the Custom Slide Shows dialog to test the custom slide show as apresentation.
288 | Impress Guide 7.510) Click OK to save the custom slide show and close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.

Using custom slide show
1) Go to Slide Show > Custom Slide Show on the Menu bar to open the Custom Slide
Shows dialog.
2) Select the required custom slide show and click on Start to run the selected custom slideshow.
3) When the presentation is over, click OK to close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.

Editing custom slide show
1) Go to Slide Show > Custom Slide Show on the Menu bar to open the Custom Slide
Shows dialog.
2) Select the name of the custom slide show for editing.
3) Click on Edit and the Define Custom Slide Show dialog opens.
4) Add slides, remove slides, change the slide order, or change the name of the custom
slide show in the Define Custom Slide Show dialog.
5) Click OK to save the custom slide show and close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.
6) Click on Start in the Custom Slide Shows dialog to test the edited custom slide show as apresentation.
7) Click OK to close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.

Copying custom slide show
1) Go to Slide Show > Custom Slide Show on the Menu bar to open the Custom Slide
Shows dialog.
2) Select the name of the custom slide show for copying and click on Copy. The name ofthe selected custom slide show is repeated with (Copy 1) added to the name.
3) Select the name of the copied custom slide show and click on Edit and the Define
Custom Slide Show dialog opens.
4) Change the name of the copied custom slide show in the Define Custom Slide Showdialog.
5) Click OK to save the copied custom slide show and close the Define Custom Showdialog.
6) Click OK to close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.

Deleting custom slide show
1) Go to Slide Show > Custom Slide Show on the Menu bar to open the Custom Slide
Shows dialog.
2) Select the name of the custom slide show for deletion and click on Delete. Deletion isimmediate and no confirmation message appears.
3) Click OK to close the Custom Slide Shows dialog.

Slide transitions
Slide transitions are effects and/or sounds that take place between slides when slides arechanged in a slide show. Transitions add a professional look to a slide show, smoothing thechange over between slides.

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 289

Figure 261: Slide Transition deck in Sidebar

Adding transitions
1) Click on Slide Transition in the Sidebar to open the Slide Transition deck (Figure 261).
2) Open a presentation file to add slide transitions.
3) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view, select the slide to apply a slide transition.
4) Click on the required transition from the displayed list in Slide Transition to apply it to theselected slide.

290 | Impress Guide 7.5

5) In Modify Transition, select from the drop-down list one of the available options. The
available options change to match the selected transition.
6) In Advance Slide, select the slides change in a presentation. Only one option can beselected.

Note
A time must be entered in After to automatically open the next slide and allow theoption Loop and repeat after to function when it is required for a presentation toautomatically run continuously.
7) If required and to apply the same transition to all slides in the presentation, click on ApplyTransition to All Slides option in Advance Slide.
8) To check how the transition looks, click on Play option in Advance Slide.
9) Alternatively, to automatically preview how the transition looks when it is applied to aslide, select Automatic Preview option in Advance Slide.

Tip
A single type of transition can be applied to all the slides in a presentation, or adifferent transition to individual slides in the presentation. While using manydifferent transitions may look good, it may make the presentation lookunprofessional.

Transition options
Slide Transition
Displays the available transitions for a slide show.
Modify Transition
Variant
Select an option from the drop-down list. The available options change according to thetransition that has been selected.
DurationEnter a time for how long the transition lasts.
Sound
Select a sound from the drop-down list that is played when the transition activates. If asound is selected, the Loop until next sound option becomes active. Select this option
to play the sound repeatedly until another sound starts. If there are no subsequentsounds in a slide show, the selected sound plays continuously for the remainder of theshow. Sounds can be played when None is selected for the transition effect.
Advance Slide
On mouse click
Each time the mouse is clicked, the presentation advances to the next slide.
AfterEnter a time in the box to elapse before the next slide in the presentation advances
automatically into view.
Automatic Preview
When selected, transition options automatically display when selected.

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 291

Removing transitions
1) Click on Slide Transition in the Sidebar to open the Slide Transition deck.
2) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view, select the slide, or slides to remove the slide
transition.
3) Select None at the top of the available transitions in the Slide Transition deck.

Note
Slides with transitions are indicated by a star in the bottom left corner of the slide
when viewed in the Slides pane or Slide Sorter view.

Playing music
Music can be played during a slide show instead of a sound as a transition effect. When usingmusic in a slide show, make sure any musical copyright or licensing for the music is not being
infringed.
1) Click on Slide Transition in the Sidebar to open the Slide Transition deck.
2) Open a presentation file to add slide transitions.
3) In the Slides pane, or Slide Sorter view, select the slide where music is going to be
added as part of the slide transition.
4) In Modify Transition, select Other sound from the Sound drop-down list.
5) In the file browser window that opens, navigate to where the music file is located andselect the music file required.
6) Click on Play to check if the music file is suitable.
7) If the music is suitable, click Open to add the music to the selected slide and close the filebrowser window.
8) To play a music file continuously in the slide show, select Loop until next sound in Modify
Transition. The music file restarts once it is finished until the next music file that isinserted in the slide show.

Notes
Do not select the Apply Transition to All Slides option to prevent the selectedmusic file restarting as each slide opens in the presentation.
The music file is linked to a slide show rather than embedded. If the slide show isgoing to be displayed on a different computer, the music file must be available on
the computer where the slide show is going to be displayed and the link to themusic file must be established before starting the slide show.

Animations
Slide animations are similar to transitions, but are applied to individual elements in a single slide,such as title, chart, shape, or individual bullet points. Animations can make a presentation more
lively and memorable. However, as with transitions, heavy use of animations can be fun, but
distracting and even annoying for an audience expecting a professional presentation.
Animations are best applied using Normal view to make it easier to select individual objects on asingle slide.

292 | Impress Guide 7.5

Note
At present it is not possible to apply animations to elements in master slides. Thismeans that to display the items in a text box one by one and use the same
animation on more than one slide, the effects have to be applied to each slide.
Alternatively, copy the animated element from one slide to another.

Applying animation
On a slide, an element such as a graphic or an entire text box has selection handles around it
when selected. If a portion of the text in a text box is selected, selection handles may not be
displayed.
The following procedure is an example of applying an animation to an object. The options
available for an animation depend on the Category, Effect and slide element that have been
selected to create an animation.

Figure 262: Animation deck on Sidebar
Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 293

1) Open the Normal view using one of the following methods:– Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
– Click on the Normal tab at the top of the Workspace.
2) Select a slide in the Slides pane so that it appears in Normal view on the Workspace.
3) On the Sidebar, select Animation to open the Animation deck (Figure 262).
4) On the selected slide, select a slide element that is going to be animated.
5) In Effects, click on Add Effect to open the animation options and add the slide element
into the Animation box, then create the animation as follows:a) In Category, select a category from the options in the drop-down list.
b) In Effect, select an animation effect from the available options in the Effect drop-down
list.
c) In Start, select how the animation starts from the available options in the drop-down
list.
d) In Direction, select the direction of the animation from the available options in thedrop-down list.
e) In Duration, enter a time for the duration of the animation in the box.
f) In Delay, enter a time for the delay before the animation starts in the box.
6) If more animation options are required, see “Additional animation options” on page 295
for more information.
7) If required, select Automatic Preview to automatically check how the animation looks
when it is applied to a slide element.
8) Click on Play to check how the animation looks when applied to a slide element.

Changing animation
1) Open the Normal view using one of the following methods:– Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
– Click on the Normal tab at the top of the Workspace.
2) On the Sidebar, select Animation to open the Animation deck.
3) Select a slide that has animated elements in the Slides pane so that it appears in Normal
view.
4) In the Animation box, select the slide element using the animation effect that is going to
be changed.
5) Use the procedure in “Applying animation” on page 293 to select a new animation effectfor the selected element.
6) Click on Play to check how the animation looks when applied to a slide element.

Removing animation
1) Open the Normal view using one of the following methods:– Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
– Click on the Normal tab at the top of the Workspace.
294 | Impress Guide 7.5

2) On the Sidebar, select Animation to open the Animation deck.
3) Select the slide that uses the animated element that is going to be removed.
4) In Effects, click on Remove Effect to remove the animation from the selected element.

Additional animation options
Some animations have additional options that can be set or changed. Available options are
dependent on the animation selected.
1) Open the Normal view using one of the following methods:– Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
– Click on the Normal tab at the top of the Workspace.
2) On the Sidebar, select Animation to open the Animation deck.
3) Select the slide and element to apply additional animation options.
4) Click on Options to the right of the Direction drop-down list and open the Effect Options
dialog.
5) Select the options required for the animation effect from the options available on eachpage of the Effect Options dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Effect Options dialog.

Effect options
Specifies the settings and enhancements for the selected animation using the following options
on the Effect page in the Effect Options dialog (Figure 263).
Direction
Specifies the direction for the effect.

Figure 263: Effect Options dialog — Effect page

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 295

SoundSelect a sound from the drop-down list or select one of the special entries as follows:(No sound)No sound is played during animation of the effect.
(Stop previous sound)
Sound of the previous effect is stopped as soon as the current effect runs.
Other sound
Displays a file open dialog to select a sound or music file.
After animation
Select what happens after animation.
Don't dim
No after-effect runs.
Dim with color
After the animation a dim color fills the shape.
Hide after animation
Hides the shape after the animation ends.
Hide on next animation
Hides the shape on the next animation.
Dim color
Select the dim color. Only available if Dim with color has been selected.
Text animation
Select the animation mode for the text of the current shape:
All at once
Animates the text all at once.
Word by word
Animates the text word by word.
Letter by letter
Animates the text letter by letter.
Delay between characters
Specifies the percentage of delay between animations if Word by word or Letter by letterhas been selected for Text animation.

Timing options
Specifies the timing for the selected animation using the following options on the Timing page of
the Effects Options dialog (Figure 264).
Start
Displays the start property of the selected animation effect.
On click
Animation stops at this effect until the next mouse click.
With previous
Animation runs immediately.
After previous
Animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends.
DelaySpecifies an additional delay in seconds until the effect starts.

296 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 264: Effect Options dialog — Timing page
Duration
Specifies the duration of the effect in seconds.
RepeatSpecifies when and how to repeat the current effect. In the drop-down list, select one of
the following options:none
Animation effect is not repeated.
2, 3, 4, 5, 10
Select how many times the animation effect is repeatedUntil next click
Animation effect is repeated until the next mouse click.
Until end of slide
Animation effect repeats as long as the slide is displayed.
Rewind when done playing
Animated shape returns to its starting state after the animation ends.
Animate as part of click sequence
Allows the animation start in a normal click sequence.
Start effect on click of
Allows the animation start when a specified shape is clicked. Select the shape by its
name from the drop-down list.

Text animation options
Specifies the text animation settings for the selected animation using the following options on the
Text Animation page of the Effects Options dialog (Figure 265).
Group text
Specifies how multiple paragraphs are animated:

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 297

Figure 265: Effect Options dialog — Text Animation pageAs one object
All paragraphs are animated as one object.
All paragraphs at once
All paragraphs are animated at once, but paragraphs can have different effects.
By 1st level paragraphs
First level paragraphs, including sub-level paragraphs, are animated one after another.
Automatically after
If By 1st level paragraphs is selected for Group text, the paragraphs are animated one
after the other, enter an additional delay in seconds to animate subsequentparagraphs.
Animate attached shape
Deselect this box to animate only the text, not the shape.
In reverse order
Animates the paragraphs in reverse order.

Animation example
Creating animations on a slide takes practice to achieve the animation effect required. The
following steps explains how to setup the simple example animation shown in Figure 266 using
multiple animations. The example slide is taken from a LibreOffice presentation.
1) Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar to open Normal view in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide for animation.
3) On the Sidebar, select Animation to open the Animation deck.
4) Select the elements on the slide, then click on Add Effect to open the animation options
on the Animation deck. The selected elements appear in the box on the Animation deck.
5) Select the first element (Shape 1) and select Entrance from the Category drop-down list
and select the following options for the animation:– Effect — Venetian Blinds– Start — On click– Direction — Vertical– Duration — 0.50 sec– Delay — 3.0 sec

298 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 266: Example animation
6) Select the second element (Shape 3) and select Entrance from the Category drop-down
list and select the following options for the animation:– Effect — Appear– Start — After previous– Delay — 3.00 sec
7) Go to Slide Show > Rehearse Timings on the Menu bar and check the animation ofthese two objects.

Using interactions
Interactions are where objects on a slide are used to create an event when clicked on with the
cursor. These objects with interactions can be buttons, images, or text objects.
1) Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar to open Normal view in the Workspace.
2) Select a slide to add an interaction to an object on the slide.
3) Select the object, then right-click on the object and select Interaction from the context
menu, or go to Format > Interaction on the Menu bar. to open the Interaction dialog(Figure 267).
4) Select an interaction from the Action at mouse click drop-down list. The options available
for further selection and to setup the interaction depend on the type of interaction that has
been selected.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Interaction dialog.

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 299

Figure 267: Interaction dialog

Slide shows
Running a slide show
1) Open a presentation and start the slide show using one of the following methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut F5 to start from the first slide or Shift+F5 to start fromthe current slide.
– Go to Slide Show > Start from First Slide or Start from Current Slide on the Menu
bar.
– Click on Start from First Slide on the Slide Sorter toolbar.
2) If slide transition is set to Automatically after x sec, the slide show starts and runs after
the set time has elapsed.
3) If slide transition is set to On mouse click, use one of the following methods to advancethe slides:– Click the left mouse button.
– Press the down arrow key.
– Press the right arrow key.
– Press the page down key.
– Press the spacebar.
4) To navigate backwards through a slide show one slide at a time, use one of the following
methods:– Press the up arrow key.
– Press the left arrow key.
300 | Impress Guide 7.5

– Press the page up key.
5) Right-click on a slide during a slide show to open a context menu with more navigation
options.
6) When the last slide has displayed, the message Click to exit presentation is displayed onscreen. Press the Esc key or click the mouse button to exit the slide show.
7) To exit the slide show and return to the Impress workspace at any time, press the Esc key
during the slide show.

Note
During the slide show, any animations on a slide are run in the configured orderas the slide is displayed.

Context menu navigation and options
If the slide show consists of more than one slide, right-clicking on the screen opens a context
menu displaying navigation options as follows:
Next
Moves to the next slide in the slide show.
Previous
Moves to the previous slide in the slide show.
Go to Slide
Displays a sub-context menu allowing selection and navigation to any slide in the slide
show. The list of slides shows the necessity to name slides in a slide show rather thanusing the default slide names of Slide 1, Slide 2, and so on. Naming slides makes it
easier to identify the required slide.
Mouse Pointer as Pen
Allows the Mouse Pointer to be used as a pen and draw on a slide to emphasize or
explain a point.
Pen Width
Opens a sub-context menu providing options to set the width of any lines drawn on a slide
when using the Mouse Pointer as a pen.
Change Pen Color
Opens a dialog allowing changes to the line color when using the Mouse Pointer as apen.
Erase all ink on Slide
Deletes all lines drawn after using the Mouse Pointer as a pen.
ScreenOpens a sub-context menu with a black or white color choice. This is useful if the slide
show is going to be paused for a break or to demonstrate something else.
End ShowEnds the presentation and returns to the Impress workspace. This is the same effect aspressing the Esc key.

Automatic slide show repeat
1) Select a slide in Normal and open the Slide Transition deck in the Sidebar.

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 301

2) In the Advance Slide panel, make sure the option After is selected and a time setting isentered in the box before the next slide is advanced. For more information on transitions,see “Slide transitions” on page 289.
3) Go to Slide Show > Slide Show Settings on the Menu bar to open the Slide Show
Settings dialog (Figure 256 on page 285).
4) In Presentation Mode, select the option Loop and repeat after and insert a time delay inthe box before the slide show is displayed again.
5) If necessary, select Show logo if a company logo is to be displayed during the pause
between slide shows.
6) Click OK to save the settings and close the Slide Show Settings dialog.

Slide show timing
Default timing
1) Click on Slide Transition in the Sidebar to open the Slide Transition deck.
2) Select None in Slide Transition as the transition effect.
3) Select the option After in Advance Slide and enter a time in the box.
4) Click on Apply Transition to All Slides in Advance Slide to set the default timing for theslide show.
5) Go to Slide Show > Start from First Slide on the Menu bar to check how thepresentation runs.
6) If necessary, adjust the default timing until the slide show runs as required.

Variable timing
1) Select Slide Show > Rehearse Timings on the Menu bar. The slide show starts infullscreen mode and a timer appears in the lower left corner of the display.
2) When advancing to the next slide, click on the timer to set the time duration for the
displayed slide and advance to the next slide. To keep the default time duration for aslide, click the slide and not the timer.
3) Continue until the time duration is set for all slides in the slide show. Impress records thetime duration set for each slide.
4) To exit from rehearsal timing of the slide show, press the Esc key, or click on the slide.

Presenter Console
LibreOffice Impress includes a Presenter Console as part of the LibreOffice installation. If the
Presenter Console is not included, the extension can be downloaded from the LibreOfficewebsite and installed on a computer. For more information, see Chapter 11, Setting up andCustomizing Impress.
The Presenter Console provides extra control over slide shows when using dual displays, suchas a laptop for control and a large display or projector for an audience. The view on the laptop
display includes the current slide that can be seen by the audience, the next slide in thepresentation, any slide notes, and a presentation timer.

Note
The Presenter Console only works with operating systems that support two
displays. When two displays are being used, one display can be a laptop.

302 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 268: Presenter Console — Default view

Figure 269: Presenter Console — Notes view
The Presenter Console provides the following views when making a presentation:
Default view
Displays the current slide, including any effects and the next slide in the presentation(Figure 268). Click on the Previous, or Next arrows to navigate a presentation.
Notes view
Click on Notes to switch to display any notes that accompany each slide in thepresentation (Figure 269). Click on Notes again to return to the default view.

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 303

Figure 270: Presenter Console — Slides view
Slides view
Click on Slides to switch to display the slide thumbnails that are being used for thepresentation (Figure 270). Click on Slides again to return to the default view.
Exchange
Click on this icon to switch the Presentation Console between displays.

Photo albums
Impress can create a photo album from a set of images, ranging from one to four images on eachslide. A photo album can be a slide show or multimedia show with graphics, images, or
photographs.

Creating photo album
1) Create a new presentation or open an existing presentation.
2) Select the slide that is going to precede the photo album. In a new presentation, this is
the first slide.
3) Go to Insert > Media > Photo Album on the Menu bar to open the Create Photo Album
dialog (Figure 271).
4) Click on Add to open a file browser.
5) Navigate to the folder where the photographs are located.
6) Select the photographs and click on Open. This closes the file browser and the selected
files appear in the Create Photo Album dialog.
7) Select the number of images per slide in the Slide layout drop-down list.
8) If required, select Add caption to each slide inserting a text box on each slide allowing acaption to be added to the photographs, as shown by the example in Figure 272.
9) If required and there is only one image per slide, select Fill Screen for each photograph tofill the entire slide.

304 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 271: Create Photo Album dialog

Figure 272: Example slide in photo album with caption10) Create the required sequence of photographs by moving the files up or down in the list of
selected files.
11) When the sequence is ready, click Insert Slides to create the number of slides required
for the photo album. Impress creates a presentation with as many slides that are required
to contain the photographs. The sequence of slides can be changed if necessary.
12) If required, move photographs between slides and create frames for photographs. For
more information, see “Editing photo albums” on page 306.
13) If required, run the photo album as a slide show. See “Creating slide shows” on page 284
and “Slide shows” on page 300.

Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 305

Figure 273: Image panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Editing photo albums
When a photo album is created, the full images of photographs are placed within the boundariesof the slides created for the photo album. Each of the photographs in the photo album can beedited just like any other object that can be placed on a slide. For more information on formatting
photographs, see the following chapters of the Impress Guide:
Chapter 4, Adding and Formatting Images
Chapter 5, Managing Graphic Objects
Chapter 6, Formatting Graphic Objects
However, to make the photo album look more attractive, frames can be added to eachphotograph in the photo album and the photographs enhanced using options available on the
Sidebar.
Experiment with different levels for each of the following options to create the right effect for eachphotograph in the photo album.
1) Select a slide in the photo album to open the Image, Line and Effect panels in theProperties deck on the Sidebar.
2) In the Image panel (Figure 273), adjust the following options, as required, to enhance thephotograph. Figure 272 shows an example of a photo where the image has beenadjusted.
– Color mode –– select the color mode from the options in the drop-down list.
– Brightness –– select the brightness level as a percentage.
– Contrast –– select the contrast level as a percentage.
– Transparency –– select the transparency level as a percentage.
3) In the Line panel (Figure 274), select the following options, as required, to create a frame
around the photograph. Figure 275 shows an example of a photo where a line frame has
been added.
– Line –– select the line style from the drop-down list.

306 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 274: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 275: Example photo with line frame– Width –– select the line width from the drop-down list or enter a line width in the
Custom Line Width box.
– Color –– select a color from the available color palettes, or create a custom color forthe line frame.
– Transparency –– select the transparency level as a percentage for the line frame.
4) In the Effect panel (Figure 276), select the following options, as required, to create a soft
frame around the photograph. Figure 277 shows an example of a photo where a soft
frame has been added.
– Glow Radius –– adjust the radius value to apply a soft frame around the outside of
the photograph.
– Glow Color –– select a color for the soft frame from the available color palettes.
Chapter 9, Slide Shows and Photo Albums | 307

Figure 276: Effect panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 277: Example photo with soft frame– Glow Transparency –– enter a transparency value to adjust the transparency of thesoft frame.
– Soft Edge Radius –– adjust the radius value to reduce the internal width of the soft
frame and make the photograph look smaller.

308 | Impress Guide 7.5

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 10,
Saving Slide Shows,Printing, Emailing, andExportingSaving slide shows
Slide shows (presentations) created in Impress are, by default, saved in the Open Document
Presentation (ODP) format. However, Impress can open and save a slide show in other widelyused and recognized presentation formats, see “Other presentation formats” on page 311 formore information.

ODP file format
1) Create a slide show. For more information, refer to the other chapters in this user guide.
2) Save the slide show using one of the following methods to open the Save as dialog(Figure 278).
– Click on Save on the Standard toolbar (Figure 279).
– Go to File > Save on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S (macOS ⌘+S).
3) Navigate to the folder where the slide show is to be saved.
4) Enter a filename in the File name: text box.
5) Select the default ODF Presentation (.odp) from the File type: drop-down list.
6) Click on Save to save the slide show and close the file browser window.

Figure 278: Save as dialog

Figure 279: Standard toolbar

310 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 280: Confirm File Format dialog

Other presentation formats
1) Create a slide show. For more information, refer to the other chapters in this user guide.
2) To save a slide show in a presentation format that Impress recognizes, use one of thefollowing methods to open the Save as dialog.
– Click the triangle ▼ to the right of Save on the Standard toolbar and select Save As
from the drop-down menu.
– Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+S (macOS ⌘+Shift+S).
3) Navigate to the folder where the slide show is to be saved.
4) Enter a filename in the File name: text box.
5) Select the required presentation format from the options from the File type: drop-down
list.
6) Click on Save to save the slide show and close the file browser window

Note
If the slide show is not being saved in the ODP presentation format, a Confirm
File Format dialog (Figure 280) opens asking confirmation of the file format
selected. Only presentation file formats that Impress is compatible with aredisplayed in the File type: drop-down list.

Printing
Default printer1) To specify the default printer, go to File > Printer Settings on the Menu bar to open the
Printer Setup dialog (Figure 281).
2) Select the required default printer from the printers listed in the Name: drop-down list.
3) Click on Properties to open a printer properties dialog for the selected printer and selectthe required options from those available in the dialog. The options available in this dialog
depends on the type of printer connected to the computer and the computer operating
system being used.
4) Click OK to save the selected options and close the printer properties dialog.
5) Click OK to save the default printer selection and close the Printer Setup dialog.

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 311

Figure 281: Printer Setup dialog

Quick printing
To quickly print a document or presentation, click on Print Directly on the Standard toolbar tosend the entire document to the default printer that is defined for the computer.
If Print Directly is not visible on the Standard toolbar, it can be added as follows:
1) Right-click in an empty area on the Standard toolbar and select Visible Buttons from thecontext menu.
2) Select Print Directly from the list of available tools and the Print Directly tool is added to
the Standard toolbar.

Note
The action of Print Directly can be changed by sending a document to the printerdefined for the document instead of the default printer defined for the computer.
Go to Tools > Options > Load/Save > General (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > Load/Save > General) on the Menu bar and select the option
Load printer settings with the document.

Controlled printing
For more control over printing, open and use the Print dialog that can be opened using one of thefollowing methods.
• Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P (macOS ⌘+P).
• Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.

Notes
The options selected in the Print dialog only apply to the printing of the current
document that is open in Impress. To specify default print settings for LibreOffice,go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Print (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences> LibreOffice > Print) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Print
dialog (Figure 282).
Any print options selected with the Print dialog when printing from Impress
overrides the default printer settings that have been set using Options LibreOfficePrint dialog.

312 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 282: Options LibreOffice Print dialog

Note
Due to different computer setups and different operating systems, the print dialog
that opens may differ from the dialogs displayed in this chapter. However, theprinting options available for LibreOffice remain the same.

Linux or Windows printing
General options
The following general options are an example of what may be available on the General page of
the Print dialog (Figure 283).
Printer
Select the printer to use from the printers available in the drop-down list.
Properties
Click on this button to open the properties dialog for the printer being used. The options
available in this dialog depends on the type of printer connected to the computer and thecomputer operating system being used.
Range and Copies
All Slides
Prints all the slides in the presentation.
Selection
Prints the slides selected in LibreOffice Impress.
SlidesSelect the page number(s) to print. For multiple pages, use the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 – 5,7, 9 for page number selection.
IncludeSelect from the drop-down list Odd and Even Pages, Odd Pages, or Even Pages.
More > Paper sides
Select from the drop-down list Print on one side (simplex), Print on both sides (duplex
long edge), or Print on both sides (duplex short edge).
Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 313

Figure 283: Print dialog — General page — Linux or Windows
More > Number of copies
Enter number of printed copies required for the document.
More > Collate
Collates multiple printed copies into separate documents.
More > Order
Select from Create separate print jobs for collated output (only available when morethan one copy is being printed) or Print in reverse order.
Page Layout
Paper size
Select the paper size to use from drop-down list
Orientation
Select from the drop-down list Automatic, Portrait, or Landscape.
More > Pages per sheet
Select from the drop-down list how many pages are printed on one sheet of paper.

314 | Impress Guide 7.5

More > Order
Select from the drop-down list the printing order of multiple pages on one sheet ofpaper.
More > Draw a border around each page
When multiple slides are printed on one sheet of paper, a border is drawn around eachslide.
More > Brochure
Prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or booklet.

LibreOffice Impress options
The following options are available on the LibreOffice Impress page of the Print dialog(Figure 284) where settings are defined specific to the current document type:Contents
When selected prints Slide name, Date and time on the slides and any Hidden pages in
the presentation.

Figure 284: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress page — Linux or Windows

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 315

ColorPrints the presentation in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.
Size
Original size
Prints the slide using its original size.
Fit to printable page
Presentation size is changed so that it fits on the paper size used for printing.
Distribute on multiple sheets of paper
Used if the slides are too large for the paper size being used.
Tile sheet of paper with repeated slides
Used to print several slides of a presentation on a sheet of paper.

macOS printing
LibreOffice Impress options
By default, when the Print dialog opens, the page for LibreOffice Impress printing options isalready selected, as shown in Figure 285.
Printer
Select the printer to be used from the drop-down list. If the default printer is being used,then this printer will already be selected.
Presets
Select from the drop-down list a printing preset. The presets available depend on the typeof printer connected to the computer. This also includes any custom presets that havebeen created.
CopiesEnter the number of copies to be printed.
Pages
All
Prints all the pages in the document.
Range
Select the page number(s) to print. For multiple pages, use the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 – 5,7, 9 for page number selection.
Selection
Only prints the selected slides in the Slides pane.
Print in Color
Select this option to print the presentation in color if the printer selected is capable ofcolor printing.
Double-sided
Select this option to print the presentation double sided if the printer selected is capableof double sided printing.
Print selection only
Only selected slides are printed when this option is selected.
Document
Select the type of document to print from the drop-down list: Slides; Handouts; Notes;
Outline.

316 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 285: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — macOS
Slides per page
Only available when Handouts is selected as the document type. Select from thedrop-down list either According to layout, or the number of slides per page.
Order
Only available when Handouts is selected as the document type. Select from thedrop-down list either Left to right, then down, or Top to bottom, then right.
Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 317

Contents
When selected prints Slide name, Date and time on the slides and any Hidden pages in
the presentation.
Color
Prints the presentation in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.

Figure 286: Print dialog — LibreOffice Impress — More page — macOS318 | Impress Guide 7.5

LibreOffice Impress More options
To access more printing options in LibreOffice Impress, click on More to open the second pageof LibreOffice Impress options, as shown by the example in Figure 286.
Size
Original size
Prints the slides using the original size.
Fit to printable page
Slide size is changed so that it fits on the paper size used for printing.
Distribute on multiple sheets of paper
Used if the slides are too large for the paper size being used.
Tile sheet of paper with repeated slides
Used to print multiple copies of a slide on a page.
Brochure
When selected, prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or
booklet.
IncludeSelect which pages to print from the drop-down list: All pages; Front sides/right pages;
Back sides/left pages. Only available when Brochure is selected.
Use only paper tray from printer preferences
When selected, the printer tray selected on the printer overrides the selected tray in theprinter properties on the computer.
All Slides
All slides in the slide show are printed.
SlidesEnter the slide number(s) in the text box that are to be printed. For multiple slides, use
the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 – 5, 7, 9 for slide number selection.
Selection
Prints the slides selected in LibreOffice Impress in the Slides pane.

General printing
Click on the Media & Quality and Layout to open the available options for general printing(Figure 287).
Media & Quality
Feed from
Select from the drop-down list the paper tray to use if the printer has more than one
paper tray.
Media Type
Select from the drop-down list the paper type that has been loaded into the paper tray
being used, for example Envelope, Photo, Plain Paper.
Quality
Select the level of printing quality required.
LayoutPages per sheet
Select from the drop-down list how many slides are printed on one sheet of paper.
Layout Direction
Select the printing order of multiple slides on one sheet of paper.

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 319

Figure 287: Print dialog — Media and Layout page — macOS
BorderWhen multiple slides are printed on one sheet of paper, a border is drawn around eachslide.
Two-Sided
Select from the drop-down list how a multi-page document is going to be bound: Off;Long-Edge binding; Short-Edge binding, Booklet.
320 | Impress Guide 7.5

Reverse page orientation
If LibreOffice prints the slides in the wrong order, select this option and print the
document again.
Flip horizontally
If LibreOffice prints the pages in the wrong orientation, select this option and print the
document again.

Figure 288: Print dialog — Paper Handling and Watermark page — macOS
Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 321

Click on the Paper Handling and Watermark to open the available options for general printing(Figure 288).
Paper Handling
Collate pages
When selected collates multiple printed copies into separate documents.
Sheets to Print
Select which slides in the document to print from the drop-down list: All pages; Odd
only; Even only.
Sheet Order
Select the page printing order from the drop-down list: Automatic; Normal; Reverse.
Scale to fit paper size
Adjusts the printed slide to fit the paper size.
Destination Paper Size
Select a paper size from the options available in the drop-down list. Only available if
Scale to fit paper size has been selected.
Scale Down Only
When selected, a page is scaled down to fit the paper size available..
Watermark
Apply Watermark
Provides options to print watermark text on the slides, for example Confidential if thepresentation is of a sensitive nature.
Printer Info
The options available depend on the type of printer that is connected to the computer andthe operating system being used.

Printing examples
The following printing procedures are examples only. Actual printing procedure depends on
computer operating system, computer setup, and the printer being used. For more information on
printing, see the Writer Guide.

Printing slides1) Open the Print dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P (macOS ⌘+P).
– Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.
2) Click on General to open the page for general print options and, if necessary, select a
printer from the Printer drop-down list of printers available.
3) If necessary, in Printer click on Properties to display a properties dialog for the selected
printer and select the options required. Available printer properties depend on the printerselected and computer operating system being used.
4) If necessary, click OK to save the printer properties selection and close the printerproperties dialog.
5) In Range and Copies, select which slides to print, odd or even pages, the paper sides toprint on (simplex or duplex), number of copies, collate multiple copies, and the print order.

322 | Impress Guide 7.5

6) In Page Layout, select the paper size, orientation, pages per sheet, and, if necessary,brochure printing.
7) Click on LibreOffice Impress to open the page for LibreOffice Impress print options.
8) In Document, select the document type, slides per page and the printing order from thedrop-down lists.
9) In Contents, select whether to print slide name, date and time, and/or hidden pages.
10) In Color, select the type of color to print.
11) In Size, select the printed size, to fit on a printable page, to distribute on multiple sheetsof paper, or tile sheet of paper with repeated slides.
12) Click OK to print the slides and close the Print dialog.

Brochure printing
When brochure printing the slides are printed so that the slides are in the correct order to form abooklet or brochure. The printer procedures below are only examples. Actual brochure printing
procedure depends on the computer operating system and type of printer being used. It is best to
experiment to find the correct method for brochure printing.

Single sided printing
The following procedure is an example of how to create a brochure or booklet using a printer thatis only capable of printing single sided.
1) Open the Print dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P (macOS ⌘+P).
– Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.
2) Click on General to open the page for general print options and, if necessary, select a
printer from the Printer drop-down list of printers available.
3) Click on Properties to open the printer properties dialog for the printer being used andcheck the printer is set to the same page orientation as specified for the page setup forthe slides. Usually page orientation does not matter, but it is important for brochures.
4) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
5) In Range and Copies, select All Slides. A minimum of four slides is required to create abrochure.
6) In Range and Copies, select the Number of copies required to match the required
number of brochures.
7) In Layout, select Brochure.
8) In Range and Copies, select Even slides option in Include.
9) Click OK to print the even slides in the presentation.
10) Take the printed slides out of the printer and put them back into the printer in the correctorientation to print on the other side of the paper. It maybe necessary to experiment andfind out what the correct arrangement is for the printer being used.
11) In Range and Copies, select Odd slides option in Include.
12) In Range and Copies, select the same Number of copies used for printing the evenslides.

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 323

13) Click OK to print the odd slides in the presentation and close the Print dialog.
14) Assemble the brochures and bind them, if necessary.

Double sided or duplex printing
Printing a brochure on a printer that is capable of double sided or duplex printing makes the taskof creating brochures simpler.
1) Open the Print dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P (macOS ⌘+P).
– Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.
2) Click on General to open the page for general print options and, if necessary, select a
printer from the Printer drop-down list of printers available.
3) Click on Properties to open the printer properties dialog for the printer being used andcheck the printer is set to the same page orientation as specified for the page setup forthe slides. Usually page orientation does not matter, but it is important for brochures.
4) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
5) In Range and Copies, select All Slides. A minimum of four slides is required to create abrochure.
6) In Range and Copies, select Print on both sides (duplex long edge) or Print on bothsides (duplex short edge) option. Normally, long edge binding is used for portrait printing
and short edge binding is used for landscape printing.
7) In Range and Copies, select the Number of copies required to match the required
number of brochures.
8) In Range and Copies, select the Collate option. This option is only active when printing
multiple copies of the same document.
9) In Layout, select Brochure.
10) Click OK to close to the Print dialog and print the required number of pages for thebrochures.
11) If necessary, bind the brochures to match either long edge or short edge binding.

Emailing
LibreOffice provides two methods of emailing a slide show directly from the Impress module as
an attachment in ODP format or PDF format. For more information on emailing LibreOffice
documents, see the Getting Started Guide.

Note
A default email program must be available for the emailing facility in LibreOffice
Impress to work correctly.

ODP format
1) Make sure the presentation file is open in Impress.
2) Go to File > Send > Email Document on the Menu bar and the default email program
opens with the presentation file already attached to the email.

324 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 289: PDF Options dialog — General page3) Enter the name of the recipient, subject line, and message then send the email.

PDF format
1) Make sure the presentation file is open in Impress.
2) Go to Format > Send > Email as PDF on the Menu bar and the PDF Options dialog(Figure 289) opens.
3) If necessary, select the required PDF options to create a PDF version of the slide show.
Normally, the default options already selected are sufficient to create a PDF file that theemail recipient will be able to open.
4) Click on Send to close the PDF Options dialog and the default email program opens with
the PDF file already attached to the email.
5) Enter the name of the recipient, subject line, and message then send the email.

Exporting
Impress can export presentations in the PDF format as well as other file formats. The PDF format
is a standard file format for file viewing and is ideal for sending a file to someone who can only
view a slide show file using a PDF viewer. For more information on exporting LibreOffice
documents, see the Getting Started Guide.

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 325

Quick PDF export
1) Make sure the presentation file is open in Impress.
2) Use one of the following methods to export the file as a PDF file and open a file browser
window.
– Click on Export Directly as PDF on the Standard toolbar.
– Go to File > Export As > Export Directly as PDF on the Menu bar.
3) In the file browser window, navigate to the folder where the PDF file is to be saved.
4) In the Name text box, enter a filename for the PDF file or use the filename that isdisplayed in this text box. The file format is fixed as PDF and cannot be changed.
5) Click on Save to save the slide show file as a PDF file and close the file browser window.

PDF export
For more control over the content and quality of a PDF file, it is recommended to use the PDF
Options dialog. For more information on the options available when exporting a slide show as a
PDF file, see the Getting Started Guide.
1) Make sure the presentation file is open in Impress.
2) Go to File > Export as > Export as PDF on the Menu bar to open the PDF Options
dialog (Figure 289).
3) Using the various pages in the PDF Options dialog, select the options required for the
PDF file. For more information, see the Getting Started Guide.
4) Click on Export to open a file browser window.
5) In the file browser window, navigate to the folder where the PDF file is to be saved.
6) In the Name text box, enter a filename for the PDF file or use the filename that isdisplayed in this text box. The file format is fixed as PDF and cannot be changed.
7) Click on Export to save and export the file to the selected location.

Web pages (HTML) export
Presentations can be exported as a series of web pages (HTML format) that can be viewed inany browser.

Note
Exporting presentations as web pages (HTML) does not retain any animation
effects or slide transitions.
1) Make sure the presentation file is open in Impress.
2) Create a folder to contain the HTML pages that are generated and this folder will beselected as the destination for the HTML pages.
3) Go to File > Export on the menu bar to open a file browser window and navigate to thefolder where the HTML version of the presentation is going to be saved.
4) Enter a name for the HTML file in the Name text box at the top of the file browser window.
5) At the bottom of the file browser, select HTML Document (Impress) (.html; .htm) format
from the drop-down list.
6) Click on Save and the HTML Export dialog opens at the Assign Design page (Figure 290).
326 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 290: HTML Export dialog — Assign Design page

Figure 291: HTML Export dialog — Publication Type page7) Select a design for all of the HTML pages, either from an existing design, or by creating a
new design. If there is no previously saved design available, the Existing design option is
not available.
8) Click on Next to select the publication type to use for creating the web pages, as shownin Figure 291. The available options change depending on publication type selected.
– Standard HTML format — one page for each slide with navigation links to move fromslide to slide.

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 327

Figure 292: HTML Export dialog — Save Images As page
– Standard HTML with frames — one page with a navigation bar on the left-hand sideand uses slide title as navigation links. Click on links to display pages in right-handside.
– Single-document HTML — creates one HTML document from the slide show.
– Automatic — one page for each slide with each page set with the refresh meta tag
so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next.
– WebCast — generates an ASP or Perl application to display the slides. Currently,
LibreOffice has no direct support for PHP.
9) Click on Next to select the format for saving images (PNG, GIF or JPG) from the options
available in Save Images As (Figure 292).
10) In Quality, enter a percentage value for the images being saved. Only available if JPG
format has been selected.
11) In Monitor Resolution, select the type of resolution from the options available. Whenselecting a monitor resolution, consider what type of display users may have. For
example, if high resolution is selected, then users with a medium-resolution display has toscroll sideways to see the entire slide.
12) In Effects, select whether sounds and/or hidden slides are exported.
13) Click on Next and enter the necessary details for a title page (Figure 293). This page
does not display if the Create title page option was NOT selected when selecting
Publication Type.
14) Click on Next to select the style of navigation buttons to use when moving from one page
to another from the options available in Select Button Style (Figure 294). If buttons are
not being used, make sure Text only is selected.

328 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 293: HTML export dialog — Title page

Figure 294: HTML Export dialog — Button Style page15) Click on Next to select the color scheme for the web pages from the options available in
Select Color Scheme (Figure 295). Available schemes include the existing scheme forthe presentation, one based upon browser colors, and a user-defined scheme. A new
scheme can be saved so that it appears on the first page of the HTML export wizard.
16) Click on Create to generate the HTML files. If this is a new design, a dialog opens to savethe design for future use.

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 329

Figure 295: HTML Export dialog — Color Scheme page

Export in other formats
1) Make sure the presentation file is open in Impress.
2) Go to File > Export on the menu bar to open a file browser window and navigate towhere the slide show is going to be saved.
3) Enter a name for the exported file in the Name text box at the top of the file browser.
4) At the bottom of the file browser, select the required format from the options in thedrop-down list.
5) Click on Save to export the file to the selected location. Depending on the format
selected, an options dialog may open allowing further options to be selected for the fileformat selected.
6) Click on OK to save the exported file and close the options dialog. For more information
on exporting files, see the Getting Started Guide.

Redaction
Presentations can be redacted to remove or hide any sensitive information allowing the selective
disclosure of information while keeping other parts of a presentation secret. When a presentationis redacted, it is exported as a new PDF file with all the redacted portions removed and replacedby redaction blocks of pixels. A redacted document is exported in PDF format for publication, or
sharing.

Note
When a redacted document is exported as a new PDF file, any redacted portions
are removed from the new document and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels.
This prevents any attempt to restore, or copy the original contents that have beenredacted.

330 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 296: Redaction toolbar

Redaction tools
The tools available on the Redaction toolbar (Figure 296) are as follows:
Rectangle Redaction
Used to mark the content for redaction by drawing transparent rectangles covering thecontent. Use the handles to resize the redaction rectangle.
Freeform Redaction
Allows the user to mark the content for redaction by drawing free-form lines, or polygons
covering the content.
Redacted Export (Black)
Converts the semi-transparent redaction shape to opaque black and exports as pixels in
the PDF file.
Redacted Export (White)
Converts the semi-transparent redaction shapes to opaque white shapes and exports as
pixels in the PDF file.
Export Preview PDF
Makes a copy of the presentation as a PDF file to preview the redaction areas before
making a redacted PDF file of the presentation.

Presentation redaction
A copy of the presentation is automatically transferred to LibreOffice Draw where the redaction iscarried out. For more information on redaction, see the Getting Started Guide.
1) Open the presentation to be redacted, then go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar andthe following happens:– The document is copied, prepared and transferred to LibreOffice Draw as an untitledfile.
– LibreOffice Draw opens with the untitled document displayed.
– The Redaction toolbar automatically opens. If the Redaction toolbar is not displayed,
go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar in LibreOffice Draw and select Redaction.
2) Go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and click on Rectangle Redaction or Freeform
Redaction in the Redaction toolbar.
3) Draw the required shapes to redact the sensitive areas in the document. The redaction
shape is gray allowing the sensitive areas in the document to be visible before they are
redacted.
4) If necessary, click on Export Preview PDF to create a preview copy of the PDF file toreview the redaction areas before the redaction is finalized.
5) If necessary, delete the preview PDF copy after reviewing the redaction areas in the file.
6) Click on Redacted Export (White), or Redacted Export (Black) in the Redaction toolbar
to export the presentation file as a redacted PDF file.

Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing, Emailing, and Exporting | 331

7) Navigate to the folder in the file browser window that opens where the redact PDF file isgoing to be saved and enter a name for the file.
8) Click on Save to create the redacted PDF file. The gray redaction shapes are converted
to white, or black shapes and the document is exported as a PDF

Automatic redaction
Automatic redaction is used to define words and patterns that are automatically marked forredaction. Automatic redaction is useful for documents that have multiple occurrences of names
and other personal information (for example credit cards, phone numbers, and so on). Manuallyredacting this type information in a document would require significant effort, but automatic
redaction makes redaction of a document easier and more efficient. For more information on
automatic redaction, see the Getting Started Guide.

332 | Impress Guide 7.5

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 11,
Setting Up and Customizing
Impress

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the settings in LibreOffice that apply when using Impress,
but may also apply to all the other modules in LibreOffice. The illustrations in this chapter havebeen taken from LibreOffice Impress. For more information on setting up and customizing all the
LibreOffice modules, see the Getting Started Guide.

LibreOffice options
Note
Revert has the same effect on all pages of the Options LibreOffice dialog. It
resets the options to the values that were in place when LibreOffice was opened.

User data information
Impress uses the first name, last name and initials stored in User Data for document properties,
optional author field used in slides, and identification of any comments that have been made.
1) Go to Tools > Options (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences) on the Menu bar to open
the Options LibreOffice dialog (Figure 297). The list on the left-hand side varies
depending on which component of LibreOffice is open.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice on the left-hand side and select User
Data to open the user data options page for LibreOffice.
3) Enter or edit details that are to be used for document properties.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Options LibreOffice dialog.

Figure 297: Options LibreOffice dialog — User Data page334 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 298: Options LibreOffice dialog — View page

View options
1) Go to Tools > Options (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences) on the Menu bar to open
the Options LibreOffice dialog. The list on the left-hand side varies depending on which
component of LibreOffice is open.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice on the left-hand side to open a list of
pages and select View to open the view options page for LibreOffice (Figure 298).
3) Enter or edit details that are to be used for viewing a file in LibreOffice.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Options LibreOffice dialog.
View options control how the user interface for LibreOffice appears when creating slides. For
more information on customizing the user interface, see the Getting Started Guide.
Appearance
Mode
Select an appearance mode from the drop-down list from System, Light, or Dark. Anychange in appearance is only available if the computer operating system supports achange of appearance.
Icon styleSpecifies the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
Icon size
Sets the icon size to Automatic, Small, Large or Extra Large.
ToolbarSpecifies the display size of toolbar icons.
Notebookbar
Specifies the display size of notebook bar icons.
SidebarSpecifies the display size of sidebar icons.
Visibility
Displays icons according to system settings and themes.

Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress | 335

Menu icons
Select from Automatic, Hide, or Show.
Shortcuts
Displays keyboard shortcuts next to the corresponding menu items.
MouseDefines how the cursor is positioned and the action of the middle button, if used.
Positioning
Specifies if and how the cursor is positioned in newly opened dialogs.
Middle button
Defines the function of the middle mouse button. First function is for automatic scrolling
dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view. The second function
is to insert clipboard contents at the cursor position by pressing the middle mousebutton.
Graphics Output
Defines how graphics are displayed.
Use hardware acceleration
Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve thescreen display. The support for hardware acceleration is not available for all operating
systems and platform distributions of LibreOffice.
Use anti-aliasing
When supported, enables and disables anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasingenabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
Use Skia for all rendering
Currently this option is disabled in LibreOffice.
Font Lists
Defines how the fonts are displayed.
Show preview of fonts
Displays how a selected font will appear on the user interface.
Screen font antialiasing
When selected, the display of fonts looks smoother and with less artifacts.
From:
Sets the minimum size of a font being used before Screen font antialiasing is applied tosmooth the font.

Print options
Print options can be selected and changed using the Print page of the Options LibreOffice dialog
or during the printing process. Available print options shown in the print dialog do depend on
operating system, computer setup, and the type of printer being used. An example of print
options available are shown in Figure 299. See Chapter 10, Saving Slide Shows, Printing,
Emailing, and Exporting for more information about the printing of slide shows.
1) Go to Tools > Options (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences) on the Menu bar to open
the Options LibreOffice dialog.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice on the left-hand side to open a list of
subsections and select Print to open the printing options page for LibreOffice.

336 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 299: Options LibreOffice dialog — Print page3) Select the print settings that suit the selected printer and the most common printing
method.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Options LibreOffice dialog.
Using the print options it is possible to reduce amount of data sent to the printer. This increases
the print speed because print files are smaller. It also makes it easier for printers with a smaller
memory to print. However, reducing print data can result in slightly lower print quality.
Settings forSpecifies whether the print settings apply to the printer or to a file.
PrinterDefine options for reducing data while printing directly to a printer.
Print to file
Define options for reducing data while printing to a file.
Defaults
PDF as standard print job format
Specifies the use of PDF format when sending a file to the printer.
Convert colors to grayscale
Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale.
Include transparent objects
When selected, any reduction in print quality also applies to the transparent areas ofobjects.
Reduce Bitmaps
Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be
reduced and not increased.
Resolution
Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi.
Normal print quality
Corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.

Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress | 337

High print quality
Corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi.
Reduce Transparency
If selected, any transparent objects are printed as normal, depending on the selection of
the two following options.
AutomaticallySpecifies that any transparencies are only printed if the transparent areas covers lessthan a quarter of the entire page.
No transparency
When selected, transparencies are not printed.

NoteTransparencies cannot be sent directly to a printer. The document areas wheretransparencies are visible must always be calculated as bitmaps and sent to theprinter. Depending on the size of the bitmaps and the print resolution, a large
amount of data may result.
Warnings
Defines which warnings appear before any printing starts.
Paper size
Select this option if a certain paper size is required for printing a document. If the paper
size required is not available in the current printer, a warning is displayed.
Paper orientation
Select this option if a specific page orientation is required for a document. If the format
is not available, a warning is displayed.
Transparency
Select this option if a warning is required when transparencies are contained in the
document. A dialog appears allowing selection if the transparency is to be printed.
Reduce gradientIf selected, gradients are printed with reduced quality.
Gradient stripes
Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
Intermediate color
Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color.

Application Color options
Application colors specify which color is used to display various elements of the user interface inLibreOffice. The only option specific to Impress is the color of the grid points.
1) Go to Tools > Options (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences) on the Menu bar to open
the Options LibreOffice dialog.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice on the left-hand side to open a list of
sections and select Application Colors to open the color options page for the colors
used in LibreOffice (Figure 300).
3) In Custom Colors, scroll down to Drawing/Presentation.
4) Select from the list of color palettes a color to use for the Grid.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Options LibreOffice dialog.

338 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 300: Options LibreOffice dialog — Application Colors pageNote
To save the color changes as a color scheme, click on Save and type a name inthe dialog that opens, then click OK.

Impress options
1) Go to Tools > Options (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences) on the Menu bar to open
the Options LibreOffice dialog.
2) Click the expansion marker next to LibreOffice Impress on the left-hand side to open alist of sections (Figure 301).
3) Select an option section from the list of sections that are available, then select from therequired options from the options available.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Options LibreOffice dialog.

General options
Select LibreOffice Impress > General to specify the general options for slide shows(Figure 301).
New document
Start with Template Selection
If selected, the Select a Template dialog opens when creating a new presentation.

Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress | 339

Figure 301: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — General page
Settings
Copy when moving
If selected, a copy is created when an object is moved while holding down the Ctrl
key (macOS ⌘). The same applies for rotating and resizing an object. The original
object remains in its current position and size.
Use background cache
Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master slide. This
speeds up the display. Deselect this option to display contents being changed on themaster slide.
Objects always moveable
When selected, it allows moving an object with Rotate enabled. If this option is notselected, Rotate can only be used to rotate an object.
Unit of measurement
Determines the unit of measurement used in Impress.
Tab stops
Defines the spacing between tab stops.
Compatibility
These settings are valid for the current presentation only.
Use printer metrics for document formattingSpecifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display
on the screen. If this option is not selected, a printer independent layout is used forscreen display and printing. If this option is set for the current document and the
document is saved, for example, in an older binary format, this option is not saved. If
the file is then opened from the older format, this option is set by default.
Add spacing between paragraphs and tablesSpecifies that Impress calculates the paragraph spacing. Similar to Microsoft
PowerPoint which adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of thenext paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. Impress
utilizes only the larger of the two spacings.
Presentation
Enable remote control
When selected, allows a remote control to be used for presentations.

340 | Impress Guide 7.5

Enable Presenter Console
When selected, the Presenter Console opens for presentations when using multiple
displays.
Text objects
Allow quick editing
If selected, text can be edited immediately after clicking a text object. If deselected,
double-click to edit text. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Allow Quick
Editing in the Options toolbar (Figure 302).
Only text area selectable
Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text. In the area of the text
frame that is not filled with text, an object behind the text frame can be selected. Thismode can be activated by clicking on Select Text Area Only in the Options toolbar.

View options
Select LibreOffice Impress > View (Figure 303) to specify the options for the available display
modes.
Display
Rulers visible
When selected, displays the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
Helplines while moving
When selected, displays guides when moving an object. Impress creates dotted guides
that extend beyond the box containing the selected object and covering the entire
Workspace to help in positioning of an object. This mode can also be activated byclicking on Helplines While Moving on the Options toolbar.
All control points in Bézier editor
Displays the control points of all Bézier points if a Bézier curve is selected. If this option
is not selected, only the control points of the selected Bézier points are visible.
Contour of each individual object
Impress displays the contour line of each individual object when moving an object.
When an objects is being moved, this option shows if there is any conflict with otherobjects in the target position. If this option is not selected, Impress displays only asquare contour that includes all selected objects.

Figure 302: Options toolbar

Figure 303: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — View page
Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress | 341

Figure 304: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — Grid page

Grid options
Select LibreOffice Impress > Grid (Figure 304) to specify the grid settings for Impress. Using agrid helps in determining the exact position of objects. The grid can also be set to line up with thesnap grid.
Grid
Snap to grid
Activates the snap function. If this option is selected and want to move or create
individual objects without snapping to the grid. This setting can be temporarily
deactivated by pressing the Shift key to deactivate Snap to grid whilst moving theindividual object. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Grid on the
Options toolbar.
Visible grid
Displays grid points on the screen. These points will not display or print as part of apresentation.
Resolution
Horizontal
Defines the measurement unit for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
VerticalDefines the measurement unit for the spacing between grid points on the Y-axis.
Synchronize axes
When selected, the measurement and spacing settings for X- and Y-axes aresynchronized for Resolution and Subdivision.
Subdivision
Horizontal
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
VerticalSpecify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.

342 | Impress Guide 7.5

Snap
To snap lines
Snaps the edge of an object being dragged to the nearest snap line when the mousebutton is released. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Snap Lineson the Options toolbar.
To the page margins
Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. Thismode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Page Margins on the Options
toolbar.
To object frame
Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest
graphic object. The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap
range. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Object Border on the
Options toolbar.
To object points
Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest
graphic object. This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object isin the snap range. This mode can also be activated by clicking on Snap to Object
Points on the Options toolbar.
Snap range
Defines the snap distance between the cursor and the object contour. If the cursor isnearer than the distance specified, the cursor snaps to a snap point.
Constrain Objects
When creating or moving objects
Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°)
when creating or moving them. This setting can be temporarily deactivated by pressing
and holding the Shift key.
Extend edges
Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the
Shift key is pressed before releasing the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse
where a circle is created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse. When this option
is NOT selected, a square or a circle is created based on the shorter side or diameter.
When rotating
Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that isselected. If an object is to be rotated outside the defined angle, press and hold the Shift
key when rotating. Release the Shift key when the desired rotation angle is reached.
Point reduction
Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, this is useful to
reduce editing points.

Print options
Select LibreOffice Impress > Print (Figure 305) to specify print settings for a presentation. See
Chapter 10 Saving Slide Shows, Printing, E-mailing, and Exporting for more information about
printing and the options available.
Page Options
Default
Pages are printed at the default setting for printing.

Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress | 343

Figure 305: Options LibreOffice Impress dialog — Print pageFit to page
A slide is resized to fit the printed page, while maintaining the relative positions of theobjects on the slide.
Tile pages
Specifies that pages are printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller thanthe paper, several pages or slides are printed on one page of paper.
Brochure
Select this option to print the document in brochure format. Select Front to print fromthe front to the back of a brochure. Select Back to print from the back to the front of abrochure.
Paper tray from printer settings
When selected, the paper tray used is defined in the printer setup.
Print
Page name
When selected, the page name is printed.
Date
When selected, the current date is printed.
Time
When selected, the current time is printed.
Hidden pages
When selected, any hidden pages in the slide show are printed.
Quality
Default
When selected, the slides are printed in color.
Grayscale
When selected, the slides are printed as grayscale.
Black & white
When selected, the slides are printed in black and white.

344 | Impress Guide 7.5

Customizing user interface
Impress menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts can be customized by adding, deleting, or
modifying items in the menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts that are used when creating
slides and slide shows. For more information on customizing the user interface, see Chapter 12,
User Interface Variants, Appendix B, Toolbars, and the Getting Started Guide.

Adding extensions
An extension is a package that can be installed into LibreOffice Impress to add a new function.
Although individual extensions can be found in different places, the official LibreOffice extension
repository is at https://extensions.libreoffice.org/. Some extensions are free of charge, whilesome are available for a fee. Check the descriptions to see what licenses and fees apply to eachextension. For more information on extensions, see the Getting Started Guide.

Chapter 11, Setting Up and Customizing Impress | 345

Impress Guide 7.5

Chapter 12,
User Interface Variants

Introduction
By default, commands and tools used in LibreOffice Impress are grouped in a user interface
consisting of cascading menus and toolbars. The functions and use of these cascading menus
and toolbars are described in previous chapters of this user guide.
This chapter describes the user interface variants that are available for LibreOffice Impress. A
user then has the option to select the user interface that suits their requirements and methods ofcreating presentations in LibreOffice Impress.

Note
When changing the user interface, the variant can be applied only to LibreOffice
Impress, or applied to all the modules in LibreOffice.

Selecting a user interface
To select a user interface variant or switch between the user interface variants:
1) Go to View > User Interface on the Menu bar to open the Select Your Preferred User
Interface dialog (Figure 306).
2) In UI variants, select one of the variants. An example of the selected variant is shown in
the Preview box, along with a short description.
3) Click on Apply to Impress to immediately apply the variant selection to LibreOffice
Impress only, or click on Apply to All to immediately apply the user interface variant to all
the LibreOffice modules. The LibreOffice window changes to match the selected variant.
4) Click on Close to close the dialog.

Note
If the option Enable experimental features has been selected in the Tools >Options > Advanced dialog (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice> Advanced), several more variants appear in UI variants. Being experimental,
these variants are not described in this user guide.

Figure 306: Select Your Preferred Interface dialog

348 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 307: Standard User Interface dialog

Standard Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar user interface is the default view when LibreOffice is installed and theWorkspace opened for the first time. For more information on the Impress Workspace, see
Chapter 1, Introducing Impress. Figure 307 shows an example of the default Workspace view in
LibreOffice Impress consisting of the following:• Menu bar at the top of the Workspace.
• Standard and Line and Filling toolbars positioned below the Menu bar.
• Drawing toolbar positioned vertically on the left of the Workspace.
• Sidebar on the right of the Workspace.

TabbedThe Tabbed user interface provides a familiar interface for users coming from proprietary officesuites, for example, Microsoft Office. Every tab within this user interface consists of a set of tools
grouped by context. The context changes automatically depending on the LibreOffice moduleand the object selected. Figure 308 shows an example of the default Workspace view using the
Tabbed user interface in LibreOffice Impress.
It includes a Menu bar, a Tab bar, and tool icons grouped in context that would be normally usedin LibreOffice Impress. If the tool icons on a tab page do not fit into the width of the Impress
window, a double chevron >> appears at the right end of the row. Click on the double chevron >>to display more commands.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 349

Figure 308: Tabbed user interface

Figure 309: Quick Menu for Tabbed UIAt the left end of the Tab bar, an Icon bar (highlighted in Figure 308) is available giving access tosome commonly used tools — Menubar; Open (Ctrl+O); Save (Ctrl+S);Undo (Ctrl+Z); Redo
(Ctrl+Y); Start from First Slide (F5). In Windows and Linux operating systems, the Menu bar
can be hidden or displayed by clicking on Menubar at the left end of the Tab bar.
On the right of the Tab bar, a quick menu (Figure 309), indicated by 3 horizontal lines (≡), isavailable giving access to some commonly used commands and links. Some of the quick menu
items have submenus, indicated by a triangle ► or a single chevron > on the right.
The Tabbed user interface can be customized using the Notebookbar page of the Customize
dialog (Figure 310) to show or hide the individual tools on the various tabs. For more information
on customization of LibreOffice, see the Getting Started Guide and the Writer Guide.

350 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 310: Customize dialog — Notebookbar page

Note
When using the Tabbed user interface, the Impress toolbars are no longer visible.
If necessary, it is possible to open toolbars by going to View > Toolbars on the
Menu bar or select Toolbars on the quick menu.

Fixed tabs
File tab
The File tab (Figure 311) is a fixed tab providing commands to create new documents; open,
save, print, and close documents; manage templates; export to PDF and EPUB; display
document properties; add a digital signature; and sign an existing PDF. The File tab has twomenus: File and Help. The File tab menu contains the same commands as the tools available on
the tab and the Help tab menu provides links to a variety of resources.

Figure 311: Tabbed UI — File tab

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 351

Home tab
The Home tab (Figure 314) is a fixed tab providing commands to cut, copy, paste, and format
text; insert common items (for example images, tables, charts); apply, update, and edit drawing
styles; and so on. The Home tab menu at the right end of the Home tab bar provides additional
tools that are not on the tab.

Figure 312: Tabbed UI — Home tab

Insert tab
The Insert tab (Figure 316) is a fixed tab providing tools to insert many commonly used items.
The Insert menu at the right end of the Insert tab bar provides some of the same tools.

Figure 313: Tabbed UI — Insert tab

Layout tab
The Layout tab (Figure 318) is a fixed tab providing tools to create a slide layout. The Layout
menu at the right end of the Layout tab bar provides some of the same tools.

Figure 314: Tabbed UI — Layout tab

Slide Show tab
The Slide Show tab (Figure 315) is a fixed tab providing tools for creating a slide show. The
Slide Show menu at the right end of the Slide Show tab bar provides some of the same tools.

Figure 315: Tabbed UI — Slide Show tab

352 | Impress Guide 7.5

Review tab
The Review tab (Figure 316) is a fixed tab providing tools for reviewing a slide show. The
Review menu provides additional text editing tools. Some of these tools appear only if Asian orComplex Text Layout are selected in LibreOffice options.

Figure 316: Tabbed UI — Review tab

View tab
The View tab (Figure 317) is a fixed tab providing tools to control the display of slides on ascreen. The View menu provides additional tools relating to the slides display on a screen.

Figure 317: Tabbed UI — View tab

Extension tab
The Extension tab is a fixed tab containing only the Extension Manager tool. When selected, thistool opens the Extension Manager dialog allowing for installation and deletion of extensions thatare compatible with LibreOffice.

Tools tab
The Tools tab (Figure 318) is a fixed tab providing several tools for macros; color replacer; media
player; and so on. The Tools menu provides some of the same tools, plus extra tools fororganizing, for example, macros and dialogs; image map; data sources; and so on.

Figure 318: Tabbed UI — Tools tab

Additional tabs
Additional tabs appear between the View and Extension tabs when an applicable object in
Impress is selected.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 353

Draw tab
The Draw tab (Figure 319) becomes available when a drawing object is selected in a slide. It
provides tools for editing, transforming, grouping, aligning, and distributing draw objects. The
Draw tab menu provides some of the tools required for editing, transforming and converting
drawing objects.

Figure 319: Tabbed UI — Draw tab

Image tab
The Image tab (Figure 320) becomes available when an image is selected in a slide, for example
a photograph. It provides tools for working with images, such as cropping, borders, area styles,
colors, and so on. The Image tab menu provides links to dialogs for working with images.

Figure 320: Tabbed UI — Image tab

Object tab
The Object tab (Figure 321) becomes available when an object, such as a chart, is selected. It
provides tools to position, resize, choose colors, and so on for the selected object. The Object
tab menu provides two extra tools to name and describe the object.

Figure 321: Tabbed UI — Object tab

Figure 322: Tabbed UI — Table tab

354 | Impress Guide 7.5

Table tab
The Table tab (Figure 322) becomes available when a table is selected in a slide. It provides
tools to format a table to the presentation requirements. The Table tab menu includes extra tools
for editing a table.

Media tab
The Media tab (Figure 323) only becomes available when a media object is selected in a slide. It
provides tools for positioning and running an audio or video file. The Media tab menu includes
extra tools for editing a media object.

Figure 323: Tabbed UI — Media tab

Single Toolbar
When selected, the Single Toolbar user interface only shows the Menu bar and the Standard(Single Mode) toolbar, as shown in Figure 324. However, toolbars can be added to the userinterface by going to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and selecting the required toolbar fromthe options available. For more information on toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars in this guideand the Getting Started Guide.

Figure 324: Single Toolbar user interface

Sidebar
When selected, the Sidebar user interface only shows the Menu bar with no toolbars. However,toolbars can be added to the user interface by going to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar andselecting the required toolbar from the options available. For more information on toolbars, see
Appendix B, Toolbars in this guide and the Getting Started Guide.

Tabbed Compact
The Tabbed Compact user interface has the same tabs as the Tabbed user interface, but thetools on each tab are arranged as a single row of tools. Some of these tools have drop-downmenus with extra options. The tab menu on the right of the Tabbed Compact user interface
provides the same options as the tab menus in the Tabbed user interface. For more information
see “Tabbed” on page 349 for more information.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 355

Groupedbar Compact
The Groupedbar Compact user interface is divided into groups that contain commands
organized as sets of tools and menus. The tools and menus that are available change to suit thetype of object selected. If necessary, clicking on the double chevron >> displays more tools forediting an object. Figure 325 shows an example of Groupedbar Compact user interface.
The Menu on the right-hand end of the Groupedbar Compact interface provides extra tools forworking with LibreOffice Impress, including convenient ways to change the user interface andaccess toolbars.

Figure 325: Groupedbar Compact user interface

Contextual Single
The Contextual Single user interface displays a single toolbar to suit the type of object that has
been selected. If necessary, clicking on the double chevron >> displays more tools for editing an
object. Figure 326 shows an example of a Contextual Single user interface when a basic shape
object is selected.

Figure 326: Contextual Single user interface

356 | Impress Guide 7.5

Impress Guide 7.5

Appendix A,
Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
LibreOffice can be used without requiring a pointing device, such as a mouse or trackball, byusing the keyboard shortcuts that are available in Impress. Tasks as varied and complex as
docking and un-docking toolbars and windows, or changing the size or position of objects can all
be accomplished with using keyboard shortcuts. Although LibreOffice has an extensive set of
keyboard shortcuts, each LibreOffice module has keyboard shortcuts that are specific to thatmodule. For help with LibreOffice keyboard shortcuts, or using LibreOffice with a keyboard only,
search the LibreOffice Help using “shortcut” or “accessibility” as keywords.
In addition to using keyboard shortcuts that are listed in this appendix, keyboard shortcuts canalso be user defined. Assign keyboard shortcuts to standard Impress functions or macros andsave them for use with Impress only, or with the other modules in LibreOffice. To customize
keyboard shortcuts, see the Getting Started Guide for more information.

macOS keyboard shortcuts
Some keystrokes and menu items are different on a macOS computer from those used in
Windows or Linux computers. This due to the way the different operating systems work and thedifferent types of keyboards used. Also, the labelling on the keyboards may vary depending on
the age of the computer and style of keyboard being used. The following information shows themost common variations for keyboard shortcuts and keyboard labelling between Windows/Linuxand macOS.

Shift, Control and Alt keys
Windows or LinuxmacOS

Control or Ctrl

⌘ or Cmd or CommandAlt⌥ or Option or Alt

Shift or ⇧Shift or ⇧Caps Lock⇪ or Caps LockControl or Ctrl

⌃ or Control or Ctrl

Home and End keys
Windows or Linux

macOS

Home

Fn+Left ArrowEnd

Fn+Right Arrow

Page Up and Page Down
Windows or LinuxmacOS

Screen Up

Fn+Up Arrow

Page Up⌥ or Option or Alt+Fn+Up Arrow

Screen Down

Fn+Down Arrow

Page Down⌥ or Option or Alt+Fn+Down Arrow

358 | Impress Guide 7.5

Impress keyboard shortcuts
Note
Some keyboard shortcuts are not available for computers using macOS and are
indicated in the following tables by a blank cell.

Impress functions
Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectF2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text
Formatting toolbar.

F3

F3Enter and edit a group of objects.

Ctrl+F3⌘+F3

Exit a group of objects.

Shift+F3

Shift+F3

Opens the Duplicate dialog of a selected object.

F4F4Opens the Position and Size dialog of a selected
object.

Alt+Shift+F5⌥+Shift+F5

Opens Notes view and displays the first slide in theslide show.

Ctrl+Shift+F5⌘+Shift+F5

Opens the Navigator.

F7

F7

Start spelling checker.

Shift+F7

Shift+F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell checking.

Ctrl+F7⌘+F7

Opens the Thesaurus dialog for the language being
used. Impress has to be in text editing mode toaccess the thesaurus.

F8

F8

When selected, opens the Edit Points toolbar.

Ctrl+Shift+F8⌘+Shift+F8

Fit text to frame of a selected object.

F11

⌘+T

Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectF5F5Starts a slide show.

Shift+F5

Shift+F5

Starts a slide show at the slide where the slide show
was previously stopped at.

Left click

Left click

Shows the next slide, or plays the next animation
effect on a slide.

Right Arrow

Right Arrow

Shows the next slide, or plays the next animation
effect on a slide.

Page Down⌥+Fn+Down Arrow

Shows the next slide, or plays the next animation
effect on a slide.

Spacebar

SpacebarShows the next slide, or plays the next animation
effect on a slide.

Enter

Enter

Shows the next slide, or plays the next animation
effect on a slide.

Slide shows

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 359

Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectRight click

Right click

Shows the previous slide, or plays the previous
animation effect on a slide.

Left Arrow

Left Arrow

Shows the previous slide, or plays the previous
animation effect on a slide.

Up Arrow

Up Arrow

Shows the previous slide, or plays the previous
animation effect on a slide.

Page Up⌥+Fn+Up Arrow

Shows the previous slide, or plays the previous
animation effect on a slide.

Backspace

BackspaceShows the previous slide, or plays the previous
animation effect on a slide.

Home

Fn+Left Arrow

Go to first slide in the slide show.

End

Fn+Right Arrow

Go to the last slide in the slide show.

Alt+Page Up⌥+Fn+Up Arrow

Go to the previous slide without playing any animation
effects.

Alt+Page Down⌥+Fn+Down Arrow

Go to next slide without playing any animation effects.

B or . (period)

B or . (period)

Show black screen until next key or mouse wheel
event.

Esc or – (minus)

Esc or – (minus)

Stop and close the slide show.

[Number] Enter[Number] Enter

Type the number of a slide and press Enter to show
the slide.

Impress shortcuts
Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectPlus (+)

Plus (+)

Zoom in.

Minus (-)

Minus (-)

Zoom out.

Times (×) on
number pad

Times (*) on
number pad

Fits the slide to fill the Workspace view.

Divide (/) on
number pad

Divide (/) on
number pad

Zooms in on the selected object.

Ctrl+Shift+G⌘+Shift+G

Group selected objects.

Shift+Ctrl+Alt+G ⌘+Shift+⌥+G

Ungroup selected group.

Ctrl+click⌘+click

Enter a group to edit individual objects in the group.
Click outside the group to return to normal view.

Ctrl+Shift+G⌘+Shift+G

Combine selected objects.

Ctrl+Shift+Alt+K ⌘+Shift+⌥+K

Split a selected object that has been combinedfrom a group of two or more objects.

Ctrl++⌘++

Bring to front.

Ctrl +Shift++⌘+Shift++

Bring forward.

Ctrl+-⌘+-

Send backward.

Ctrl+Shift+-⌘+Shift+-

Send to back.

Arrow

Arrow

Moves a selected object in the direction of thearrow.

360 | Impress Guide 7.5

Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectCtrl+Arrow⌘+Arrow

Moves a slide within the Workspace when no
objects are selected.

Shift and dragShift and dragConstrains movement of a selected object horizontallyor vertically when dragged.

Shift and dragShift and dragHold down Shift, then click on a selection handle
and drag when resizing an object to maintain the
proportions of the object.

Ctrl+Click anddrag⌘+Click and dragHold down the Ctrl (⌘) key, then click and drag aselected object to create a copy of the object.

Alt+Click and drag ⌥+Click and dragHold down the Alt (⌥) key and draw or resize an
object from the centre of the object.

Alt+Click⌥+Click

Select an object that is behind the currently
selected object.

Alt+Shift+Click⌥+Shift+Click

Select an object that is in front of the currently
selected object.

Shift+Click

Shift+Click

Selects several adjacent objects or characters.
Click at the start of a selection, move to the end of
the selection, and then hold down Shift while you
click.

Tab

Tab

Select objects in the order in which they werecreated.

Shift+Tab

Shift+Tab

Select objects in the reverse order in which they
were created.

Esc

Esc

Exit current mode.

Page Up⌥+Fn+Up Arrow

Switch to the previous slide. No function on the firstslide.

Page Down⌥+Fn+Down Arrow

Switch to the next slide. No function on the lastslide.

Enter

Enter

Activate a place-holder object in a new presentation(only if the frame is selected).

⌘+EnterIf there are no text objects on the slide, or the last text
object is reached, a new slide is inserted after thecurrent slide. The new slide uses the same layout as
the current slide.

Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectCtrl+-⌘+-

Inserts a custom hyphen in text at the cursor position.
Also known as a soft hyphen.

Ctrl+Shift+-⌘+Shift+-

Inserts a non-breaking hyphen in text at the cursor
position. Also known as a hard hyphen.

Ctrl+Enter

Editing text

Ctrl+Shift+Space ⌘+Shift+Space

Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are notused for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text
is justified.

Shift+EnterLine break without paragraph change.

Shift+Enter

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 361

Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectLeft Arrow

Left Arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the left.

Shift+Left Arrow Shift+Left Arrow Moves the cursor one character to the left and selects
the character.

Ctrl+Left Arrow⌥+Left Arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous
word.

Ctrl+Shift+Left
Arrow⌥+Shift+Left

Arrow

Moves the cursor to the left and selects the word on
the left.

Right Arrow

Right Arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the right.

Shift+Right
Arrow

Shift+Right
Arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the right andselects the character.

Ctrl+Right Arrow ⌥+Right Arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.

Ctrl+Shift+Right ⌥+Shift+Right
Arrow
Arrow

Moves the cursor to the right and selects the word on
the right.

Up Arrow

Up Arrow

Moves the cursor up one line.

Shift+Up Arrow

Shift+Up Arrow

Moves the cursor up one line in the text and selects
the lines of text.

Ctrl+Up Arrow⌥+Up Arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.

Ctrl+Shift+Up
Arrow⌥+Shift+Up

Arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.
Selects the text in the paragraph from the cursor
position to the beginning of the paragraph.

Down Arrow

Down Arrow

Moves the cursor down one line.

Shift+Down Arrow Shift+Down Arrow Moves the cursor down one line in the text and selects
the lines of text.

Ctrl+Down Arrow⌘+Down Arrow

Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph.

Ctrl+Shift+Down
Arrow⌥+Shift+Down

Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph. Selects
the text in the paragraph from the cursor position to
the end of the paragraph.

Arrow

Home

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.

Shift+Home

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line andselects the text from the cursor position.

Ctrl+Home

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the text block on
the slide.

End

Moves the cursor to the end of the line.

Shift+End

Moves the cursor to the end of the line and selects the
text from the cursor position.

Ctrl+End

Moves the cursor to the end of the text block on theslide.

Ctrl+Del

Delete the text from the cursor position to the end of
the word.

Ctrl+Shift+Del

Delete the text from the cursor position to the end of
the sentence.

Ctrl+Backspace362 | Impress Guide 7.5⌘+Backspace

Delete the text from the cursor position to thebeginning of the word.

Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectCtrl+Shift+
Backspace⌘+Shift+

Delete the text from the cursor position to thebeginning of the sentence.

Backspace

Slide Sorter and Slide Pane
Windows or LinuxmacOS

EffectHome

Set the focus to the first slide.

End

Set the focus to the last slide.

Left Arrow

Left Arrow

Set the focus to the previous slide.

Right Arrow

Right Arrow

Set the focus to the next slide.

Ctrl+Shift+Down
Arrow⌘+Shift+Down

Ctrl+Shift+Up
Arrow⌘+Shift+Up

Arrow

Arrow

Move selected slides down one position in Slide
Sorter view. With multiple slides selected, the slides
are moved together with the last selected slide in thelist.
Move selected slides up one position in Slide Sorter
view. With multiple slides selected, the slides are
moved together with the first selected slide in the list.

Ctrl+Shift+End

Move selected slides to end of Slide Sorter list.

Ctrl+Shift+Home

Move selected slides to start of Slide Sorter list.

Enter

Change to Normal view with the active slide when in
Slide Sorter view. Add a new slide when in Slide
Pane.

Enter

Menu keyboard shortcuts
The keyboard shortcuts listed in the following tables are available in each menu category on the
Menu bar. The tables give the menu item or sub-item, operating system validity, and the effect or
purpose of the shortcut.

Note
The menus listed below are in the same order as displayed on the Menu bar fromleft to right.

File menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectNew >Presentation

Ctrl+N⌘+N

Opens a new presentation

New > Templates

Shift+
Ctrl+N⌘+Shift+N

Opens the Templates dialog

Open

Ctrl+O⌘+O

Opens a file browser for navigation to a folder
and selecting a document.

Save

Ctrl+S⌘+S

Saves the open document.

Save As

Ctrl+
Shift+S⌘+Shift+S

Opens the Save as file browser to save theopen document as a new document.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 363

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectPrint

Ctrl+P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog to select how the
document is printed

Exit LibreOffice

Ctrl+Q⌘+Q

Closes the open file and quits LibreOfficeMenu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectUndo

Ctrl+Z⌘+Z

Undoes the previous editing action.

Redo

Ctrl+Y⌘+Y

Reverses the action of the last Undo command.

Cut

Ctrl+X⌘+X

Deletes the selected object and places it on the
clipboard.

Copy

Ctrl+C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

Paste

Ctrl+V⌘+V

Places the object on the clipboard into the
document.

⌘+⌥+

Paste copied text at the cursor position without
any formatting.

Edit Menu

Paste Special >Ctrl+Shift+
Paste
Alt+V
Unformatted Text

Shift+V

Paste Special >Paste Special

Ctrl+
Shift+V⌘+Shift+V

Opens the Paste Special dialog to paste thecontents of the clipboard at the cursor position
in a format that is specified.

Select All

Ctrl+A⌘+A

Selects all objects on a slide.

Find

Ctrl+F⌘+F

Opens the Find toolbar⌥+⌘+F

Opens the Find and Replace dialog

Find and Replace Ctrl+H
Points

F8

F8Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is anobject on the slide that uses editable points, forexample a freeform line.

Edit Mode

Ctrl+
Shift+M⌘+Shift+M

Switches on or off the Impress edit mode.
When switched off, a slide show is displayed inread only mode.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectRulers

Ctrl+
Shift+R⌘+Shift+R

Switches the rulers off and on in theWorkspace.

SidebarCtrl+F5

Styles

F11⌘+T

Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.

Navigator

Ctrl+
Shift+F5⌘+Shift+F5

Opens the Navigator.

View menu

364 | Impress Guide 7.5

Opens or closes the Sidebar.

Insert menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectObject >Formula Object

Ctrl+Alt+=⌥+⌘+=

Inserts a formula into the slide

Text Box

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the
Text Formatting toolbar.

Comment

Ctrl+Alt+C⌘+⌥+C

Inserts a new comment box onto the selected
slide.

Hyperlink

Ctrl+K⌘+K

Opens the Hyperlink dialog.

Formatting Mark Ctrl+Shift+> Insert nonSpace
breaking space⌘+Shift+
Space

Inserts a non-breaking space at the cursor
position.

Formatting Mark Ctrl+> Insert Narrow
Shift+F5
No-break Space⌥+Shift+F5

Inserts a no-breaking space at the cursor
position.

Formatting Mark
Ctrl+/> No-width
Optional Break⌘+/Inserts a no-width no optional break at the
cursor position.

Format menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectText > Bold

Ctrl+B⌘+B

Applies Bold format to selected text.

Text > Italic

Ctrl+I⌘+I

Applies Italic format to selected text.

Text >
Superscript

Ctrl+
Shift+P⌘+⌥+C

Applies superscript format to selected text.

Text > Subscript

Ctrl+
Shift+B⌘+Shift+B

Applies subscript format to selected text.

Text > Increase
Size

Ctrl+]⌘+]

Increases the point size of selected text.

Text > Decrease
Size

Ctrl+[⌘+[

Decreases the point size of selected text.

Spacing > Line
Spacing 1

Ctrl+1⌘+1

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to a single
line.

Spacing Line
Spacing 5

Ctrl+5⌘+5

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to one andhalf lines.

Spacing > Line
Spacing 2

Ctrl+2⌘+2

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to twolines.

Align > Left

Ctrl+L⌘+L

Sets the paragraph alignment to left aligned.

Align > Center

Ctrl+E⌘+E

Sets the paragraph alignment to center aligned.

Align > Right

Ctrl+R⌘+R

Sets the paragraph alignment to right aligned.

Align > Justified

Ctrl+J⌘+J

Sets the paragraph alignment to justified.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 365

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows orLinux

Lists > Demote

Shift+Alt+
Right Arrow

Demotes a point to the next level when Outline
view.

Lists > Promote

Shift+Alt+
Left Arrow

Promotes a point to the next level when in
Outline view.

Lists > Move
Down

Shift+Alt+
Down Arrow⌥+Shift+

Lists > Move Up

Shift+Alt+
Up Arrow⌥+Shift+Up

Clear Direct
Formatting

Shift+
Ctrl+M

˄+Shift+M

Removes direct formatting from the selection.
Direct formatting is formatting that is applied
without using styles.

Styles > Manage
Styles

F11⌘+T

Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.

F4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

Object andShape > Position F4and SizemacOS

Down Arrow
Arrow

EffectMoves a point down the order when in Outline
view.
Moves a point up the order when in Outline
view.

Arrange > Bring
to Front

Ctrl+
Shift++⌘+Shift++

Moves a selected object to the front of otherobjects.

Arrange > Bring
Forward

Ctrl++⌘++

Moves a selected object in front of the forward
object.

Arrange > Send
Backward

Ctrl+-⌘+-

Moves a selected object behind the backward
object.

Arrange > Send
to Back

Ctrl+
Shift+-⌘+Shift+-

Moves a selected object to the back of otherobjects.

Group > Group

Ctrl+
Shift+G⌘+Shift+G

Group selected objects.

Group > Ungroup

Ctrl+Alt+
Shift+G⌘+ ⌥+Group > Enter
Group

F3

F3

Enter and edit a group of objects.

Group > ExitGroup

Ctrl+F3⌘+F3

Exit a group of objects.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectNew Slide

Ctrl+M

˄+M

Inserts a new slide into the slide show.

Jump to Last
Edited Slide

Alt+
Shift+F5⌥+Shift+F5

Opens the last slide edited in the document.

Move > Slide toStart

Ctrl+Shift+
Home

Move > Slide Up

Ctrl+Shift+
Up

Shift+G

Ungroup selected group.

Slide menu

366 | Impress Guide 7.5

Moves the selected slide to the beginning of theslide show.
⌘+Shift+Up

Arrow

Moves the selected slide above the previous
slide. No function on the first slide.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows orLinuxMove > Slide
Down

Ctrl+Shift+
Down

Move > Slide toEnd

Ctrl+Shift+End

Navigate > To
Previous Slide

Page UpUp Arrow

Switch to the previous slide. No function on thefirst slide.

Navigate > To
Next Slide

Page Down

Down Arrow

Switch to the next slide. No function on the lastslide.

macOS

Effect⌘+Shift+

Moves the selected slide below the next slide.
No function on the last slide.

Down Arrow

Moves the selected slide to the end of the slide
show.

Slide Show menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectStart from First
Slide

F5

F5

Starts a slide show from the first slide.

Start fromCurrent Slide

Shift+F5

Shift+F5

Starts a slide show at the slide where the slide
show was previously stopped at.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectSpelling

F7⌘+Shift+;Start spelling checker.

Automatic Spell
Checking

Shift+F7

Shift+F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell
checking.

Thesaurus

Ctrl+F7⌘+F7

Opens the Thesaurus dialog for the language
being used. Impress has to be in text editingmode to access the thesaurus.

Extension
Manager

Ctrl+Alt+E⌘+⌥+E

Opens the Extension Manager dialog.

Options

Alt+F12⌘+,

Opens the Options LibreOffice dialog.

Tools menu

Windows menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectCloses Window

Ctrl+W⌘+W

Closes the active window. If there is only one
window, LibreOffice Impress closes.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectLibreOffice Help

F1

F1

Opens the browser application at the
LibreOffice Help pages.

Help menu

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 367

Toolbar keyboard shortcuts
Impress provides several toolbars to help in creating slides and slide shows. Some of the toolson these Impress toolbars can be activated using a keyboard shortcut.

Note
The toolbars are listed in the same order that is displayed in the submenu that
opens when clicking on View > Toolbars on the Menu bar.

Drawing
Tool nameWindows, Linux, ormacOS

EffectInsert Text Box

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text
Formatting toolbar.

Position and Size

F4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a selected
object.

Points

F8

Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is an object on
the slide that uses editable points, for example afreeform line.

FindTool nameWindows orLinux

Find and Replace Ctrl+H

macOS

Effect⌥+⌘+F

Opens the Find and Replace dialog

macOS

EffectF4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

Form Design
Tool nameWindows orLinux

Position and Size F4Bring to Front

Ctrl+
Shift++⌘+Shift++

Moves a selected object to the front of otherobjects.

Send to Back

Ctrl+
Shift+-⌘+Shift+-

Moves a selected object to the back of otherobjects.

Group

Ctrl+
Shift+G⌘+Shift+G

Group selected objects.

Ungroup

Ctrl+Alt+
Shift+G⌘+⌥+

Enter GroupF3F3Enter and edit a group of objects.

Exit Group

Ctrl+F3⌘+F3

Exit a group of objects.

368 | Impress Guide 7.5

Shift+G

Ungroup selected group.

ImageTool nameWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectBring to Front

Ctrl+
Shift++⌘+Shift++

Moves a selected object to the front of otherobjects.

Bring Forward

Ctrl++⌘++

Moves a selected object in front of the forward
object.

Send Backward

Ctrl+-⌘+-

Moves a selected object behind the backward
object.

Send to Back

Ctrl+
Shift+-⌘+Shift+-

Moves a selected object to the back of otherobjects.

macOS

EffectF4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

Line and Filling
Tool nameWindows orLinux

Position and Size F4Bring to Front

Ctrl+
Shift++⌘+Shift++

Moves a selected object to the front of otherobjects.

Bring Forward

Ctrl++⌘++

Moves a selected object in front of the forward
object.

Send Backward

Ctrl+-⌘+-

Moves a selected object behind the backward
object.

Send to Back

Ctrl+
Shift+-⌘+Shift+-

Moves a selected object to the back of otherobjects.

Show the Styles
Sidebar

F11⌘+T

Opens the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

Tool nameWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectDemoteShift+Alt+
Right Arrow

Demotes a point to the next level when Outline
view.

PromoteShift+Alt+
Left Arrow

Promotes a point to the next level when in
Outline view.

Move Down

Shift+Alt+
Down Arrow⌥+Shift

Moves a point down the order when in Outline
view.

Move Up

Shift+Alt+
Up Arrow⌥+Shift+Up

Arrow

Moves a point up the order when in Outline
view.

Outline+Down Arrow

Slide Sorter
Tool nameWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectStart from First
Slide

F5

F5

Starts a slide show from the first slide

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 369

Standard
Tool nameWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectNew

Ctrl+N⌘+N

Opens a new presentation document.

Templates

Ctrl+
Shift+N⌘+Shift+N

Opens the Templates dialog to create a new
document using a template.

Open

Ctrl+O⌘+O

Opens the Open file browser so you cannavigate to a folder and select a document.

Save

Ctrl+S⌘+S

Saves the open document.

Save As

Ctrl+
Shift+S⌘+Shift+S

Opens the Save as file browser so you cansave the open document as a new document.

Edit Mode

Ctrl+
Shift+M⌘+Shift+M

Switches on edit mode when a document is inread only mode.

Print

Ctrl+P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog to select how the
document is printed.

Cut

Ctrl+X⌘+X

Deletes the selected object and places it on the
clipboard.

Copy

Ctrl+C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

Paste

Ctrl+V⌘+V

Places the object on the clipboard into the
document.

Clear Direct
Formatting

Ctrl+
Shift+M⌘+Shift+M

Removes direct formatting that has been
applied without using styles.

Undo

Ctrl+Z⌘+Z

Undoes the previous editing action.

Redo

Ctrl+Y⌘+Y

Reverses the action of the last Undo command.

⌘+⌥+F

Opens the Find and Replace dialog.

F7

Starts the spelling checker.

Toggle Automatic Shift+F7
Spell

Shift+F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell checking.

Start from First
Slide

F5

F5

Starts a slide show.

Start fromCurrent Slide

Shift+F5

Shift+F5

Starts a slide show at the slide where the slide
show was previously stopped at.

Insert Text Box

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text
Formatting toolbar.

Insert Hyperlink

Ctrl+K⌘+K

Opens the Hyperlink dialog.

Find and Replace Ctrl+H
Spelling

F7Standard (Single Mode)
Tool nameWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectNew

Ctrl+N⌘+N

Opens a new presentation document.

Open

Ctrl+O⌘+O

Opens the Open file browser for navigation to afolder and select a document.

Save

Ctrl+S⌘+S

Saves the open document.

370 | Impress Guide 7.5

Tool nameWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectPrint

Ctrl+P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog to select how the
document is printed

Undo

Ctrl+Z⌘+Z

Undoes the previous editing action.

Redo

Ctrl+Y⌘+Y

Reverses the action of the last Undo command.

Insert Text Box

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text
Formatting toolbar.

Position and Size F4

F4Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

⌘+Shift+G

Group selected objects.

Group

Ctrl+
Shift+G

Ungroup

Ctrl+Alt+
Shift+G⌘+⌥+

Enter GroupF3F3Enter and edit a group of objects.

Exit Group

Ctrl+F3⌘+F3

Exit a group of objects.

Start from First
Slide

F5

F5

Starts a slide show from the first slide.

Start fromCurrent Slide

Shift+F5

Shift+F5

Starts a slide show at the slide where the slide
show was previously stopped at.

Shift+G

Ungroup selected group.

Standard (Viewing Mode)
Tool nameWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectSave As

Ctrl+
Shift+S⌘+Shift+S

Opens the Save as file browser to save theopen document as a new document.

Edit Mode

Ctrl+
Shift+M⌘+Shift+M

Switches on edit mode when a document is inread only mode.

Print

Ctrl+P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog to select how the
document is printed.

Copy

Ctrl+C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

Find and Replace Ctrl+H⌘+⌥+F

Opens the Find and Replace dialog.

Start from First
Slide

F5

F5

Starts a slide show from the first slide.

Tool nameWindows or
Linux

macOS

EffectInsert Text Box

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text
Formatting toolbar.

Text

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 371

Impress Guide 7.5

Appendix B,
Toolbars

Introduction
In Impress there are several toolbars available to help in creating a presentation. Each toolbar
has a default set of tools and an option to add additional tools to a toolbar.

Note
The icons displayed in the Impress toolbars illustrated in this appendix may differ
from what is displayed on a computer screen. Toolbar icons depend on thecomputer operating system being used and how LibreOffice has been set up. For
more information on customizing LibreOffice and the toolbars, see the Getting
Started Guide.

Using toolbars
Displaying toolbars
There are two methods of opening toolbars in Impress, which are as follows:• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar. A submenu opens with an alphabetical list of
toolbars available for creating presentations in LibreOffice Impress. Click on a toolbarname to display it and make it active. Active toolbars are indicated by highlighting or acheck mark next to the toolbar name.
• When selecting some tools on a toolbar, a toolbar may open providing more tools to edit
an object. For example, clicking on Color in the Image toolbar opens the Color toolbar toadjust the color settings of an image.

Note
Some toolbars when selected do not display until an object of the correct type isselected in a presentation. For example, the Image toolbar only displays when an
image is selected.

Closing toolbars
To close a toolbar, use one of the following methods:• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and deselect the toolbar.
• Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar and select Close Toolbar from the context menu.
• Click on the X in the right corner of the title bar of a floating toolbar.

Moving toolbars
Docked toolbars
By default, some toolbars are docked into position in the Impress main window. For example, theStandard toolbar is docked at the top of the main window. Docked toolbars can be undocked andmoved to a new docked position on the main window or left as a floating toolbar.
1) Move the cursor over the small vertical handle at the left end of the toolbar (highlighted in
Figure 327). The cursor changes to the moving cursor used for the computer system andsetup.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 373

Figure 327: Toolbar moving handles
2) Click and drag the toolbar to a new location. This can be a new docked position, or a
floating toolbar. A hashed border appears around the toolbar indicating the toolbar position
as it is dragged.
3) Release the cursor when the required position is reached.

Note
If the small vertical bar is not visible at the left end of a docked toolbar, then the
toolbar is locked into position. A docked toolbar must be unlocked before it can be
moved to a new position in the Impress main window. See “Locking toolbars” onpage 375 for more information.

Floating toolbars
1) To move a floating toolbar, click on its title bar and drag it to a new floating location.
2) Release the cursor when the toolbar is in the required position.

Note
A floating toolbar does not have to be positioned on the Impress main window for
it to function.

Floating sub-toolbars
Some tools on a toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool indicating that more tools areavailable on a sub-toolbar, for example Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar. Sub-toolbars canbe turned into floating toolbars and moved into a new position as follows:
1) Move the cursor over the horizontal handle at the top of the toolbar (highlighted in
Figure 328). The cursor changes to the moving cursor used for the computer system andsetup.
2) Click and drag the toolbar to a new location to create a floating sub-toolbar.
3) Release the cursor when the required position is reached.

Figure 328: Creating floating sub-toolbar

374 | Impress Guide 7.5

4) To close the floating sub-toolbar, right-click on the triangle ▼ in the sub-toolbar title bar
and select Close Toolbar from the context menu, or click on the X at the right end of the
sub-toolbar title bar.

Docking toolbar
To dock a floating toolbar, use one of the following methods:• Click on the title bar and drag it to the top, bottom, left side, or right side of the main
window. When the toolbar reaches a docking position, a hashed border appears at thedocked position. Release the cursor and the toolbar is docked.
• Right-click on the toolbar and select Dock Toolbar from the context menu. The toolbar
moves into a docked position. If the position is not suitable, move the toolbar to a new
docked position.
• To dock all floating toolbars that are active, right-click on the toolbar and select Dock All
Toolbars from the context menu.

Locking toolbars
Docked toolbars
When a toolbar has been docked into position on the Impress main window, the toolbar can also
be locked into position preventing the toolbar from becoming a floating toolbar.
•

To lock a toolbar into a docked position, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar andselect Lock Toolbar Position from the context menu. A check mark appears against thisoption indicating the toolbar is now locked. A small vertical or horizontal bar disappears
from the left end or top of the toolbar indicating that the toolbar is locked.
• To unlock a toolbar, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and click on Lock Toolbar
Position in the context menu. The check mark next to this option disappears indicating
the toolbar is now unlocked. A small vertical or horizontal bar appears at the left end or
top of the toolbar indicating that the toolbar is unlocked. This bar is also is used to movethe toolbar.

Note
Some toolbars cannot be docked or locked into position. This is indicated by the
options Dock Toolbar and/or Lock Toolbar Position being grayed out, making
the options unavailable.

Locking sub-toolbars
To prevent sub-toolbars from becoming floating sub-toolbars, sub-toolbars have to be locked asfollows:
1) Save the presentation that is open in Impress, then go to View > Toolbars on the Menu
bar and select Lock Toolbars from the submenu.
2) Select Restart Now in the Restart LibreOffice dialog that opens to activate the Lock
Toolbars option.
3) To unlock sub-toolbars so they can become floating sub-toolbars, repeat Steps 1 thru 3.
The Lock Toolbars option is an on/off switch.

Note
Using the Lock Toolbars option affects ALL toolbars and sub-toolbars available
in all LibreOffice modules.
Appendix B, Toolbars | 375

Editing toolbars
When LibreOffice is installed on a computer, it includes a set of toolbars suitable for each
LibreOffice component. Each toolbar has a default set of visible tools. Tools can be added ordeleted, and toolbars can be customized.

Adding tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of thetoolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool required and the tool appears in the toolbar. The list of available tools
closes automatically. If there is a highlight or check mark next to the tool, then that tool isalready installed on the toolbar.

Note
When adding tools using Visible Buttons, the tool is added to the toolbar at thesame position as the tool appears in the Visible Buttons list. That is, the top toolin Visible Buttons appears at the left end of the toolbar and the bottom tool
appears at the right end of the toolbar. Tool positions on a toolbar cannot bechanged.

Deleting tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of thetoolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool no longer required and the tool is removed from the toolbar. The highlightor check mark next to the tool is also removed. The list of available tools closes
automatically.

Customizing toolbars
Extra tools and commands that are not available in Visible Buttons can be added to a toolbar
using customization. Customization also allows the creation of new toolbars if a specific set oftools are required for a specific task. For information on customizing toolbars, see the Getting
Started Guide.

Toolbars
The following bullet points provide information on the toolbars available for creating presentations
in Impress:• The number of tools visible on a toolbar depend on the computer setup that is being used
to create a presentation.
• The tools displayed on the toolbars in this chapter are examples only
• The tools already installed on a toolbar are indicated in Visible Buttons either by the toolicon being highlighted or by a check mark. This install indication depends on computer
setup and computer operating system being used.
• On some toolbars, tool icons may have a triangle ▼ to the right of the icon. Click on thistriangle to open a list of options, a toolbar, or a sub-toolbar.

376 | Impress Guide 7.5

• Some tools also have the option of using a keyboard shortcut instead of clicking on thetool. For a full list of keyboard shortcuts that are available in Impress, see Appendix A,
Keyboard Shortcuts.

3D-Objects
The 3D-Objects toolbar (Figure 329) provides tools to create 3D objects in a slide. It is activatedby going to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar. Alternatively, click on the triangle ▼next to 3D-Objects on the Drawing toolbar to open a sub-toolbar giving access to the same 3D
tools.

Figure 329: 3D-Objects toolbar
The tools available on the 3D-Objects toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)

Cube
SphereCylinder

4)
5)
6)

Cone
Pyramid
Torus

7)
8)

Shell
Half Sphere

Note
The 3D-Objects toolbar is also available as a sub-toolbar on the Drawing toolbar.
See “Drawing” on page 379 for more information.

3D-Settings
The 3D-Settings toolbar (Figure 330) and its tools only become active when an object has been
converted to 3D using the tool Toggle Extrusion and the converted object is selected.

Figure 330: 3D-Settings toolbar
The tools available on the 3D-Settings toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Toggle Extrusion
Tilt Down
Tilt Up
Tilt Left

5)
6)
7)
8)

Tilt Right
Depth
Direction
Lighting

9)10)

Surface
3D Color

The following tools on the 3D-Settings toolbar have a triangle ▼ on the right of the icon. Click on
this triangle to open a drop-down menu giving access to various options as follows:
Depth
3D extrusion depth — 0cm; 1cm; 2.5cm; 5cm; 10cm; Infinity; Custom. The measurement
unit depends on the ruler settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Impress > General(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Impress > General).
Direction
3D extrusion direction and type — Parallel; Perspective.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 377

• Top — vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is
Lighting selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page
Lighting
direction and lighting level of 3D extrusion — Bright; Normal; Dim.
margin.
Surface• Centre — vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw orSurfacetype ofextrusion
Wire isFrame;
Matt;
Plastic;
Metal.
Impress,
the3D
centreof the—object
alignedto theverticalcentre of the page.
3D Color• Bottom — vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object isColorselectedof 3D extrusion.
Selecta coloroneedgeof thepalettes.
in Draw or
Impress,
thefrombottomof available
the objectcolor
is aligned
to the lower pagemargin.

Align Objects
The Comments
Align Objects toolbar (Figure 331) provides tools for aligning several objects in a slide to

improve the visual impact of objects on a slide.
The Comments toolbar (Figure 332) provides tools for adding, deletion, and navigation ofcomments in a presentation. To use comments, it is recommended to add the name and initials of
all users in Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > User Data) so that comments can be easily identified.
Figure 331: Align Objects toolbar
The tools available on the Align Objects toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
Figure 332: Comments toolbar
The tools available on the Comments toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)Comment
Previous Comment

3)
4)

Next Comment
Delete Comment

5)

Delete All Comments

Distribute Selection
The Distribute Selection toolbar (Figure 333) provides tools to distribute three or more selected
objects evenly along the horizontal axis or vertical axis. Also, the spacing between objects can beevenly distributed.

Figure 333: Distribute Selection toolbar
The tools available on the Distribute Selection toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)

Distribute Horizontally Left
Distribute Horizontally
CenterDistribute Horizontally
Spacing

4)
5)6)Distribute Horizontally
Right
Distribute Vertically Top
Distribute Vertically Center

7)
8)

Distribute Vertically
Spacing
Distribute Vertically Bottom

The tools available on the Distribute Selection toolbar provide the following options:• Distribute Horizontally Left — distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges ofthe objects are evenly spaced from one another.
•

Distribute Horizontally Center — distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal
centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.

378 | Impress Guide 7.5

•Distribute Horizontally Spacing — distributes the selected objects horizontally, so thatthe objects are evenly spaced from one another.

•

Distribute Horizontally Right — distributes the selected objects, so that the right edgesof the objects are evenly spaced from one another.

•

Distribute Vertically Top — distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of theobjects are evenly spaced from one another.

•

Distribute Vertically Center — distributes the selected objects, so that the verticalcenters of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.

•

Distribute Vertically Spacing — distributes the selected objects vertically, so that theobjects are evenly spaced from one another.

•

Distribute Vertically Bottom — distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom
edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.

Drawing
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 334) provides the majority of the tools normally used to creategraphic objects on slides in a presentation. By default, this toolbar is normally docked on the left
side of the Workspace.
Some tool shapes on the Drawing toolbar change depending on the last tool that was previously
selected and used.
• Where available, click on the triangle ▼ to the right of a tool to open a sub-toolbar, thenselect the required shape to add to a drawing. For more information on sub-toolbars, see“Sub-toolbars” on page 392.
•

To create a floating sub-toolbar, click on the handle (Figure 328 on page 374) at the topof the pop-up toolbar and drag to an empty area on the main window.

Figure 334: Drawing toolbar
The tools available on the Drawing toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)

SelectZoom & Pan
Zoom
Text Box
Vertical Text
Insert Fontwork
Line Color
Fill ColorLine
Rectangle
EllipseLine Ends with Arrow
Lines and Arrows
Curves and Polygons
Connectors
Basic Shapes
Symbol Shapes

18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)

Block Arrows (Arrow
28)
Shapes in Visible Buttons))
Flowchart (Flowchart
Shapes in Visible Buttons)
Callouts (Callout Shapes in 29)
Visible Buttons)
30)
Stars and Banners (StarShapes in Visible Buttons) 31)
3D Objects
32)
Position and Size
Rotate33)
Flip
Align Objects
Arrange
34)
35)
36)
37)

Select at least threeobjects to distribute(Distribution in Visible
Buttons)
Shadow
Crop Image (Crop in
Visible Buttons)
FilterPoints F8 (Edit Points in
Visible Buttons)
Show Gluepoint Function(Gluepoints in Visible
Buttons)
To Curve
To Polygon
To 3D
T0 3D Rotation Object

Appendix B, Toolbars | 379

38)

Toggle Extrusion

39)

Insert40)

Controls

Edit Points
The Edit Points toolbar (Figure 335) provides tools for editing the points of a curve or polygon, oran object that has been converted to a curve or polygon. The toolbar only becomes active whenan object is selected and one of the following methods is used to open the toolbar:• Click on Edit Points on the Drawing or Standard toolbar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F8.

Figure 335: Edit Points toolbar
The tools available on the Edit Points toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Edit Points
Move Points
Insert Points
Delete Points

5)
6)
7)
8)

Convert to Curve
Close Bezier
Split Curve
Corner Point

9)
10)
11)

Smooth Transition
Symmetric Transition
Eliminate Points

Find
The Find toolbar (Figure 336) opens by default and is docked in the bottom left corner of the
Impress main window above the Status bar. However, it can be undocked and made into afloating toolbar.

Figure 336: Find toolbar
The tools available on the Find toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)

Close Find Bar
Find Text
Find Previous

4)
5)
6)

Find Next
Find All
Match Case7)

Find and Replace

Fontwork
The Fontwork toolbar (Figure 337) is used to create graphical text objects in a slide and provide
the tools for editing the graphical text object. This toolbar only becomes active when a Fontwork
graphical text object in a slide has been selected.

Figure 337: Fontwork toolbar
The tools available on the Fontwork toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
380 | Impress Guide 7.5

1)2)

Insert Fontwork Text
Fontwork Shape

3)
4)

Fontwork Same Letter
Heights
Fontwork Alignment

5)

Fontwork Character
Spacing
Toggle Extrusion

6)

Some tools on the Fontwork toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool. Click on the triangle
to open a pop-up toolbar, or drop-down option list.
Fontwork Shape
Select the required shape for the Fontwork graphical text object from the options
available.
Fontwork Alignment
Select the paragraph alignment from the options available.
Fontwork Character Spacing
Select the required character spacing from the options available.

Form Controls
The Form Controls toolbar (Figure 338) provides the tools required to create an interactive form.
This allows controls to be added to a form in a text, drawing, spreadsheet, presentation, or HTML
document (for example a button that opens another presentation or slide).

Figure 338: Form Controls toolbar
The tools available on the Form Controls toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

SelectDesign Mode
Toggle Form Control
Wizards
Form Design
Control Properties
Form Properties
Label
Text Box
Check Box

10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)

Option Button
List Box
Combo Box
Push Button
Image Button
Formatted Field
Date Field
Numerical Field
Group BoxTime Field

20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)

Currency Field
Pattern Field
Table Control
Navigation Bar
Image Control
File Selection
Spin Button
Scrollbar

Form Design
The Form Design toolbar (Figure 339) opens a form in Design Mode so that it can be edited.
Controls of the form cannot be activated or its contents edited when in Design Mode. However,the position and size of the controls can be changed, other properties edited, and added ordeleted controls in Design Mode.

Figure 339: Form Design toolbar
The tools available on the Form Design toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)

SelectControl Properties

3)
4)

Form Properties
Position and Size

5)
6)Form Navigator
Activation OrderAppendix B, Toolbars | 381

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)

Add Field
Automatic Control Focus
Bring to Front
Send to Back
Group

12)
13)
14)
15)
16)

UngroupEnter Group
Exit Group
Align Objects
Open in Design Mode

17)
18)
19)

Display Grid
Snap to Grid
Helplines While Moving

Form Navigation
The Form Navigation toolbar (Figure 340) provides tools to edit a database table or control thedata view. The toolbar is normally displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields thatare linked to a database. This toolbar is only active when forms are connected to a database,which is why an inactivate toolbar is shown in Figure 340.
The Form Navigation toolbar also allows movement within records as well as inserting anddeleting records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. This
toolbar also provides tools providing sort, filter, and search functions for data records.

Figure 340: Form Navigation toolbar
The tools available on the Form Navigation toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

Find Record
RecordAbsolute Record
Text -> Record
Total No. of Records
First Record
Previous Record
Next Record

9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)

Last Record
New Record
Save Record
Undo: Data entry
Delete Record
RefreshRefresh Control
Sort

17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)

Sort Ascending
Sort Descending
AutoFilter
Apply Filter
Form-Based Filters
Reset Filter/Sort
Data source as Table

Glue Points
The Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 341) provides tools to insert a glue point or modify the propertiesof a glue point. A glue point is a point where a connector is attached to an object. By default,
LibreOffice automatically places a glue point at the center of each side of the bounding rectangle
for every object created.

Figure 341: Gluepoints toolbar
The tools available on the Gluepoints toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Insert Glue Point
Exit Direction Left
Exit Direction Top
Exit Direction Right
Exit Direction Bottom

382 | Impress Guide 7.5

6)
7)
8)
9)

Glue Point Relative
10)
Glue Point Horizontal Left 11)
Glue Point Horizontal
12)
CenterGlue Point Horizontal Right

Glue Point Vertical Top
Glue Point Vertical Center
Glue Point Vertical Bottom

ImageThe Image toolbar (Figure 342) provides tools to edit, modify, align, reposition and resize images.
The toolbar only becomes active and available when an image is selected in a presentation. The
Image toolbar automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar when it becomes active.

Figure 342: Image toolbar
The tools available on the Image toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Position and Size
Align Objects
Left
Centered
Right
Top
Center
BottomArrange
Bring to Front
Bring Forward
Send Backward

13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)

Send to BackIn Front of Object
Behind Object
ReverseLine Style
Line WidthLine Color
Area Style/Filling
Fill Color
Shadow
FilterImage Mode

25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)

Crop
Vertically
Horizontally
Transformations
Transparency
Color
Line
Area
Animation
Interaction

InsertThe Insert toolbar (Figure 343) provides tools to insert different types of objects into a slide.

Figure 343: Insert toolbar
The tools available on the Insert toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

New Page
Floating Frame
Insert Page from File
Table

5)
6)
7)

Image
Insert Audio or Video(Media in Visible Buttons)
Formula Object

8)
9)

Chart
OLE Object

Legacy Circles and Ovals
The Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar (Figure 344) provides tools to insert different types ofcircles and ovals into a drawing.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 383

Figure 344: Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar
The tools available on the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar in Visible Buttons are numberedfrom left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Insert Ellipse
CircleEllipse Pie
Circle Pie
Ellipse Segment

6)
7)
8)
9)
10)

Circle Segment
Ellipse, Unfilled
Circle, Unfilled
Ellipse Pie, Unfilled
Circle Pie, Unfilled

11)
12)
13)
14)

Ellipse Segment, Unfilled
Circle Segment, Unfilled
Arc
Circle Arc

Legacy Rectangles
The Legacy Rectangles toolbar (Figure 345) provides tools to insert different types of rectangles
and squares into a slide.

Figure 345: Legacy Rectangles toolbar
The tools available on the Legacy Rectangles toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)

Insert Rectangle
SquareRectangle, Rounded

4)
5)
6)

Rounded Square
Rectangle, Unfilled
Square, Unfilled

7)8)Rounded Rectangle,
Unfilled
Rounded Square, UnfilledLine and Filling
The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 346) provides tools and drop-down lists for editing lines,
arrows, and object borders. The tools available vary depending on the type of object selected forediting.

Figure 346: Line and Filling toolbar
The tools available on the Line and Filling toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

Position and Size
Align Objects
Left
CenteredRightTop

384 | Impress Guide 7.5

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Center
BottomArrange
Bring to Front
Bring Forward
Send Backward

13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)

Send to BackIn Front of Object
Behind Object
ReverseLine Style
Line Width

19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)

Line Color
Area Style/Filling
Fill Color
ShadowArrow Style
Vertically

25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)

Horizontally
Transformations
Line
Area
3D Effects
Image Map

31)
32)
33)
34)
35)

Animation
Interaction
Show the Styles Sidebar
Display Grid
Helplines While Moving

Master View
The Master View toolbar (Figure 348) provides tools to create a new master slide, rename amaster slide, delete a master slide, and close master view. This toolbar is only active when
Impress is in master view.

Figure 347: Master View toolbar
The tools available on the Master View toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)

New Master
Rename Master

3)
4)

Delete Master
Close Master View

Media Playback
The Media Playback toolbar (Figure 349) provides the tools required to insert, view, play, andlisten to audio and video files. The toolbar only becomes active when an audio or video file isselected. Impress supports many different media formats depending on the computer operating
system being used.

Figure 348: Media Playback toolbar
The tools available on the Media Playback toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)

Insert Audio or Video
Play
Pause

4)
5)
6)

Stop
RepeatPosition

7)
8)
9)

Mute
VolumeView

Options
The Options toolbar (Figure 350) provides tools for editing various settings for newly createdpresentations, for example how objects snap to the grid when being moved or resized.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 385

Figure 349: Options toolbar
The tools available on the Options toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Rotation Mode after
Clicking Object
Display Grid
Display Snap Guides
Helplines While Moving
Snap to Grid

6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)

Snap to Snap Guides
Snap to Page Margins
Snap to Object Borders
Snap to Object Points
Allow Quick Editing
Select Text Area Only

12)
13)
14)

Double-click to edit Text
Modify Object with
Attributes
Exit All Groups

OutlineThe Outline toolbar (Figure 351) provides tools for working with outlines.

Figure 350: Outline toolbar
The tools available on the Outline toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

DemotePromoteMove Down
Move Up

5)
6)
7)
8)

Show Formatting
Black & White View
Show Only First Level
Show All Levels

9)10)

Hide Subpoints
Show Subpoints

Presentation
The Presentation toolbar (Figure 352) provides tools for working with presentations.

Figure 351: Presentation toolbar
The tools available on the Presentation toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

New Slide
Duplicate Slide
Rename Slide
Delete Slide
Slide Layout

6)
7)
8)
9)
10)

Change Slide Master
Expand Slide
Go to First Slide
Go to Previous Slide
Go to Next Slide

11)
12)
13)
14)
15)

Go to Last Slide
Move Slide to Start
Move Slide Up
Move Slide Down
Move Slide to End

Slide Sorter
The Slide Sorter toolbar (Figure 353) allows selection of slides in the current presentation andstart a presentation from the first slide.

386 | Impress Guide 7.5

Figure 352: Slide Sorter toolbar
The tools available on the Slide Sorter toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)

Select2)

Start from First Slide

Slide View
The Slide View toolbar (Figure 354) opens with the Slide Sorter view and provides tools torehearse timings of a slide show; hide and show slides, and change the number of slides
displayed in Slide Sorter view.

Figure 353: Slide View toolbar
The tools available on the Slide View toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)

Rehearse Timings
Show Slide

3)
4)

Hide Slide
Slides per Row

Standard
The Standard toolbar (Figure 355) is common to all LibreOffice modules and provides tools forcreating and editing documents using LibreOffice. The Standard toolbar differs between different
LO modules to allow for different toolsets used in creating the different types of documents.

Figure 354: Standard toolbar
The tools available on the Standard toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)

Load URL
New
Templates
Open
Open Remote
Save
Save As
Email
Edit Mode
Export Directly as PDF
Print Directly
Print
Cut
Copy
Paste

16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)

Clone Formatting (Clone in
Visible Buttons)
Clear
Undo
Redo
Find and Replace
Spelling)
Auto Spellcheck
Zoom & Pan
Zoom
Display Grid (Grid in
Visible Buttons)
Helplines While Moving
Display Views
Views Tab Bar

29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)
35)
36)
37)
38)
39)

Format Slide
Master Slide
Start from First Slide
Start from Current Slide
Table
Insert Image (Image in
Visible Buttons)
Insert Audio or Video(Media in visible Buttons)
Insert Chart (Chart in
Visible Buttons)
Text Box
Insert Special Characters(Symbol in Visible Buttons)
Vertical Text

Appendix B, Toolbars | 387

40)
41)

Insert Fontwork Text
42)
Insert Hyperlink (Hyperlink
in Visible Buttons)

Show Draw Functions(Draw Functions in Visible
Buttons)

43)
44)
45)

Interaction
LibreOffice Help
What’s That

Standard (Single Mode)
The Standard (Single Mode) toolbar (Figure 355) can be used instead of the Standard toolbar ifnecessary. The Standard (Single Mode) toolbar is normally used when the user interface isswitched to single mode. For more information on selecting and using user interface variants, see
Chapter 12, User Interface Variants.

Figure 355: Standard (Single Mode) toolbar
The tools available on the Standard (Single Mode) toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered fromleft to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)

New
Open
Save
Export Directly as PDF
Print
Print Preview
Undo
Redo
Find and Replace
Clone Formatting (Clone in
Visible Buttons)
Spelling
Entire Page
New Slide
Duplicate Slide
Rename Slide
Delete Slide
Slide Layout
Display Views
Text Box
Vertical Text
Insert Image (Image in
Visible Buttons)

388 | Impress Guide 7.5

22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)
35)
36)
37)

Insert Audio or Video
38)(Media in visible Buttons)
39)
Insert Chart (Chart in40)
Visible Buttons)
41)
Table
42)
Insert Fontwork
43)
Insert Line (Line in visible 44)
Buttons)
Rectangle
EllipseLines and Arrows
45)
Curves and Polygons
46)
Connectors
47)
Basic Shapes
48)
Symbol Shapes
49)
Block Arrows (Arrow
50)
Shapes in Visible Buttons) 51)
Flowchart (Flowchart
52)
Shapes in Visible Buttons) 53)
Callouts (Callout Shapes in 54)
Visible Buttons)
Stars and Banners (StarShapes in Visible Buttons

3D Objects
Position and Size
RotateFlip
Align Objects
Arrange
Select at least threeobjects to distribute(Distribution in Visible
Buttons)Group
UngroupEnter Group
Exit Group
SelectEntire Page
Zoom & Pan
Zoom
Start from First Slide
Start from Current SlideStandard (Viewing Mode)
The Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar (Figure 356) provides tools to save, edit and distribute a
document.

Figure 356: Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar
The tools available on the Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar in Visible Buttons are numberedfrom left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Save As
Edit Mode
Read Only Mode
Attach to Email (Email in
Visible Buttons)

5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

Export Directly as PDF
EPUB
Print Directly
Print
Copy

10)
11)
12)

Find and Replace
Zoom
Start from First Slide

Table
The Table toolbar (Figure 357) provides tools and options to edit and format a table placed on aslide. This toolbar only becomes active when a table is selected.

Figure 357: Table toolbar
The tools available on the Table toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

Table
Border Style
Border Color
Borders (Shift to overwrite)
Area Style/Filling
Fill Color
Merge Cells
Split Cells
Optimize

10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)

Align Top (Top in Visible
Buttons)
Center Vertically (Center in
Visible Buttons)
Align Bottom (Bottom in
Visible Buttons)
Insert Row Above
Insert Row Below
Insert Column Before

16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)

Insert Column After
Delete Row
Delete Column
Delete Table
Select Table
Select Column
Select Row
Table Design
Table Properties

Text
The Text toolbar (Figure 358) provides tools to insert text boxes and callouts into a slide.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 389

Figure 358: Text toolbar
The tools available on the Text toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)2)

Insert Text Box (Text Box in
Visible Buttons)
Fit Text in Textbox Size

3)
4)

Callouts
Insert Vertical Text (Vertical
Text in Visible Buttons)

5)
6)

Fit Vertical Text to Frame
Vertical Callouts

Text Formatting
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 359) provides tools for formatting text and alignmentcommands. This toolbar becomes active when text in a text box or graphic object has been
selected and it automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar.

Figure 359: Text Formatting toolbar
The tools available on the Text Formatting toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)

Font Name
16)
Font Size
17)
Increase Font Size
18)
(Increase in Visible
19)
Buttons)20)
Decrease Font Size
(Decrease in Visible
21)
Buttons)
Bold
Italic22)
Underline
Double Underline
Strikethrough23)
Overline
24)
Superscript
Subscript
25)
Toggle Shadow (Shadow in
Visible Buttons)
26)
Apply outline attribute tofont (Outline Font Effect in 27)
Visible Buttons)
28)
Clear Direct Formatting(Clear in Visible Buttons)

390 | Impress Guide 7.5

lowercase
29)
UPPERCASE
small capitals
30)
Font Color
Character Highlighting
31)
Color
Toggle Unordered List
32)
(Unordered List in Visible
33)
Buttons)
Toggle Ordered List
(Ordered List in Visible
34)
Buttons)
Outline Format
Align Left (Left in Visible
35)
Buttons)
Align Center (Center in
36)
Visible Buttons)
Align Right (Right in Visible 37)
Buttons)38)
Justified
39)
Align Top (Top in Visible
40)
Buttons)
41)

Center Vertically (Center in
Visible Buttons)
Align Bottom (Bottom in
Visible Buttons)
Set Line Spacing (LineSpacing in Visible Buttons)
Character Spacing
Increase ParagraphSpacing (Increase in
Visible Buttons)
Decrease ParagraphSpacing (Decrease in
Visible Buttons)
Text direction from left toright
Text direction from top tobottomLeft-To-Right
Right-To-Left
Select All
Character
ParagraphTransformations
The Transformations toolbar (Figure 360) provides tools to modify the shape, orientation, or fill of
selected objects.

Figure 360: Transformation toolbar
The tools available on the Transformations toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

RotateFlip
In 3D Rotation Object
Set in Circle (perspective)
Set to circle (slant)

6)
7)

DistortInteractive transparency
tool (Transparency tool in
Visible Buttons)

8)

Interactive gradient tool
(Gradient tool in Visible
Buttons)

TSCP Classification
The TSCP Classification toolbar (Figure 361) provides tools to help in selecting the security of adocument. LibreOffice adds custom fields in the document properties (File > Properties >Custom Properties on the Menu bar) to store the classification policy as document metadata.
TSCP stands for Transglobal Secure Collaboration Participation.

Figure 361: TSCP Classification toolbar
The tools available on the TSCP Classification toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)

Apply documentclassification (Level)2)

Manage Document
Classification

Zoom
The Zoom toolbar (Figure 362) provides tools to reduce or enlarge the screen display of thecurrent presentation.

Figure 362: Zoom toolbar
The tools available on the Zoom toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Zoom In
Zoom Out100%
Zoom Previous
Zoom Next

6)
7)
8)
9)

Entire Page
Page Width
Optimal View (Optimal in
Visible Buttons)
Object Zoom

10)
11)

Zoom & Pan
Shift

Appendix B, Toolbars | 391

Sub-toolbars
3D-Objects
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D-Objects on the Drawing toolbar to open the 3D-Objects
sub-toolbar (Figure 363), then select the required 3D object to add to a drawing.

Note
The 3D-Objects sub-toolbar is identical to the 3D-Objects toolbar available atView > Toolbars on the Menu bar.

Figure 363: 3D-Objects sub-toolbar
The tools available on the 3D-Objects sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)

Cube
SphereCylinder

4)
5)
6)

Cone
Pyramid
Torus

7)
8)

Shell
Half Sphere

Basic Shapes
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar to open the Basic
Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 364), then select the required basic shape to add to a drawing.

Figure 364: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar
The tools available on the Basic Shapes sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

Rectangle
Rectangle, Rounded
SquareSquare, Rounded
Parallelogram
Trapezoid
EllipseCircle

9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)

Circle Pie
Circle Segment
Arc
Block Arc
Isosceles Triangle
Right Triangle
DiamondRegular Pentagon

17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)

HexagonOctagon
CylinderCube
Folded Corner
Cross
Frame
Ring

Block Arrows
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Block Arrows on the Drawing toolbar to open the Block
Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 365), then select the required block arrow to add to a drawing.

Figure 365: Block Arrows sub-toolbar
392 | Impress Guide 7.5

ClickTheon tools
the triangle▼ toofArrows
Callouts
on the Drawing
toolbarto openCalloutsfrom left toavailable
onthe
theright
Blocksub-toolbar
in Visible
Buttons
arethenumbered
sub-toolbar(Figure366),onthen
the required callout to add to a drawing.
right when
installed
the selecttoolbar.

Figure 366: Callouts sub-toolbar
The tools available on the Callouts sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)

Rectangular Callout
Rounded Rectangular
Callout

3)
4)
5)

Round Callout
CloudLine Callout 1

6)
7)Line Callout 2
Line Callout 3

Color
The Color sub-toolbar (Figure 367) provides tools to edit the color properties of a selected object.
After selecting an image or graphic to open the Image toolbar, click on Color on the Image
toolbar.

Figure 367: Color sub-toolbar
The tools available on the Color sub-toolbar are as follows:• Red — specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic
object. Values from -100% (no red) to +100% (full red) are possible.
• Green — specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected
graphic object. Values from -100% (no green) to +100% (full green) are possible.
• Blue — specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
Values from -100% (no blue) to +100% (full blue) are possible.
• Brightness — specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from 100% (only black) to +100% (only white) are possible.
• Contrast — specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from 100% (no contrast at all) to +100% (full contrast) are possible.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 393

24)
Line
Connector
Circle• Gamma — specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected
object,whichwithaffects
the brightness of the mid-tone values. Values from 0.10 (minimum Gamma) to 10
Curvesand Polygons(maximumGamma) are possible.

Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar to open theConnectors
Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar (Figure 369), then select the required curve or polygon to add
to a drawing.
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open the Connectors
sub-toolbar (Figure 368), then select the required connector to add to a drawing.

Figure 369: Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar
The tools available onFigure
the Curves
and Polygons
sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered
368: Connectors
sub-toolbar
from left to right when installed on the toolbar.
The tools available on the Connectors sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left to1) whenCurve,
Filled on the toolbar. 4)
Freeform Line, Filled
7)
Polygon (45°)
rightinstalled2)
3)

Polygon, Filled
Polygon (45°), Filled

5)
6)

Curve
Polygon8)

Freeform Line

Flowchart
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar to open the Flowchart
sub-toolbar (Figure 370), then select the required flowchart shape to add to a drawing.

Figure 370: Flowchart sub-toolbar
The tools available on the Flowchart sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

Flowchart:
7)
Process
Flowchart:
8)
Alternate Process
Flowchart:
9)
Decision
Flowchart: Data
10)
Flowchart:
Predefined11)
Process
Flowchart: Internal 12)
Storage

Flowchart:
13)
Document
Flowchart:
14)
Multidocument
Flowchart:
15)
Terminator
16)
Flowchart:
Preparation17)
Flowchart: Manual
Input
18)
Flowchart: Manual 19)
Operation
20)

Flowchart:
21)
Connector
22)
Flowchart: Off23)
page Connector
Flowchart: Card24)
Flowchart:
25)
Punched Tape
Flowchart:
26)
Summing Junction
Flowchart: Or
27)
Flowchart: Collate
Flowchart: Sort
28)

Flowchart: Extract
Flowchart: Merge
Flowchart: Stored
Data
Flowchart: Delay
Flowchart:
Sequential Access
Flowchart:
Magnetic DiscFlowchart: Direct
Access Storage
Flowchart: Display

Image Filter
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Filter on the Drawing or Image toolbar to open the Image
Filter sub-toolbar (Figure 371), then select the required filter to change how an image appears on
the display.

Figure 371: Image Filter sub-toolbar
394 | Impress Guide 7.5

The filters available on the Image Filter sub-toolbar are as follows:• Invert — inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of agreyscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect.
• Smooth — softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
• Sharpen — sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
• Remove Noise — removes noise by applying a median filter.
• Solarization — opens a dialogue box for defining solarization. Solarization refers to aneffect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photodevelopment. The colors become partly inverted.
• Aging — all pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color
channels are reduced by the amount specified. The red color channel is not changed.
• Posterize — opens a dialogue box to determine the number of poster colors. This effectis based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings.
• Pop Art — converts an image to a pop-art format.
• Charcoal Sketch — displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image
are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed.
• Relief — displays a dialogue box for creating reliefs. Selecting the position of theimaginary light source determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic
image looks in relief.
• Mosaic — joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The
larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has.

Lines and Arrows
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar to open theLines and Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 372), then select the required line or arrow to add to a
drawing.

Figure 372: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar
The tools available on the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered fromleft to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Line Ends with Arrow
Line with Circle/Arrow
Line with Square/Arrow
Line with Arrows

5)
6)
7)
8)

Line Starts with Arrow
Line with Arrow/Circle
Line with Arrow/Square
Insert Line9)10)

Dimension Line
Line (45°)

Stars and Banners
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Stars and Banners on the Drawing toolbar to open theStars and Banners sub-toolbar (Figure 373), then select the required star or arrow to add to a
drawing.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 395

Figure 373: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar
The tools available on the Stars and Banners sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered fromleft to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

4-Point Star
5-Point Star
6-Point Star
8-Point Star

5)
6)
7)
8)

12-Point Star
24-Point Star
Explosion
Vertical Scroll

9)
10)
11)
12)

Horizontal Scroll
Signet
Doorplate
6-Point Star, Concave

Symbol Shapes
Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Symbol Shapes on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 374), then select the required symbol shape to add to a
drawing.

Figure 374: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar
The tools available on the Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar in Visible Buttons are numbered from left
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

Smiley Face
Heart
Sun
Moon
Cloud
Lightning Bolt

396 | Impress Guide 7.5

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

FlowerProhibited
PuzzleSquare Bevel
Octagon Bevel
Diamond Bevel

13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)

Double Bracket
Left Bracket
Right Bracket
Double Brace
Left Brace
Right BraceImpress Guide
Working With Presentation
About this book:
This book is for beginners to advanced users and covers the main features of Impress, thepresentations component of LibreOffice. Using Impress, slides containing text, unordered andordered lists, tables, charts, clip art, and other objects can be created. Impress comes withpredefined text styles and slide backgrounds, but text styles and slide backgrounds can becreated to match the presentation requirements.
Impress is fully integrated into LibreOffice simplifying the exchanging of text, graphics and datawith Writer, Calc, and Draw.

About the authors:
This book was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community. Profits from the sales of theprinted edition are used to benefit the community.
A PDF version of this book can be downloaded free from:https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/

About LibreOffice:LibreOffice is the free, libre, and open source personal productivity suite from The
Documentation Foundation. It runs on Windows, macOS, and GNU/Linux. Support anddocumentation is free from a large, dedicated community of users, contributors, and developers.
Get involved as a volunteer and work in many areas: development, quality assurance,
documentation, translation, user support, and more.
Download LibreOffice for free from:https://libreoffice.org/downloads/

For commercial use:
Work with certified LibreOffice professionals for any business needs, from deployment orconversion from other office suits, staff training, or custom development needs.
For information on professional support services, go tohttps://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/professional-support/